Rheology Modifiers Handbook

RHEOLOGYMODIFIERSHANDBOOK

Practical Use and Application

byDavid B. Braun Meyer R. Rosen

Interactive Consulting Inc.East Norwich, New York

William Andrew PublishingNorwich, New York, USA

Copyright by William Andrew PublishingLlbrary of Congress Catalog Card Number: 99-32076ISBN: 0-8155-1441-7Prlnted In the United States

Published In the United States of America byWilllam Andrew Publishing13 Eaton Avenue, Norwich, New York 13815

1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Rheology modifiers handbook: practical use & application / by David B. Braun andMeyer R. Rosen.

p. cm.Includes bibliographical references and index.ISBN 0-8155-1441-71. Rheology. I. Rosen, Meyer R. II. Title.TP156.R45 B73 2000660’ .29--dc21 99-32076

CIP CIP

ii

About The Authors

David B. Braun

As a research and development scientist, David B. Braun has worked in a broad spectrum of industries and technologies for many years These industries include rubber, plastics, pulp and papermaking, mining, ceramics, cosmetics and pharmaceuticals. Mr. Brauns R&D activities have spanned a wide variety of consumer and industrial products employing rheology modifiers. David has written numerous technical papers for presentation to various professional organizations associated with these industries. He is also the author of two books relating to the pharmaceutical industry; Over-the-Counter Pharmaceutical Formulations and Pharmaceutical ManufacturersA Global Directory, both published by Noyes Publications. He is also the author of chapters in the Third Edition of the Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology published by John Wiley & Sons and Handbook of Water-soluble Gums and Resins published by McGraw-Hill, Inc. In addition, Mr. Braun has been awarded 11 United States and numerous worldwide patents. He was a member of several professional societies and is currently an Associate in the consulting firm, Interactive Consulting, Inc.1 He can be contacted at (508) 430-0815 or E-mail [email protected].

iii

Meyer R. Rosen

Meyer R. Rosen, DABFE, CChem, CPC, CChE, DABFET is President of Interactive Consulting, Inc., East Norwich, N.Y.1 He is a Fellow of the Royal Society of Chemistry (London); Vice President of the Association of Consulting Chemists and Chemical Engineers, a Director of The American Institute of Chemists and a Fellow of the American College of Forensic Examiners. Mr. Rosen consults for much Fortune 500 corporations involved in the development, optimization and quality control of new and existing products in the consumer, household, cosmetic, industrial, pharmaceutical and medical areas. He holds 21 US Patents and also writes regularly for the Focus Reports Section of Chemical Market Reporter and for Global Cosmetic Industry. Meyers interests include customized market research, analysis and development, technical writing and consultation to attorneys in technical product litigation. His broad fields of expertise include water-soluble polymers and their applications, organosilicones, and the creative application of fundamental surface, interfacial and rheological science for the solution of technical and business problems in the use and application of specialty chemicals. 1 P.O. Box 66, East Norwich, NY 11732, USA. Tel: (516) 922-2167, FAX: (516) 922-3830 E-mail: [email protected].

iv

Acknowledgements

Meyer R. Rosen acknowledges Selma M. Rosen, his beloved

wife and soul mate for her commitment to him in all things.

The authors thank Mr. Milton Mendez for his careful attention to detail regarding the number of Greek letters, superscripts, subscripts and equations found in part 1 of the text.

v

Page Part 1 Practical Rheology 1. Introduction 2 2. Special Characteristics of Dispersions and Emulsions 6 3. Three Schools of Rheological Thinking 9 4. Thinking Rheo-logically 12 5. Definitions 14 6. Types of Flow Behavior 19 7. Characterization of Non-Newtonian Flow: 27

Mathematical Models and Experimental Methods 8. Viscometry; Instrumentation and Use 49 9. Summary 64 10. Symbols and Abbreviations 65 11. References 67 Part 2 Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers Introduction 71 1. Acrylic Polymers 74 2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 81 3. Alginates 89 4. Associative Thickeners 94 5. Carrageenan 99 6. Microcrystalline Cellulose 106 7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 109 8. Hydroxyethylcellulose 114 9. Hydroxypropylcellulose 119 10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 121 11. Methylcellulose 128 12. Guar & Guar Derivatives 132 13. Locust Bean Gum 138 14. Organoclay 141

Contents

vi

19. Water-swellable Clay 174 20. Xanthan Gum 184 Part 3 Selecting the Best Candidates Introduction 194 1. For Food Applications 199 2. For Pharmaceutical Applications 213 3. For Personal Care Applications 222 4. For Household/Institutional Applications 243 Part 4 Formulary Introduction 259 1. Food Formulations 261 2. Pharmaceutical Formulations 297 3. Personal Care Formulations 340 4. Household/Institutional Formulations 425 Appendix A Suppliers of Viscometers and Other Rheological Instruments 489 Appendix B Trade Name Directory 498 Appendix C Suppliers of Rheology Modifiers 502

Part 2 Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers Page 15. Polyethylene 151 16. Polyethylene Oxide 157 17. Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone 161 18. Silica 167

vii

Rheology Modifier : A material that alters the rheology of fluid compositions to which it is added

Authors

Rheology modifiers seem to be almost as ubiquitous as plastics. Most of us regularly consume them in the food and pharmaceuticals we use. Cosmetic creams, lotions, nail polish and liquid make-up also usually contain rheology modifiers to achieve proper application characteristics. We clean our kitchens, baths, floors and automobiles with products that frequently contain these important ingredients. Even the paint we apply to walls and woodwork contains these useful additives. These are only a few of the applications of rheology modifiers. They may be multi-functional agents in these applications, providing such desirable effects as viscosity, the ability to suspend insoluble ingredients, emulsion stability, anti-sag and vertical surface cling, for example. During our lengthy careers in the Research and Development Departments of major chemical companies, we were frequently confronted with the need to select a rheology modifier for use in the application we were working on. This was invariably a long, arduous task requiring review of the technical literature of numerous suppliers of rheology modifiers to determine which types of products would be suitable for the application. This was followed by contact with those companies that supplied the desired products to obtain their latest technical literature and product recommendations. Finally, we would pare the list of potential candidates from hundreds to perhaps a few dozen.

Preface

Rheology \rēēēē----!!!!ääää----lllləəəə----jjjjēēēē\\\\ n : a science dealing with the deformation and flow of matter (fluids in this text)

Merriam Websters Collegiate Dictionary, 10th Edition

viii

This handbook is divided into four major parts: Part I reviews of the basic concepts of rheology and its measurement from a practical standpoint. This is information the researcher needs to compare the performance of various rheology modifiers in the intended application. Part II presents details about the many commercial products of each chemical type that are available from the twenty-six companies represented in this book. The products are arranged alphabetically, first by chemical type, then by suppliers name and finally by trade name. An attempt has also been made to differentiate products in a given product line. Over 1000 commercial products are included in this Part. Part III focuses on the important step of selecting the most suitable rheology modifier candidates. It summarizes the applications for which each type of rheology modifier is recommended so that the user of this handbook can immediately identify which types are recommended for the intended application. It also covers regulatory issues that the user should be familiar with when choosing a product for use in a food or pharmaceutical application. At this point, it is prudent for the user to contact the suppliers of the best candidates to get their recommendation for the products in their line which are the most suitable for the intended application.

But we often wondered why there existed no rheology modifier sourcebook, i.e., a single volume that would enable me to easily identify the best candidates for the application with a minimum investment of time. This handbook is our attempt to correct that deficiency. Our goal is to bring together, in one volume, the information that a researcher needs to select the best rheology modifier candidates for his/her project, whether it is a food, pharmaceutical, cosmetic or household/industrial application. It includes information on twenty different chemical types of rheology modifiers, from acrylic polymers to xanthan gum, manufactured by twenty-six chemical companies around the world.

ix

various applications and how they are normally incorporated into a formulation. Following these four major parts, are three appendixes that provide the names, addresses, telephone and FAX numbers, Internet Web Page locations and E-mail addresses for the suppliers of rheological instruments and suppliers of rheology modifiers represented in this book. Also appended is a trade name directory indicating the owners of trade names that appear in this handbook. The authors hope this book will enable researchers to reduce the time required to select the best rheology modifiers for an intended application from a matter of days to a matter of hours. David B. Braun Meyer R. Rosen

Part IV is a formulary containing the contributions of the product suppliers. These 227 starting formulations are arranged by industry; food, pharmaceutical, cosmetic and household/industrial. They are designed to show which rheology modifiers are recommended for

1

Part 1

Practical Rheology

Contents

Page

1. Introduction 2 2. Special Characteristics of Dispersions

And Emulsions 6

3. Three Schools of Rheological Thinking 9 4. Thinking Rheo-logically 12

5. Definitions 14 6. Types of Flow Behavior 19

7. Characterization of Non-Newtonian Flow: 27 Mathematical Models and Experimental Methods 8. Viscometry; Instrumentation and Use 49

9. Summary 64

10. Symbols and Abbreviations 65 11. References 67

Rheology Modifier Handbook

2

1. Introduction In the first section of Part 1 we introduce the basics of Practical Rheology. This includes examples of products and processes that employ rheological measurement as well as a concise summary of ASTM viscosity test procedures describing the characterization of a broad range of materials. The second section of Part 1 describes the more common types of flow behavior. This includes methods for measuring rheological properties and describing complex flow behavior with a minimum of useful parameters. The use of such tools and techniques allows rheological measurement to be used as an effective tool for the characterization of a broad range of industrial fluids. The discussion concludes with a description of several of the more common viscometers. Appendix A contains a partial listing of viscometer manufacturers and contact information as well as some of the viscometric instruments they manufacture. A wide variety of useful industrial products and processes require tailor-made flow properties as an integral part of product performance requirements. Effective control of such properties relies heavily on a knowledge of the effect of formulation and process variables as well as an ability to measure and characterize meaningful flow property information. Rheology modifiers play a significant role in achieving desirable flow characteristics and this handbook describes the properties of all the major types as well as their practical use and application. Examples of some of the wide variety of products and processes which rely on rheological characterization include food products, pharmaceuticals, biological fluids and a host of miscellaneous materials. In the food category, rheological phenomena are important for tomato juice, dehydrated potato granules, soft serve ice milk and microcrystalline cellulose thickeners. Also included in this category are single cell protein concentrates, milk coagulation, chocolate, dressings and sauces. In the biological area, work has been done on blood, serum, exocrine secretions, sweat, duodenal fluid and synovial fluid.

Practical Rheology

3

Among the many miscellaneous applications for rheology we find asphalts, hevea latex, aerated poultry waste and livestock slurry characterization. The list continues with color cosmetics, lubricants, clay gellants, black liquor (paper processing) and ceramics. Also included are one-fire glazes, enamel slips, thick film ceramic pastes and dental impression materials. Other examples include solder paste, molten glass, high titanium oxide slags and blast furnace slags. Coconut oil liquid soaps are also characterized rheologically as well as vinyl plastisols, urethane foam prepolymers, inks, paper coatings, high solids coatings and solvent based coatings. The American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) has provided standards of control and testing for many years. The use of Practical Rheology is clearly evident in the breadth and scope of the kinds of products and processes which benefit from rheological characterization. One of the authors is a member of several standards-making committees and is well apprised of the wide variety of industry specialists involved in setting up useful, working standards. While the individual reader of this work may be specifically focused upon a certain industry, or type of product, the authors feel that a succinct overview of the kinds of materials which have benefited will be of value in setting the stage for generating a powerful view of what Practical Rheology is and can be. In the Petroleum field the ASTM provides tests for testing of rubberized tar (D 2994-77), and coal tar (D 1665, D 1669-51 and D 5018-89). In the heavy petroleum end there are tests for unfilled asphalts (D 4402-87), asphalt emulsion resins (D 4957-95) and asphalt roof coatings (D 4479). Other rheological tests in the asphalt area include D 2170, D 3205, D 3791-90, D 244, D 2161 and D 4957. Bitumen rheology tests for non-Newtonian systems are described in D 4957. Testing of lubricating greases (D 3232-88), aircraft turbine lubricants (D 2532-93) and engine oils (D4684) are also covered as well as roofing bitumens in D 4989-90. ASTM has tests for hydrocarbon oils such as fuel oil pumpability (D 3245), lubricating oils (D 2270) and engine oils (D 5133 and D 5293). Testing of hydraulic fluids is described in D 6080 and automotive fluid lubricants are tested in D 2983-87. Oil standards are described in D 2162.


4

Rubber testing in the carbon black industry is conducted using D 4483, rubber latexes in D 5605 and D 1417. SBR latexes are covered in D 3346 and prevulcanized rubber testing in D 1646. Ammonia-preserved (concentrated) creamed and centrifuged natural rubber latex testing is described in D 1076-88 while rheological testing of synthetic rubber latexes is described in D 1417-90. The field of polymers has numerous ASTM tests for characterization and control. Some of these include tests for Hydroxyethylcellulose (D 2364-85), Ethylcellulose (D 914-72), Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose (D 1439-83), and Hydroxypropylcellulose (D 5400-93). Hydroxypropyl- methylcellulose testing is shown in both D 3346-90 and D 2363. Polymer-containing fluid testing is described in D 3945 while tests for polyols are shown in D 4989-91. Polyethylene terephthalate rheology testing is described in D 4603-96 and epoxy resin evaluation is described in D 2393-86. Polyamide rheology testing is covered in D 789. Common products such as chemical grouts are evaluated rheologically in D 4016-81 as are printing inks and their vehicles (D 4040-96), grout for pre-placed aggregate concrete (C 939-87) and glass, above its softening point (C 965-81). Paint testing is covered in D 1084-88 and D 562-81. Varnishes for electrical testing are described in D 115-85 and emulsion polymers for floor polishes are covered in D-3716-83. Liquid-applied neoprene and chlorosulfonated polyethylene in roofing water proofing is described in D 3468-93. Adhesives testing is available in D 1084-88 and D 4300-83. Testing of hot melt adhesives is described in D 3236-88 and hot melts made from petroleum waxes with additives are covered in D 2669-87. Mold powder testing above the melting point is shown in C 1276. Miscellaneous rheological testing is available from the ASTM for tall oil (D 803), clear liquids (D 1545), crude or modified isocyanates for polyurethanes (D 4889-93), volatile and reactive liquids (D 4486-91) and plastisols and organosols (D 1823 and D 1824). Still other ASTM rheology tests exist for solid propellants, starch and solder paste.

Practical Rheology

5

Having reviewed the host of rheological testing described by the ASTM. One can see the great value of rheology evaluation across a broad spectrum of industries. We turn our attention now to the use of rheology in the cosmetic and toiletry industry. Most of the products on the market today in this market are emulsions (either of the oil-in-water or water-in-oil types), aqueous suspensions or a combination of the two. Many skin care creams and lotions are oil-in-water emulsions, while liquid makeup formulations are suspensions of pigments in an oil-in-water emulsion. Antidandruff shampoos are usually suspensions. Certain organosilicones are highly effective dispersants for pigments used in color cosmetics.


6

2. Special Characteristics of

Dispersions and Emulsions The following quote is reprinted by permission of Brookfield Engineering Laboratories from Section 4.7.4 of its technical manual(53), More Solutions to Sticky Problems- A Guide to Getting More from Your Brookfield Viscometer. This manual has had worldwide distribution for over 20 years and has become a standard in the industry. Meyer R. Rosen, the co-author of this handbook, was a contributing author to this Brookfield Manual. Dispersions and emulsions, which are multiphase materials consisting of one or more solid phases dispersed in a liquid phase, can be affected rheologically by a number of factors. In addition to many of these discussed previously, characteristics peculiar to multiphase materials are also significant to the rheology of such materials. One of the major parameters to study is the state of aggregation of the sample material. Are the particles that make up the solid phase separate and distinct or are they clumped together; how large are the clumps and how tightly are they stuck together? If the clumps (i.e. flocs) occupy a large volume in the dispersion, the viscosity of the dispersion will tend to be higher than if the floc volume was smaller. This is due to the greater force required to dissipate the solid component of the dispersion. When flocs are aggregated in a dispersion, the reaction of the aggregates to shear can result in shear-thinning (pseudoplastic) flow. At low shear rates, the aggregates may be deformed but remain essentially intact. As the shear rate is increased, the aggregates may be broken down into individual flocs, decreasing friction and therefore, viscosity. If the bonds within the aggregates are extremely strong, the system may display a yield value. The magnitude of the yield value depends on the force required to break these bonds and is often critical in suspending materials within the formulation. If a materials flocculated structure is destroyed with time as it is sheared, a time-dependent type of flow behavior will be observed. If the

Practical Rheology

7

shear rate is decreased after some or all of the flocculated structure is disrupted, the materials viscosity may be lower than it previously was at the same shear rate. Since flocs begin to link together after destruction, the rate at which this occurs affects the time required for viscosity to attain previous levels. If the re-linking rate is high, viscosity will be about the same as before. If the re-linking rate is low, viscosity will be lower. This results in the rheological behavior called Thixotropy. The attraction between particles in a dispersed phase is largely dependent on the type of material present at the interface between the dispersed phase and the liquid phase. This in turn affects the rheological behavior of the system. Thus, the introduction of flocculating or deflocculating agents into a system is one method of controlling its rheology. The shape of the particles making up the dispersed phase is also of significance in determining a systems rheology. Particles suspended in a flowing medium are constantly being rotated. If the particles are essentially spherical, rotation can occur freely. If, however, the particles are needle- or plate-shaped, the ease with which rotation can occur is less predictable, as is the effect of varying shear rates. The stability of a dispersed phase is particularly critical when measuring the viscosity of a multiphase system. If the dispersed phase has a tendency to settle, producing a non-homogeneous fluid, the rheological characteristics of the system will change. In most cases, this means that the measured viscosity will decrease. Data acquired during such conditions will usually be erroneous, necessitating special precautions to ensure that the dispersed phase remains in suspension. (53) The cosmetic chemist is faced with the formidable task of combining a number of different cosmetic ingredients (frequently ten or more) to form a stable composition with the desired flow characteristics, application properties and aesthetics. Having accomplished the task in the laboratory, it must then be scaled up to production sized batches without losing any of the desired performance characteristics. Thereafter, the product quality must be controlled to ensure that each production batch is the same.(57)


8

It is common practice to measure the viscosity of a cosmetic composition and use this property as a quality control parameter. A single viscosity measurement at a single shear rate (or spindle speed if using a Brookfield Viscometer) does not provide adequate definition of the rheology of the composition. This is because the cosmetic product is exposed to a broad spectrum of shear fields during preparation, packaging and eventual use by the consumer. For example, the use of a centrifugal pump to transport the product from the mixing tank to the packaging station involves exposure to high shear inside the pump. The act of pouring the composition from the container is a low shear process, but spreading the product on the skin involves high shear. Since many cosmetic suspensions and emulsions display pseudoplastic rheology, it is important to measure and control the viscosity over a range of shear rates. In order to address the issues described above, the flow properties of such materials may be described both qualitatively and quantitatively. Although the mathematics of rheology can be extremely complex, a qualitative appreciation for these phenomena may be gained by observing some common materials. For example, toothpaste acts like a liquid when the tube is squeezed, but acts like a solid when squeezing ceases. Some paints flow onto a wall easily but do not drip from a brush or flow down the wall. Initial stirring of a latex paint can be difficult, but will become easier as stirring continues. On cessation of stirring, the paint thickens with passing time. Qualitative observations such as those above can be quite useful for describing the great variety of flow properties typically encountered. However, to those concerned with producing and controlling such properties, a more quantitative approach is necessary. According to Section 1.3 of reference (53), there are three schools of thought on viscosity measurement. We present them here and invite you to decide which you belong to, remembering that there is no right one and that each school has its merits at certain times.

Practical Rheology

9

3. Three Schools of

Rheological Thinking A. Pragmatic School The first school of thought is the most pragmatic. The person who adheres to this school cares only that the Brookfield Viscometer generates numbers that tell something useful about a product or process. This person has little or no concern about rheological theory and measurement parameters expressed in absolute terms. Quality control and plant production applications are typical of this category. B. Theoretical School The second school of thought involves a more theoretical approach. Those adhering to this school know that some types of Brookfield Viscometers will not directly yield defined shear rates and absolute viscosities for non-Newtonian fluids. However, these people often find that they can develop correlations of dial viscosity with important product or process parameters. Many people follow this school of thought. The applications rheology literature is replete with statements along the line of I know the data isnt academically defined, but I keep this fact in mind and treat the multi-point rheology information as if it were. In many cases, this produces eminently satisfying results and eliminates the necessity of buying a highly sophisticated and very expensive piece of rheological equipment. C. Academic School The third school of thought is quite academic in nature. People adhering to this school require that all measurement parameters, particularly shear rate and shear stress, be defined and known. They need equipment with defined geometries. Examples from the Brookfield line would be the Wells-Brookfield Cone/Plate Viscometer and the UL Adapter, Small Sample Adapter and the Thermosel accessories. With this equipment, the shear rate is defined and accurate absolute viscosity is obtained directly.


10

This then, is our view of the three schools of thought on viscosity measurement. You may need to think in terms of any or all of these depending on your background, approach, goals and type of equipment available. Brookfield users fall into all three categories. (53)

Before plunging into an understanding of a variety of mathematical models by which the rheological behavior of many practical systems may be characterized, we ask the reader to consider the question, Why make rheological measurements? We quote from Section 1.1 of Brookfields, More Solutions To Sticky Problems Anyone beginning the process of learning to think rheo-logically must first ask the question, Why should I make a viscosity measurement? The answer lies in the experiences of thousands of people who have made such measurements, showing that much useful behavioral and predictive information for various products can be obtained. This information is in addition to knowledge of the effects of processing, formulation changes, aging phenomena, etc. It is the knowledgeable analysis of appropriate rheological data that is the heart of what we have termed Practical Rheology. A frequent reason for the measurement of rheological properties can be found in the area of quality control where raw materials must be consistent from batch to batch. For this purpose, flow behavior is an indirect measure of product consistency and quality. Another reason for making flow behavior studies is that a direct assessment of processibility can be obtained. For example, a high viscosity liquid requires more power to pump than a low viscosity one. Knowing its rheological behavior, therefore, is useful when designing pumping and piping systems. It has been suggested that rheology testing is the most sensitive method for material characterization because flow behavior is responsive to properties such as molecular weight and molecular weight distribution. This relationship is useful in polymer synthesis, for example, because it allows relative differences to be seen without making molecular weight measurements.

Practical Rheology

11

Rheological measurements are also useful in following the course of a chemical reaction. Such measurements can be employed as a quality check during production or to monitor and/or control a process. Rheological measurements allow the study of chemical, mechanical and thermal treatments, the effects of additives, or the course of a curing reaction. They are also a way to predict and control a host of product properties, end-use performance and material behavior.(53) It should be clear at this juncture that Practical Rheology is a powerful part of the tools and methods used by the industrial scientist in a wide variety of fields.


12

4. Thinking Rheo-Logically

To begin a more in-depth study of Practical Rheology consider the question, Can some rheological parameter be employed to correlate with an aspect of the product or process? To determine this, an instinct must be developed for the kinds of chemical and physical phenomena that affect the rheological response. For the moment, assume this information is known and several possibilities have been identified. The next step is to gather preliminary rheological data to determine what type of flow behavior is characteristic of the system under consideration. At the most basic level, this involves making measurements with whichever Brookfield Viscometer is available and drawing some conclusions based on the descriptions of flow behavior types to follow later. Once the type of flow behavior has been identified, more can be understood about the way components of the system interact. The data thus obtained may then be fitted with one of the many mathematical models that have been successfully used. These mathematical models range from the very simple to the very complex. Some of them merely involve the plotting of data and just looking at it; others require calculating the ratio of two numbers. Some are quite sophisticated and require the use of computer-generated regression analysis. This kind of analysis is the best way for getting the most from your data. It often results in one or two constants which summarize the data and can be related to product or process performance. Once your system can be characterized by a few constants you can then change the formulation, arrange it, for example and determine how the constants change as a result of what you did. In this way, your rheological data indeed becomes a practical tool for assessing changes you make while developing or optimizing your system. With this approach comes the birth of Practical Rheology. Once a correlation has been developed between your rheological data and your product data, the procedure can be reversed and rheological data may be used to predict performance and behavior.(53) With this ground to stand on, we offer an understanding of the more quantitative and extremely powerful methodology available for the practical

Practical Rheology

13

application of rheology to industrially useful and commercially significant products and systems.


14

5. Definitions Consider the system shown in Figure 1.1. Fluid is contained between two parallel plates of area A cm2, separated by a distance X cm. A force F (dynes) is applied to the upper, movable plate and it attains a constant velocity V cm/sec. Since the bottom plate is stationary, the liquid may be considered to consist of several layers, each of which move at a different velocity between zero (at the stationary plate) and V cm/sec at the movable plate. If the liquid is under simple laminar shear, the following definitions can be made: Shear Stress ττττ = Force/Area = F/A dynes/cm2 (1) Shear Rate γγγγ = Velocity/Distance between the plates = V/X = cm/sec x 1/cm = (2) γγγγ = 1/sec (or sec-1) Coefficient of Viscosity ηηηη = shear stress/shear rate ηηηη = ττττ/γγγγ (3) ηηηη = Force/Area = dyne •••• sec Velocity/distance cm2 Since one dyne is equivalent to one (gm • cm)/sec2, the coefficient of viscosity has the dimensions of mass/ (length x time).

Practical Rheology

15

Figure 1.1: Defining the Coefficient of Viscosity Redrawn from (56) by permission of John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

This coefficient is usually expressed in Poise and represents the resistance of the fluid to flow. The inverse of the coefficient of viscosity is sometimes used and is known as the fluidity (1). One Poise equals 100 centipoise (cP) and 1 centipoise equals 1 milliPascal•second (mPas). In the US, centipoise is the commonly used unit while milliPascal•seconds is commonly used in most other nations. When the shear stress is applied by the pressure of the liquid upon itself, the resistance to flow is expressed as the kinematic viscosity ν and has dimensions of stokes. Kinematic viscosity = νννν = Coefficient of Viscosity (Poise) (4) Density of the Fluid (gm/cc) The coefficient of viscosity may be defined in two ways: as a differential viscosity or as an apparent viscosity. The difference between these can be seen in Figure 1.2.


16

Figure 1.2 Definition of Apparent and Differential Viscosity

A. Differential and Apparent Viscosity The differential viscosity is equal to the slope of the shear stress versus shear rate curve at some point A (or the tangent of the angle θ). The apparent viscosity is equal to the slope of a line that connects the origin with a given point A on the shear stress versus shear rate curve (or the tangent of the angle φ). Of the two methods for expressing the coefficient of viscosity, the apparent viscosity is usually chosen. This is because an apparent viscosity is easily measured at one fixed shear rate while a differential viscosity requires measurements at several shear rates followed by measurement of the slope at the shear rate of interest. B. Newtonian Fluids A Newtonian fluid has a constant coefficient of viscosity. A plot of shear stress versus shear rate results in a straight line which passes through the origin. In this case, the differential viscosity and the apparent viscosity are identical. In a Newtonian fluid, therefore, the coefficient of viscosity is known simply as the viscosity. Since the viscosity is a constant and independent of shear rate, one measurement serves to completely characterize the system.

Practical Rheology

17

C. Non-Newtonian Fluids Many of the fluids normally dealt with are non-Newtonian in behavior. A plot of shear stress versus shear rate results in a curve rather than a straight line. The coefficient of viscosity in such systems is different at each point on the shear stress versus shear rate curve. By treating this flow resistance data as if it were apparently Newtonian, at each point on the curve (i.e., using the tangent of the angle φ- see Figure 1.2), the apparent viscosity can be determined and will be seen to vary with the shear rate chosen. This variation of apparent viscosity can be particularly important when comparing the thickening behavior of two high molecular weight water-soluble polymers. One polymer may have a higher apparent viscosity than the other at a low shear rate, but a lower apparent viscosity at a high shear rate. It is obvious, therefore, that the measurement of a single apparent viscosity has little significance if the fluid is non-Newtonian. In such systems, it is not only necessary to measure viscosity at more than one shear rate, but the values must be in the range which is important for the particular application. (2) (Figure 1.3) A good example of this is the flow behavior of a paint since sagging occurs at a shear rate of about 0.01 sec 1 but brushing or rolling occurs at a shear rate of about 10,000 sec 1.

Figure 1.3 The Importance of Shear Rate for the Flow Behavior of a Paint Other examples(39) include the very low shear rate which occurs with the sedimentation of fine powders in a suspending liquid, for example, in color cosmetics, medicines and paints (10-6 to 10-4 sec 1), leveling due to surface tension effects, as in paints and printing inks (10-2 to 10-1 sec1) and draining under gravity, as in paints and coatings as well as toilet bleaches (10-1-101 sec-1).


18

Continuing up the spectrum of increasing shear rate, other examples of flow behavior include the extrusion of polymers (100-102 sec-1); chewing and swallowing of foods (101-102 sec1), dip coating with paints and confectionery (101-102 sec1) and mixing or stirring while manufacturing liquids (101-103 sec 1). At still higher shear rates, examples of flow behavior include pipe flow and blood flow (100-103 sec-1). Other examples of flow behavior at these higher shear rates include spray drying, painting, fuel atomization (103-104 sec1). In the personal care area, the shear rate associated with rubbing, as occurs in the application of creams and lotions to the skin is 104-105 sec-1. At the highest range of shear rate, an example of flow behavior is milling of pigments in fluid bases. This include paints and printing inks (103-105 sec 1 ), high speed paper coating (105-106 sec1) and gasoline engine lubrication (103-107 sec 1).

Practical Rheology

19

6.Types of Flow Behavior

Fluids exhibit several types of rheological behavior. These are presented in increasing order of the complexity of experimental technique required to measure them. The discussion below is restricted to simple shear flow and does not include normal stress phenomena or viscoelasticity. Excellent descriptions of these phenomena may be found elsewhere.(3)

Flow behavior can be represented both graphically and numerically. Graphical depiction, or rheograms, are generally presented for any two of three parameters: apparent viscosity, shear rate and shear stress. The most common of these are plots employing shear rate and shear stress or those employing apparent viscosity and shear rate. Each type of plot is useful in certain situations. The former type of plot can be thought of more as a raw data plot, while the latter type directly presents the effect of shear rate on flow resistance. The various types of behavior can be broadly divided into two classifications: Time Independent and Time Dependent flow (see Figure 1.4 and Figure 1.11).

Figure 1.4 Types of Time Independent Flow Behavior


20

A. Time Independent Flow 1. Newtonian Flow The simplest type of time independent flow is Newtonian behavior. A Newtonian fluid is independent of both time and rate of shear. Some examples include water, solvents, dilute suspensions and silicone oil. Two graphical ways of describing this type of behavior are presented in Figure 1.5. It should be noted that the Newtonian model describes an idealized type of flow. In many systems, a material may exhibit Newtonian behavior over a wide range of shear rate, but may, surprisingly, demonstrate non-Newtonian behavior outside of that range. A good example of this is silicone oil, which is used as a standard viscosity fluid! According to Johnson, (41) silicone oil of a given molecular weight is Newtonian until high shear rate is attained. At this point, viscosity decreases with further increase of shear rate.

Figure 1.5 Newtonian Flow 2. Shear Thinning (Pseudoplastic) Flow A second type of time independent flow is the decrease of apparent viscosity with shear rate. This is known as Shear Thinning behavior, or Pseudoplasticity. Shear Thinning is a common behavior and is exhibited by concentrated polymer solutions, paints, and dispersed systems such as latex, inks and emulsions. Such behavior occurs when a system possesses structure that can be reversibly broken down as a stress is applied and then removed. Typical rheograms are shown in Figure 1.6.

Practical Rheology

21

Figure 1.6 Shear Thining Flow It will be noticed in Figure 1.6 that the slope of the shear stress-shear rate

curve (or the apparent viscosity) increases rapidly as the shear rate approaches zero. In many cases, extrapolation of the curve to zero shear rate results in a positive intersection on the shear stress axis. This intercept is known as the yield stress. A fluid which has a positive intercept and a linear shear stress - shear rate function is said to exhibit ideal plastic flow and is known as a Bingham body. The rheogram for this type of flow is shown in Figure 1.7. The apparent viscosity is seen to

Fig 1.7 Bingham Body Flow approach infinity (i.e., a solid) as the shear rate approaches zero. The fluid acts like an elastic solid if the applied shear stress is below the critical shear stress, or yield stress.(8) If the stress exceeds the yield value, the material acts like a fluid. An apparent plastic viscosity can be defined using Equation (5).


22

Apparent Plastic Viscosity = (ττττ - ττττyield)/γγγγ (5) Experimentally, it is difficult to establish the yield values and even if they exist at all. This is because the shear stress - shear rate relationship must be determined down to very low values of shear rate and the increasing rate of curvature makes extrapolation to zero shear rate highly inaccurate. In some cases, materials are assigned yield values by extrapolation, when in fact they are actually shear thinning. To overcome these problems, several definitions have been proposed. Houwink (9,10) has defined a lower yield value, A and an upper yield value, C (Figure 1.8). The lower yield value is the extrapolated intersection with the shear stress axis and the upper yield value refers to the stress at which linear flow is established. Extrapolation of the linear portion of the line to zero shear rate determines B, the Bingham yield value. Some examples of systems which exhibit a yield stress include latex paint, cake frosting, certain types of ketchup and weakly cross-linked gels.

Figure 1.8 Shear Dependent Fluids with a Yield Stress Another definition of yield stress requires a linear dependence of shear stress on shear rate and the slope of the shear stress - shear rate function is one parameter of the Bingham model (Figure 1.9).

Practical Rheology

23

Figure 1.9 Definitions of Yield Value

Non-linear, time independent variations of this are Shear Thinning and Shear Thickening fluids that have a yield stress. Examples of these can also be seen in Figure 1.9. 3. Shear Thickening (Dilatant) Flow A third type of time independent flow behavior is that exhibited by the Shear Thickening (or Dilatant) fluid. In this case, the apparent viscosity increases reversibly as the shear rate increases. Such behavior is not as common as Shear Thinning and it is incorrectly believed by some, that the fluid must dilate when it flows (hence, Dilatant).(5) Examples of Dilatant fluids are concentrated clay suspensions(6) and suspensions of glass rods.(7) The accepted mechanism of Dilatancy depends upon four factors that increase particle interaction. These are: concentration, anisotropy of shape, size, and density.(7) In systems of high concentration, application of shear produces a rearrangement of solids causing a mechanical jam. Non-spherical particles precess when subjected to shear. This effectively increases the occupied volume and the effective concentration. Large or denser particles possess greater inertia and when shear is applied, they are momentarily retarded, then accelerated. The energy expenditure required to accomplish this results in an additional resistance to flow, or a higher apparent viscosity. Typical curves are seen in Figure 1.10.


24

Figure 1.10 Shear Thickening Flow B. Time Dependent Flow 1. Thixotropic Flow While the apparent viscosity of Newtonian, Shear Thinning (Pseudoplastic) and Shear Thickening (Dilatant) fluids is independent of time, other fluids exhibit these same properties and are time dependent as well (see Figure 1.11).

Figure 1.11 Time Dependent Flow If the apparent viscosity is measured under steady shear conditions and it decreases with time to an equilibrium value, the material is said to be

Practical Rheology

25

Thixotropic. On cessation of shearing, the apparent viscosity of a Thixotropic fluid increases with time. It has been postulated that Thixotropy is caused by the rupture of intermolecular bonds that are probably electrical in nature. A finite time is required for the rupture of these bonds because they vary in magnitude or distribution throughout the fluid. After shearing at a constant rate for a given time, an equilibrium is reached. In this state a balance exists between the applied shear stress and the strength of an appreciable number of bonds.(5) A decrease or increase of the applied stress results in a new equilibrium and the effect is reversible. In some cases, even after a long time, the apparent viscosity may only return to a fraction of its original value. This phenomenon is known as shear degradation. In making measurements on Thixotropic fluids, the shearing history of the sample and span of time required for the measurement is very important. If two samples are compared and they do not have identical shear history, the results will not be comparable. If the time effect is much shorter or much longer than that required for measurement, such effects can easily be overlooked. Thixotropy is usually associated with the presence of a yield stress. In some cases, the yield stress may be unaltered by shear and in others, it may be lowered.(9) Examples of these may be seen in Figure 1.12.

Figure 1.12 Thixotropic Fluid with Yield Value


26

Such Thixotropic curves are usually obtained by determining the shear stress first at one rate of shear and then at several others by rapidly changing from one shear rate to another. The procedure is carried out by first increasing shear rate and then decreasing it. The area within the loop is taken as a measure of the samples Thixotropy. Examples of materials that exhibit Thixotropy are latex paints, organosols and gelled alkyd oil paints.(2) Some vinyl plastisols have been observed to exhibit Thixotropic-Dilatant behavior. These unusual systems show viscosity increases with increasing shear rate but decreasing viscosity with time, at constant shear rate. 2. Rheopectic Flow The second type of time dependent-shear dependent flow is Rheopexy. While being subjected to steady state shear, a Rheopectic fluid exhibits more resistance to flow with passing time. This behavior is generally associated with aggregation or association as a consequence of shear. Rheopectic behavior is not commonly observed. Such flow behavior has been seen with dilute polymer solutions.(13) In these polymer solutions, Rheopexy is assumed to be caused by reversible cross-link formation (12). Examples of materials which have exhibited unusual Pseudoplastic-Rheopectic behavior are polymeric microcrystalline gels.(14) These systems show viscosity decreases with increasing shear, but viscosity increases with time, at constant shear rate.

Practical Rheology

27

7. Characterization of Non Newtonian Flow

Mathematical Models and Experimental Methods In dealing with the complexities of non-Newtonian flow, methods are required which allow the description, interpretation, and correlation of flow properties. To this end, a number of mathematical models and techniques have been developed which describe such behavior. In this section, attention is paid to several of these. Despite the trend to develop constitutive theories through the application of continuum mechanics (15), simple models for describing non-Newtonian behavior find many useful applications in industry.(16) Ideally, a simple model for non-Newtonian flow should have four characteristics.(17) It should: 1. Give an accurate fit of the experimental data 2. Have a minimum of independent constants 3. Have constants that are readily evaluated 4. Have constants with some physical basis The constants of such models have been successfully used in many industrial systems to characterize and correlate important responses. The present discussion separates these models and methods into two categories: time-independent and time-dependent flow. A. Characterization of Time-Independent Flow In a shear thinning fluid, a simple plot of shear stress versus shear rate (see Figure 1.6, shown again below) results in a curve that bends as it approaches the origin. In this region, experimental data is difficult to obtain. In many cases, such curvature is eliminated by using the method of Casson.(18, 19)


28

Figure 1.6 Shear Thinning Flow.

This is accomplished with:

ττττ1/2 = K0 + K1 γγγγ1/2 (6)

Where τ is the shear stress (dyn/cm2), γ is the shear rate (sec-1), and K0 and K1 are constants. In this method the square root of the shear stress is plotted versus the square root of the shear rate. A straight line results with an intercept K0 and a slope K1 (Figure 1.13). The intercept, K0, is usually obtained by extrapolation to zero shear rate and is similar to Houwink's lower yield value.(20) Casson's method has found use in correlating the flow properties of ink (18) and blood.(21) Casson's equation was originally derived for particles suspended in a Newtonian medium. An extension of his treatment(19) for particles suspended in a non-Newtonian fluid that follows the power law, results in equation (7) (Figure 1.14).

Practical Rheology

29

Figure 1.13 Casson Plot

Figure 1.14 Extended Casson Plot

ττττ1/2 = K'0 + K'1 γγγγB/2 (7) Where K'0, K'1, and B are constants. The constant B is equal to the exponent of the shear rate in the empirical flow equation known as the power law. This will be covered in greater detail later in the discussion. Equation (7) is plotted as the square root of shear stress versus shear rate to the B/2 power. The straight line which results has a slope K'1 and an intercept K'0 (Figure 1.14). The extended Casson equation has found use in correlating data for enamels, lacquers, and solvent solutions of film-forming polymers.(19)


30

A good empirical equation for correlating pseudoplastic fluids over a wide range of shear rates was developed by Williamson.(22)

(ηηηη0 - ηηηη∞∞∞∞) ηηηη = ηηηη∞∞∞∞ + ττττ (8)

1+ ττττm

In this model the fluid is assumed to have a viscosity both at zero shear rate (η0) and at infinite shear rate (η∞). The concept of a viscosity at infinite shear rate is really a mathematical artifact obtained by extrapolation. It has, however, found considerable use and may be interpreted as the condition where all rheological structure has been broken down.(23) Systems possessing different degrees of structural character can be compared on the same basis at infinite shear rate.(24) In Equation (8), τ is the absolute value of the shear stress and τm is the shear stress at which the apparent viscosity is the mean of the viscosity limits, η0 and η∞. At τ = τm: (ηηηη0 + ηηηη∞∞∞∞)

ηηηη = (9) 2

The Williamson equation was empirically extended by Cramer(25) in 1968 and took the form:

Where | γ | is the absolute value of the shear rate and α1, and α2 are constants. Cross(17) has derived a model based on simple kinetic theory that assumed flow was associated with the formation and rupture of links. This equation applies to any non-Newtonian fluid without a yield stress. It is also capable of fitting data in the low shear rate range where the Casson plot may become nonlinear for some systems (Figure 1.13). Cross assumed, as did Williamson (22), that a shear thinning fluid has two

(10)

Practical Rheology

31

regions of constant apparent viscosity: a zero shear viscosity η0 and an infinite shear viscosity η∞. The apparent viscosity varies between these two limits at intermediate ranges of shear rate, and this variation is characterized by a constant α. The equation is:

Where α and N are constants. In the wide variety of systems tested, N was most usually 2/3. α is characterized in terms of a characteristic shear rate at which the apparent viscosity of the system is the mean of the two limiting values η0 and η∞:

γγγγ mean = αααα-1/N (12) The system's apparent viscosity is:

(ηηηη0 + ηηηη∞∞∞∞) ηηηη mean = (13)

2 The apparent viscosity-shear rate relation (17) can be seen in Figure 1.15. The definition of a shear rate at which the viscosity is a mean is analogous to the definition of the mean shear stress τm in the Williamson model, Equation (8). While the Williamson expression is similar to that of Cross, the empirically extended Williamson Equation (10) is identical in form to the Cross Equation.(11)

(11)


32

Figure 1.15 Cross Model for Shear Thinning Flow. Cross:

(ηηηη0 −−−− ηηηη∞∞∞∞) ηηηη = ηηηη∞∞∞∞ + (11)

(1 + ααααγγγγN)

Extended Williamson:

Where α = 1 /α1α2 and N = α2. Cross (26) found that if N was equal to 2/3,

the model worked well in many systems, but he agreed with previous workers that N could be treated as a fourth adjustable parameter. The value of N has been shown to vary between 0.6 and 1.0 based on an analysis using the extended Williamson equation (16) (remembering that N = α2). The extended Williamson model was tested along with eight other models on 46 sets of non-Newtonian data and fit significantly better than the others, with a mean error of about 5%.(16) This method has been successfully used for solutions of Ammonium Polymethacrylate (18), Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose(25), Hydroxyethylcellulose, and Polyacrylic Acid.(18) It has also found use in correlating low shear rate data on kaolin clay suspensions.(27)

(10)

Practical Rheology

33

To obtain the constants in the extended Williamson equation (16), the data were fitted using a computer and a least squares procedure where the error term was defined as:

fi −−−− yi εεεεi = (14)

fi The experimental value of the dependent variable was fi and yi was the fitted value. In this equation εi was the error term. Since the Cross form of the extended Williamson equation (where N is 2/3) has been found effective for many systems, the graphical procedures recommended by Cross (17, 26) are summarized here. Three constants must be evaluated (α, η0, and η∞), and this requires two graphs. Two cases are considered: large α and small α. Case I: If αααα is large (see Figure 1.16)

Graph 1: Plot η vs. 1/γ2/3. The straight line which results has an intercept η∞ and a slope of (η0 − η∞)/α. Graph 2: Plot 1/(η−η∞) vs. γ2/3. The straight line obtained has an intercept 1/(η0 − η∞) and a slope of α/(η0 − η∞).

After obtaining η∞. from Graph 1, η0 is determined from the

intercept of Graph 2. Knowing η0 and η∞, the value of α may be obtained from the slope of either Graph 1 or 2. Case II: If αααα is small (see Figure 1.17)

Graph 1: plot 1/η vs. γ2/3. The straight line obtained has an intercept 1/η0 and a slope of α/η0. Graph 2: plot η vs. (η0 − η)/γ2/3. The straight line obtained has an intercept η∞ and a slope 1/α.


34

Figure 1.16 Solution of Cross Model for Large αααα.

Figure 1.17 Solution of Cross Model for Small αααα.

Figure 1.18 Casson-Asbeck Method.

Practical Rheology

35

The usefulness of Casson's equation was extended to the high shear rate region by Asbeck (20) who modified Equation (6) and obtained Equation (15).

ηηηη1/2 = ηηηη∞∞∞∞1/2 + ττττ0

1/2 γγγγ-1/2 (15) The equation is plotted as the square root of viscosity vs. 1/square root of shear rate (Figure 1.18). A straight line is obtained which has a slope τ0

1/2 and an extrapolated intercept of η∞

1/2. Equation (15) is useful for studying the characteristics of fluids at high shear. The slope τ0

1/2 can be used as a measure of the non-Newtonian "structure" of the system. The higher the slope, the greater the "structure." A Newtonian fluid produces a straight line parallel to the x-axis, and the "structure" term is zero because the slope is zero. A shear thinning fluid produces a line with a positive slope. Asbeck showed (20) that Equation (15) held over a shear rate range from 2 to 20,000 sec-1.

It can be seen in Figure 1.8 that the shear stress-shear rate curve of a pseudo plastic fluid with a yield value bends sharply near the origin. This bend is invariably squeezed into a tiny corner of the graph, and carefully drawn curves tend to aim at the origin and approach the shear rate axis asymptotically. If there is a yield stress, the value is difficult to determine using shear stress-shear rate curves alone, because extrapolation to zero can be highly inaccurate.

Figure 1.8 Shear Dependent Fluid with Yield Stress.

To overcome some of these problems, several definitions have been proposed. Houwink (29, 31) has defined a lower yield value, A, and an upper yield value, C (see Figure 1.8). The lower yield value is the


36

extrapolated intersection with the shear stress axis and the upper yield value refers to the stress at which linear flow is established. Extrapolation of the linear portion to zero shear rate gives B, the Bingham yield value. To obtain accurate yield stress values experimentally, it is necessary to measure apparent viscosity at extremely low shear rates and employ a better graphical representation of the data.

One method that meets the requirements described above is the spring relaxation technique of Patton.(28) The procedure is based upon the unwinding of the calibrated spring of a cone and plate viscometer. After winding to its maximum scale reading, the spring is released and readings are taken at convenient time intervals. The scale reading is plotted as a function of time on semi-log paper (Figure 1.19(A)). The apparent viscosity at any scale reading Si and time ti is expressed as a function of the slope of the curve at that point. S0 is the scale reading at time = 0, St is the scale reading at the chosen time t, and K is an instrument constant:

(16)

Joe Sulton

Practical Rheology

37

(A) (B)

Figure 1.19 Spring Relaxation Method Reprinted By Permission (28)

3M100Cαααα K = (17) (100)(22)( ππππ2)(r3)(2.3)

In Equation (17), M100 is the maximum torque value of the spring, C is

the scale reading that would be obtained if the viscometer scale were extended around the scale periphery to meet itself at its zero starting


38

point, α is the cone angle in radians, and r is the cone radius in centimeters. Using Equation (16), a clear template overlay can be made with a series of lines of varying slope which radiate from a central point (Figure 1.19(B)). The slope of each line is related to a different viscosity by Equation (16). The template is placed over the semi-log plot and adjusted back and forth, keeping the coordinate axes parallel until a straight line (corresponding to a viscosity) on the template becomes tangent to the scale reading of interest. Knowing the apparent viscosity at the chosen time and the shear stress (which is the dial reading times the spring constant) divided by 100, the shear rate can be calculated from Equation (3)

γγγγ = ττττ/ηηηη (3)

Figure 1.20 Obtaining a Yield Stress

If the procedure is repeated for a series of different time values, a plot of log τ vs. log γ can be made. The yield stress (equivalent to Houwink's lower yield value(29)) is easily determined as the value of shear stress when the curve becomes parallel to the shear rate axis. Patton also suggested using a "working yield stress" at some arbitrarily but thoughtfully selected low shear rate (i.e. 0.01 sec-1). Another method (30) that is simpler than Patton's and frequently used is also based on a spring relaxation technique but is not limited to a cone and plate viscometer. This method relies upon the unwinding of a calibrated spring that is attached to a spindle inserted in the fluid. Upon releasing the spring, torque measurements are recorded as a function of

Practical Rheology

39

time (see Figure 1.20). The spring continues to unwind provided the yield stress is less than the torque on the spindle. When the spring torque equals the equilibrium yield stress, the curve will level out parallel to the x-axis. The equilibrium torque is a function of the yield stress. Yield stress may also be determined by the graphical procedures shown in Figure 1.8 or by the Casson plot of Figure 1.13. The most widely used model(29) for non-Newtonian fluids is the empirical power law (31) of deWale.(32,33) This relation holds for many polymer solutions and can describe Newtonian, shear thinning, and shear thickening flow behavior. The relation is quite useful over select portions (16) of many viscosity curves but does not hold over as wide a range (15) as the extended Williamson equation, for example. The power law can be expressed as: (25)

ττττ = -K|||| γγγγ ||||(n-1) γγγγ (18) Where the constant K is called the viscosity index and is defined as the projected value of τ at a shear rate of one reciprocal second:

Figure 1.21 Power Law

K = ττττγγγγ = 1 (19) The constant n is known as the flow behavior index and:


40

d ln ττττ n = (20) d ln γγγγ

If the fluid is Newtonian, n is equal to 1.0 and K is known as the viscosity. If n is less than 1.0, the fluid is shear thinning (pseudoplastic), and if n is greater than 1.0, the fluid is shear thickening (dilatant). A ln-ln plot of shear stress vs. shear rate results in a straight line with slope 1/n (Figure 1.21). The parameter 1/n has been called the Shear Thinning (or Thickening) Index, STI, by Rosen(45) and the ASTM has adopted it a standard method for characterizing properties of non-Newtonian fluids.(54) The flow behavior index, n, can be used as a measure of the degree of shear thinning or shear thickening character.(34, 35) In cases where the ln-ln plot of shear stress vs. shear rate is not linear, the power law does not apply. However, it may be possible to separate the data into several regions, each of which approximates a straight line. In this situation the model can be fitted to each linear segment using different values of the slope (19), l/n. To obtain a plot of apparent viscosity vs. shear rate, apparent viscosity must be expressed in terms of the flow behavior index, n. By definition, apparent viscosity is:

ηηηη= ττττ/γγγγ (3) Substituting Equation (3) into Equation. (18):

ηηηηγγγγ = -Kγγγγ(n-1)γγγγ (21)

ηηηη = -Kγγγγ(n-1) (22)

Taking the ln of Equation (22):

ln ηηηη = ln (-K) + (n - 1) ln |||| γγγγ |||| (23)

Taking the derivative of Equation (23) with respect to ln | γ |:

d ln ηηηη = n-1 (24) d ln γγγγ

Practical Rheology

41

Figure 1.22 Power Law Rheogram A ln-ln plot of apparent viscosity vs. shear rate results in a straight line of slope (n - 1) (see Figure 1.22). If the flow behavior index n, one value of apparent viscosity and the corresponding shear rate are known, the flow properties of a power law fluid are completely determined. Another mathematical model that has found wide use is the empirical Ellis model:(33)

γγγγ = (A + Bτττταααα-1) ττττ (25) Where A, B, and α are constants. When B = 0, Equation (25) reduces to the Newtonian flow model:

γγγγ = Aττττ (26) where A is the coefficient of viscosity. When A = 0, the Ellis model reduces to the power law:

γγγγ = B τττταααα-1ττττ (27) γγγγ = B τττταααα (28)


42

B. Characterization of Time-Dependent Flow The second part of the discussion of mathematical models and methods is concerned with the characterization of time-dependent flow behavior. Experimental techniques for such fluids are far more difficult than for time-independent fluids. For example, the simple act of filling the viscometer will disturb a time-dependent structure and a long resting time may be necessary before valid measurements can be made. 1. Hysteresis Loop Method One method frequently used to characterize Thixotropic or Rheopectic behavior is the hysteresis loop. The technique consists of starting at the lowest shear rate available and obtaining an initial stress measurement. After a given time the shear rate is increased to the next higher shear rate setting and the stress measured again. The procedure is repeated until the highest shear rate is reached and the system is then sheared to its equilibrium stress. After reaching equilibrium the shear rate is reduced stepwise and the shear stress is remeasured at each point until the lowest shear rate is reached. The shear stress is then plotted versus the shear rate (36). Examples of Thixotropic and Rheopectic curves can be seen in Figure 1.23. In the Thixotropic curve, the "down" curve falls above the "up" curve.(51) The area of the loop is a measure of the Thixotropic breakdown (28) or the Rheopectic buildup due to mechanical working. The Hysteresis Loop method may be quantified using a "three-point system." In this technique, fluids are classified according to three parameters; apparent viscosity, shear sensitivity, and extent of Thixotropic behavior. Three parameters: "A", "B" and "C" are determined from a plot of apparent viscosity vs. shear rate (see Figure 1.24). The "A" value is the Thixotropy-free viscosity at the lowest shear rate and is the last viscosity reading on the "down" curve. It provides an apparent viscosity value after a standard shearing procedure. The "B" value represents an index of Pseudoplasticity.

Practical Rheology

43

Figure 1.23 Thixotropy And Rheopexy

Figure 1.24 Three-Point System for Thixotropic Fluids

"A" value viscosity "B" = (29)

Viscosity at the highest shear rate

The value of "B" is 1.0 for a Newtonian fluid and increases with increasing Pseudoplasticity.


44

The "C" value represents an index of thixotropy under a set of standardized conditions. It represents the fraction of recoverable viscosity after an arbitrarily chosen recovery time: (Viscosity after t min. recovery time) - ("A" viscosity) C = (30)

"A" viscosity The "C" value does not represent the ultimate state of thixotropy but only the extent present under the standardized conditions. The standard time may be chosen according to the patience of the investigator! 2. Recovery Time Method Another method useful in studying thixotropy is to shear the sample for a long time at a high shear rate. The shear rate is then immediately dropped to a very low value and the recovery of shear stress with time is observed (see Figure 1.25). The characteristic recovery time is a useful parameter (37) and depends upon the kinetics of structural buildup. A similar procedure may be followed for a Rheopectic fluid when the structural increase with time is observed.

Figure 1.25 Stress Recovery for a Thixotropic Fluid

Practical Rheology

45

Figure 1.26 Weltmann Method for Thixotropic Flow

A Thixotropic Index, I, suggested by Patton (28) is defined as: ττττ0.01 (before shearing) I = (31)

ττττ0.01 (after shearing) Where τ0.01 is the shear stress at a shear rate of 0.01 sec-1 . These values are obtained using the spring relaxation technique described previously. Weltmann (38) proposed a method which involves shearing the sample at a constant rate for a short time, t, then reducing the shear rate to zero, in steps, and plotting shear stress vs. shear rate (see Figure 1.26). A straight line is obtained and the slope is the plastic viscosity u. By repeating this procedure for various shearing times, a series of plastic viscosity values are obtained. A plot of u vs. ln t results in a straight line of slope B where:

u1 u2 B = (32) ln ττττ2

ττττ1


46

Figure 1.27 Correlating Time and Shear Dependence - I 3. Rosen Method(58)

Another method which has been found useful in correlating Thixotropic data is an empirical equation of the form:

ηηηη = A(γγγγ)B(t)C (33) Where A, B, and C are constants. The value of B is an index of Pseudoplasticity, while the value of C is an Index of Thixotropy. As B increases, the fluid becomes more shear sensitive, and as C increases, the fluid becomes more time dependent. To evaluate A, B, and C, the sample is sheared at a constant rate, γ1, and viscosity readings are plotted as a function of time. The process is repeated a number of times with a fresh sample and different values of shear rate (see Figure 1.27). A series of vertical lines is erected at various intervals on the time axis and the viscosity values at each shear rate are recorded. By letting:

K = A(t)C (34) Equation (33) becomes:

ηηηη = KγγγγB (35) Taking logarithms of Equation (35):

ln ηηηη = ln K + B ln γγγγ (36)

Practical Rheology

47

A ln-ln plot of viscosity versus shear rate, at constant time t, results in a straight line of slope B and intercept K1. The data is plotted for each of the time values chosen (see Figure 1.28). A series of intercept points and the corresponding time values determined are from Figure 1.28.

Figure 1.28 Correlating Time and Shear Dependence - II. Taking logarithms of Equation (34):

ln K = ln A + C ln t (37) A ln-ln plot of the intercepts K vs. time, t, results in a straight line of slope C and intercept ln A (Figure 1.29).


48

Figure 1.29 Correlating Shear and Time Dependence

Practical Rheology

49

8. Viscometry: Instrumentation and Use Essentially, a viscometer is an instrument that is capable of measuring the flow rate behavior of a fluid. A great range of such instruments have been designed over the years. These range from equipment with well defined geometries capable of providing shear stress data at well defined shear rates, to equipment without such capability. While the former type is highly useful for measurement of Newtonian fluids as well as non-Newtonian types, the latter types are equally useful to the Practical Rheologist. As we have pointed out previously, there are many situations where it is possible to obtain a reproducible set of numerical data which correlates with some critical aspect of product formulation, behavior or control. The ASTM has compiled numerous standards for the characterization of flow behavior. Many of these tests, while not the ideal rheological measurement from an academic view, are useful, reproducible and practical methods for the industrial scientist. In the following paragraphs, we succinctly describe many of these ASTM tests categorized from a viscometer point of view. The net result is intended to provide the reader with a sense of the great range of instrumentation available and their use and application in Practical Rheology. A. Well Defined Geometries 1. Capillary (Pipette) Viscometers A variety of these exist including the Saybolt Viscometer described in ASTM D 2161 and D 88. The Saybolt-Furol has been used for bituminous liquids (E 102-93) and also in D 244 and D 2161. Capillary viscometers are used for the characterization of the moisture content of polyamides (D 789), poly(ethylene terephthalate) D 4603-90 and the intrinsic viscosity of cellulose (D 1795-90). The use of glass capillary viscometers is described in D 446-93. Such viscometers are also described in D 5481-96 and for high shear rate, high temperature measurements in D 4624-93. Vacuum capillary versions have been used for characterization of asphalt (D 2171-94) and asphalt emulsion residues (D 4957).


50

High shear rate extrusion viscometers fall into this category as for example those used to characterize plastisols and organosols (D 1823). 2. Cone and Plate Viscometers The ICI cone and plate viscometer is described for high shear rate characterization in D 4287 and in ASTM D 3205 for the characterization of asphalt. 3. Coaxial Cylinder/Rotational Viscometers This type of viscometer is extremely common and widely used. For example, hot melt adhesives are characterized by means of ASTM D 3236-88, liquid applied neoprene roofing (D 3468-90), emulsion polymers for floor polishes (D 3716-83) and chemical grouts (D-4016-81). Other applications for this viscometer geometry include measurement of isocyanates (D 4889-93), coal tar (D 5018-89), unfilled adhesives (D 4402-87 and D 4300-83), mold contaminated adhesives, as well as mold powders (C 1276). The use of rotational viscometers is by far the most extensive category of viscometer described by ASTM. The list of applications continues with characterization of automotive fluid lubricants (D 2983-87), Hydroxyethylcellulose (D 2364-85), epoxy resins (D 2393-86) and adhesives (D 2556-80). Other examples include hot melt petroleum waxes (D 2669-87), rubberized tar (D 2994-87), lubricating greases (D 3232-88) and plastisols/organosols (D 1824-90). Still other applications include characterization of Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose (D 1439-83a), glass, above its softening point (C 965-81), mold powders above their softening point (C 1276-94) and varnishes for electrical insulation (D 115-815). The extensive list completes with characterization of natural latex (D 1076), adhesives (D 1084), synthetic latexes (D 1417-90) and non-Newtonian materials (D 2196-86). Elevated temperature rotational viscometry is another version of this testing as described in D 4402 for unfilled asphalts. 4. Falling Balls, Needles and Rods While not like the more well defined geometries described above, the category of falling balls, needles and rods is quite useful in rheological characterization. Examples include D 4040 (falling rod) and D 5478-93 (falling needle).

Practical Rheology

51

5. Cup Viscometers Examples of the use of these include dip type viscosity cups (D 4212-93), Ford (stubby capillary), Shell (long capillary) and Zhan type (orifice) viscosity cups (D 1200-94 and D 1084-86) and ISO flow cups (D 5125-97). 6. Miscellaneous Viscometer Types There are a variety of types including parallel plate plastometers (D 4989-90), bubble time viscometer for adhesives (D 1084-88) and D 1545 for transparent liquids. Ball drop methods are described for cellulose derivatives (D 1343-93) and flow cones for grout/concrete (C 939-97). Differential viscometers for characterization of polymers (D 5225-92), Engler viscometers are used for tar (D 1665), and the well known Stormer viscometer for paints (D 562-81) and asphalt roof material (D 4479). Other examples include the Mooney viscometer for rubber and carbon black (D 4483), SBR latexes (D 5605) and D 3346-90. Less common, but useful other examples include the California Kneading Compaction test for tar (D 1665-91), the diesel injector nozzle for polymer-containing fluids (D 3945), the tapered bearing simulator (D 4683) and the tapered plug viscometer (D 4741-96). 7. High Shear-Rate Viscometers ASTM examples of high shear rate viscometers include D 4624 for capillary type, D 1823-95 extrusion viscometer for plastisols and organosols, and D 4683 the tapered bearing simulator. Other examples in this category include the tapered plug viscometer (D4741 and D2556-80) for adhesives and D 5481-96 capillary viscometer. 8. Low Shear-Rate Viscometers Plastisols and organosols are characterized at low shear in ASTM D 1824-90 and lubricating oils in D 5133-90. 9. High Temperature Viscometers Examples include ASTM D 4624-93, capillary viscometer, E 102 Saybolt-Furol viscometer for emulsified asphalts (D 4683), tapered bearing simulator (E 102-93), for bituminous systems using the Saybolt-Furol viscometer, lubricating greases D 3232-88, apparent


52

viscosity in capillary viscometers (D 5481-96) and unfilled asphalts (D 4402-87). 10. Low Temperature Viscometers Examples from ASTM tests include engine oils (D 4684), automotive fluid lubricants (D 2983-87) and lubricating oils (D 5133-90). 11. Other Viscometer Types One final ASTM category must be covered and this is for the various types of viscosity measurements. These include kinematic viscosity (asphalt- D 2170), yield stress (engine oils-D 4684-97), relative viscosity (polyamides-D 789-91) differential viscosity, non-Newtonian viscosity (D 2196-86), apparent viscosity (D 5481-96) for petroleum waxes with additives (i.e., hot melts) and intrinsic viscosity (D 1745-90). B. Instrumentation and Mathematical Analysis When a fluid is Newtonian, the relationship between shear rate and shear stress is linear and the apparent viscosity can be measured in a wide variety of flow geometries. These include viscometer cup, bubble tubes, falling ball, capillary, cylindrical spindle in a cup of large radius, coaxial cylinder, and cone and plate viscometers. For the simple viscosity measurements usually required in production and quality control work, a suitable viscometer should be inexpensive, easy to use, and easy to clean. Examples of these are efflux viscometers, bubble tube viscometers and falling ball viscometers. 1. Efflux Viscometers Efflux viscometers, such as Ford and Zahn cups, are primarily used for Newtonian fluids (e.g., ASTM 1200-58). A given amount of fluid is allowed to drain from a container with a standardized opening (39) and the efflux time is converted to kinematic viscosity (36) by equation (38) C

υυυυ (Stokes) = K t - (38) t

Where K and C are constants for the particular viscosity cup.

Practical Rheology

53

2. Bubble Tube Viscometers Bubble tube viscometers, such as Gardner-Holt Alphabetical Bubble Tubes, are used to measure the kinematic viscosity of clear solutions. They consist of cylindrical glass tubes with graduations for filling and measuring (e.g., ASTM D 1725-62). The measurement is made by filling a standard tube and leaving an air space to form a bubble. The time required for the bubble to traverse the tube is compared to a set of standard tubes of known kinematic viscosity. The shear rate depends upon the rate of bubble rise and is in the 0.1 to 100 sec-1 range. Kinematic viscosity υ may be calculated empirically (36) from the time t and:

0.3 υυυυ = 1.00 t - (39)

t2 Bubble viscometers are low in cost and widely used. Good correlation of viscosity results has been obtained for certain applications and manufacturing operations.(36) 3. Hoeppler Falling Ball Viscometer A third type of simple viscometer is the Hoeppler Falling Ball apparatus. The operation of this viscometer is based upon the rate at which a ball falls through the fluid and is related to viscosity by Stokes law: 2 (ρρρρ1 ρρρρ2 ) gr2 ηηηη = •••• (40) 9 V Where η is the viscosity, ρ1, and ρ2 are the densities of the sphere and fluid, respectively, r is the sphere's radius, g is the gravitational constant, and V is its terminal velocity. The shear rate is a function of the velocity of the ball and decreases as the viscosity increases. Comparison of two non-Newtonian fluids using the same sphere may not be valid since the viscosities could be measured at two different shear rates. 4. Capillary Viscometers The most common and precise method for measuring the viscosity of a Newtonian fluid is the capillary viscometer. In this geometry, an applied pressure ∆P drives the fluid from a reservoir and through a fine bore


54

state, laminar, isothermal flow. Both the shear rate and shear stress are calculated at the capillary wall. To obtain τw, the shear stress at the wall, the viscous resisting force (τW2πrRL) is equated with the force pushing the fluid through the tube (∆PπrR2) (Figure 1.30):

ττττW = ∆∆∆∆PR/2L (41) The shear stress in a capillary viscometer varies linearly with the radius and is independent of the fluid properties. By substituting the definition of apparent viscosity from Newton's law, Equation 3, into Equation 41, the shear rate for a constant flow rate varies linearly with the capillary radius (Figure 1.30):

γγγγ = ∆∆∆∆Pr/2ηηηηL (42) If Equation (42) is integrated with respect to the radius, the well-known parabolic velocity profile is obtained.

Figure 1.30 Force Balance on a Column of Liquid Flowing Through a Capillary, Reprinted By Permission (40)

capillary of constant cross section. The fluid is assumed to be in steady-

Practical Rheology

55

Figure 1.31 Shear Stress and Shear Rate for a Newtonian Fluid

in a Capillary Viscometer, Reprinted By Permission (40) By integrating the velocity expression with respect to the radius over the cross-sectional area, the Hagen-Poiseuille expression for kinematic viscosity in terms of the flow rate Q is obtained:

ηηηη = ππππR4 ∆∆∆∆P/8QL (43) From Equations (41) and (43) the shear rate at the wall is:

γγγγ = 4Q/ππππR3 (44) In a non-Newtonian fluid, the shear rate depends on the velocity distribution which is a function of the fluid properties. To determine the apparent viscosity of such a fluid, the actual shear rate is obtained by multiplying the shear rate based on Newtonian flow by a correction factor due to Rabinowitch (40):

Where b is the slope of a log-log plot of 4Q/πrR3 vs. ∆PR/2L. Equation (45) is general and not restricted to any particular flow model. If the fluid follows the power law, b is constant. If the log-log plot is curved, it may

(45)


56

be possible to treat the data as several linear segments with a different value of b for each. Some errors that can occur in capillary viscometers are incomplete drainage because liquid adheres to the walls and kinetic energy losses resulting in a drop of effective pressure as the fluid is accelerated into the capillary. Turbulence errors may occur if the fluid enters the turbulent flow region where the Reynolds number is greater than 2100 and end effect errors can produce an energy loss when the fluid is deformed as it leaves the reservoir. For a Newtonian fluid, the length necessary to achieve fully developed flow, or "entrance length" Le, can be expressed in terms of the tube diameter D and the Reynolds number [DVρ/η]:

Le DVρρρρ = 0.035 (46) D ηηηη

Where V is the average velocity, ρ is the density, and η is the apparent viscosity of the fluid. The entrance length is added to the capillary length in calculating the shear stress. This method is not applicable, however, to non-Newtonian fluids where elastic phenomena are significant. One method of eliminating end effects is to determine the pressure drop, at constant shear rate, for several equal diameter capillaries of varying length. The pressure drop is plotted vs. the L/D ratio and extrapolated to L/D = 0. The value of the intercept is then subtracted from the pressure drop obtained in subsequent measurements (41) (Figure 1.32). Two examples of the highly accurate (42) capillary viscometers in wide use are the Cannon Fenske Viscometer and the Cannon Ubbelohde Viscometer. The former can measure a viscosity range from 0.3 to 20,000 cSt and requires a sample of about 7 ml. The latter can measure a viscosity range from 0.3 to 16,000 cSt, requires a sample of 11 ml., and is well suited for temperatures greater than 200o F and less than 0o F. In these instruments the hydrostatic head of the liquid produces the necessary pressure drop. The kinematic viscosity is determined by multiplying the efflux time by a suitable constant.

Practical Rheology

57

Figure 1.32 Method of Determining the End Effect in a Capillary Viscometer

5. Rotational Viscometers Besides viscometers based on capillary flow, there are a large number of commercial instruments which measure apparent viscosity using rotational principles. These include the Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer, the Haake Rotovisco Viscometer, the Ferranti Shirley Viscometer, and the Weisenberg Rheogoniometer. An excellent description of these and other viscometers may be found in Reference (40). A more recent listing of viscometers and viscometer companies is given in Appendix A. When choosing a viscometer, consideration must be given to factors such as versatility, simplicity, ease of cleaning, sample size, accuracy, and cost. For many industrial applications it is important to obtain accurate results with the least expensive, most versatile instrument. Of those mentioned, the Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer introduced in 1981 is probably the best available compromise between accuracy and price. As such, it has found extremely wide use in industrial applications. The variety of attachments available allows coverage of a broad range of shear rate and viscosity. In the older style Brookfield instruments, many of which are available in laboratories and plants today, a "dial viscosity" is determined at a given rpm by multiplying the dial deflection (0 to 100) by an appropriate "factor." These "factors" are obtained from a "Factor Finder" supplied with the instrument and should only be used for Newtonian fluids since the "dial viscosity" and the apparent viscosity are identical only in this case.


58

In 1981, the first digital Brookfield Viscometer was introduced. This was followed by the model DV-II digital in 1985, which automatically calculates viscosity. In 1988, Brookfield developed the DVGATHER Software for IBM PC compatible computers. In 1990, Brookfield commercialized the model DV-III Programmable Rheometer. Using the supplied Rheocalc Software, up to 200 data points can be taken and plotted. After the data has been captured, it can be numerically and graphically analyzed for flow behavior using some of the mathematical models that have been covered previously. These included the Bingham plastic model, the Casson model, the Power Law fluid model and the Shear Thinning (Thickening) Index (STI) model. A number of attachments available for the Brookfield Viscometer are amenable to mathematical analysis which allows the determination of apparent viscosities at well-defined shear rates. These include cylindrical spindle in a cup of large radius and coaxial cylinder (couette) attachments. Another Brookfield product features a cone and plate configuration. 5a. Cylindrical Spindle in an Infinite Sea of Fluid When a fluid is non-Newtonian, the shear rate depends upon the velocity distribution which varies with the fluid properties. To obtain the apparent viscosity, the functional relationship between shear rate and shear stress must be determined. To accomplish this, the velocity and stress distributions are obtained by mathematical analysis of the flow geometry. In this section, several geometries and commercial instruments are briefly considered. Emphasis is placed on the proper use of three widely used systems; the cylindrical cylinder in a cup of large radius, the coaxial cylinder (couette) geometry and the cone and plate geometry. The most widely used attachments for the Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer are the cylindrical and disk-type spindles. These have the advantage of ease of measurement and ease of cleaning. To make a measurement, the spindle is simply immersed in the fluid and a dial reading is read as the spindle rotates at a constant rpm. A spindle guard is used to protect the spindle, and the "dial viscosities" are calculated using the appropriate "factors."

Practical Rheology

59

The principal failing of this type of viscometer geometry is the difficulty in obtaining apparent viscosities at well-defined shear rates. As the fluid deviates from Newtonian behavior, the accuracy of the "dial viscosity" (sometimes known as an "apparent" apparent viscosity) decreases. In determining apparent viscosity, the shear stress and shear rate must be measured at the same point. The one most usually chosen is at the spindle surface. While the disk-type spindles are difficult to analyze mathematically, useful equations have been developed for cylindrical spindles. A number of such spindles are supplied with Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometer and a set of cylindrical spindles (300 series s/s) is also available. Calculation of shear rate at the surface of a cylindrical spindle is based upon a mathematical model of an infinitely long cylinder in an infinite sea of fluid. In a practical instrument, a spindle of finite length and a cup of finite diameter are considered a necessity and, therefore, certain corrections are required. Determination of the shear rate γ is based upon an equation derived by Krieger and Maron (43):

dΩΩΩΩ γγγγ = -2 (47)

d ln ττττB

Where Ω is the angular velocity in radians/sec and τB is the shear stress at the spindle wall in dyne/cm2. Calculation of shear rate by Equation (44) is difficult because it involves evaluation of the derivative of a nonlinear function (Ω vs. ln τB). A preferred modification (44) of Equation (47) is obtained by multiplying and dividing by Ω:

(48) (49)


60

Equation (49) is not dependent on the flow properties of the fluid. To obtain the shear rate, a log-log plot of the angular velocity Ω vs. the shear stress τB is required. If this function is a straight line, then (d ln Ω)/(d ln τB) is a constant. The quantity (d ln Ω)/(d lnτB) has been called the Shear Thinning (or Shear Thickening) Index, or the STI.(45) The STI is equal to 1/n in the power law equation. For a power law fluid, the STI equals 1.0 if the fluid is Newtonian. The STI is greater than 1.0 if the fluid is shear thinning and if it is less than 1.0, the fluid is shear thickening. Rosens (54) STI method has become a standard ASTM test method for rheological properties of non-Newtonian fluids (D 2196).

For the more complex case where the log Ω-log τB function is curved, Krieger (52) has shown that a point by point application of the power flow law will rigorously yield the true viscosity and shear rate. To determine the shear stress at the bob τB

Torque ττττB = (50)

2ππππRB2L

Where RB is the radius of the bob in cm and L is the effective length of the spindle. The torque (dyne-cm) is obtained by multiplying the units of dial deflection by the spring constant (dyne-cm) divided by 100 as shown in Equation (51) The apparent viscosity η is obtained by substituting Equations (49) and (50) into Equation (3).

Torque = Units of Dial Deflection •••• Spring Constant (51) 100

5b. Coaxial Cylinder (Couette) Viscometer A coaxial cylinder viscometer consists of a cylindrical spindle and a cup whose radius is only slightly larger than that of the spindle. In this geometry, the shear stress and shear rate are both calculated at the surface of the bob (Figure 1.33).

Joe Sulton

Practical Rheology

61

Figure 1.33 Coaxial Cylinder Viscometer

To determine the shear rate at the bob surface, it is assumed that simple shear flow exists in the annulus between the bob and the cup, that the outer cylinder is stationary, and that no slippage occurs at the surface. It is further assumed that the inner cylinder is driven with an angular velocity Ω, radian/sec, by the application of a torque T. For a bob of radius RB cm, cup of radius RC, cm, and cylinder of effective length L an equation has been derived for the shear rate at the bob surface(44) (Equation (52).

In this series solution, Ω is the angular velocity of the bob in rad/sec, S is the ratio of the radius of the bob to the radius of the cup, m is (d ln Ω)/(d ln τB, or the Shear Thinning (or Shear Thickening) index (STI) and p varies from 0 to ∞. For instruments which employ an annular space which is small compared to the cylinder radii, an approximation to Equation (52) is:

(53)

(52)


62

The approximation is valid as long as (-m ln S) is less than 0.5 (44). The calculation of the shear stress τB is obtained from Equation (50). Brookfield Engineering Laboratories manufactures a coaxial cylinder attachment (known as the UL Adapter) for their standard model LVT Viscometer. It consists of a bob and cup with a narrow annular space between them. For Newtonian fluids the apparent viscosity range of the UL adapter is 0 to 2000 cP at 0.3 rpm and 0 to 10 cP at 60 rpm. The approximate shear rate range is 0.37 to 73.5 sec-1. As indicated previously, the "factors" supplied with the UL adapter are valid only for Newtonian fluids. However, the geometry is well suited to the mathematical analysis presented above and the unit can be used for non-Newtonian fluids.(40, 48) 5c. Cone & Plate Viscometer Of all the various flow geometries available, the cone and plate type is probably the best. While it is easy to clean and uses a very small sample, its most important advantage is a constant shear rate across the gap (Figure 1.34).

Figure 1.34 Cone and Plate Viscometer

The velocity of the cone is given by V = Ωr, where Ω is the angular velocity and r is the radius. The gap distance y is:

y = r tan θθθθ (54)

Practical Rheology

63

The shear rate is:

V ΩΩΩΩr ΩΩΩΩ = = (55) y r tan θθθθ tan θθθθ

And for small angles:

γγγγ = ΩΩΩΩ/θθθθ (56) Since r drops out of Equation (55), the shear rate is independent of the radius and is a function of the cone angle only. The torque M is calculated from equation (57):

2ππππr3

M = ττττr (58) 3

Solving for the shear stress at radius r,

ττττr = 3M/2ππππr3 (59) The apparent viscosity η is τr/γ or:

3M/2ππππr3 ηηηη = (60) ΩΩΩΩ/θθθθ

ηηηη = 3Mθθθθ/2ππππr3ΩΩΩΩ (61)

A number of commercial cone and plate viscometers are available. These include the Haake Rotovisco Viscometer, the Ferranti Shirley Viscometer, the Weisenberg Rheogoniometer and the Wells-Brookfield Cone and Plate Viscometer. Large variations in price exist because of the degree of sophistication in solving such problems as temperature control and maintaining a constant gap setting between the cone and plate.

(57)


64

9. Summary Part 1 has presented a broad range of empirical and theoretical mathematical models useful for characterizing non-Newtonian flow behavior of a wide variety of industrial and consumer products. These models have been organized in order of increasing complexity, and their use is facilitated by presentation in graphical form that provides the investigator with a means for easily obtaining the equation parameters. These parameters can be employed to characterize a product or system and assess changes introduced by formulation variations and processing conditions. Some of the more common viscometer types are also described. A thorough, but partial listing of viscometer companies and some of the instruments they manufacture is available in Appendix A. The practical application of rheology to a wide variety of products has been demonstrated by reference to the significant number of ASTM test methods that have been organized and referred to in the body of Part 1.

Practical Rheology

65

10. Symbols and Abbreviations

A number of symbols have been used in this work to represent more than one parameter. However, each of these is clearly defined in the text within the appropriate context. The authors have retained these various symbols as they appear in the original references in order to facilitate the readers efforts to look further at the original works cited. cP centipoise D diameter Dyn Dynes fi experimental value of dependent variable F force (dynes) I Thixotropic Index K0, K1 Casson equation constants K0', K1 Extended Casson equation constants Le entrance length M torque M100 maximum torque value of a spring mPas milliPascal•seconds N constant n flow behavior index Q flow rate r radius in a cone and plate viscometer S radius of bob/radius of cup So, St scale readings at time zero and time t STI Shear thinning (or thickening) index t time u plastic viscosity V velocity (cm/sec) X distance (cm) yi fitted value (Equation 14) y gap distance in cone and plate viscometer


66

Greek Letters γ, shear rate (sec-1) (These two symbols are used interchangeably

in the text) ε error term η viscosity (Poise) η∞ infinite shear viscosity η0 zero shear viscosity θ angle measurement υ kinematic viscosity (Stokes) ρ1, ρ2 density of sphere and fluid τ shear stress (dynes/cm2) τm (η0 + η∞)/2 (dynes/cm2) τyield yield value (dyne/cm2) τr,τw,τB shear stress at wall θ,Ω angular velocity (radians/sec) Authors Note: Sections 7 thru 11 of this text have been adapted from Reference 55 by courtesy of Marcel Deckker, Inc., New York

Practical Rheology

67

11. References

1. L. M. Krieger, S.H. Maron, J. Appl. Phys., 25, No.1,72 (1954) 2. P. E. Pierce, Journal of Paint Technology, 41, No.533, 383(1969) 3. J. D. Ferry, Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers,Wiley, NY,1961 4. G. C. Johnson, J. Chem & Eng. Data, 6, No.2, 275 (1961) 5. J. R. Van Wazer, et. al. Viscosity and Flow Measurement, A

Laboratory Handbook of Rheology, Interscience, NY (1963), pp. 18, 20.

6. H. Van Olphen, An Introduction to Clay Colloid Chemistry, Interscience, NY, 1963, pp. 145

7. B. Clark, Trans Instn. Chem. Engrs., 45, T251 (1967) 8. S. Middleman, The Flow of High Polymers, Continuum and

Molecular Rheology, Interscience, 1968, pp. 2. 9. P. Sherman, Emulsion Science, Academic Press, 1968, Chapter 4 10. R. Houwink, Elasticity, Plastcity and Structure of Matter, Dover,

NY, 1958. 11. N. Z. Erdi, et. al. J. Coll. and Intf. Sci., 28, No.1 (1968) 12. R. N. Weltmann, Rheology, Vol. 3 Academic Press, NY (1960)

pp. 215 13. T. Masuo, et. al. J. Coll. and Intf. Sci., 24, 241 (1967). 14. Personal Communication to Mr. David Howard, Applied

Rheologist, Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Stoughton, Mass.

15. R. B. Bird, AIChE-Inst. Chem. Eng. Symp. Ser., 4, (1965). 16. S. D. Cramer and J. M. Marchello, AIChE J., 14 (6), 980 (1968). 17. M. M. Cross, J. Colloid. Sci., 20, 417 (1965). 18. N. Casson, Rheology of Disperse Systems, Pergamon, New

York, 1959. 19. R. D. Vaughn and J. C. Hatcher, Offic. Dig., Fed. Soc. Paint

Technol., 37, 1168 (1965). 20. W. F. Asbeck, Ibid., 33, 65 (1961). 21. J. F. Stoltz and A. Larcan, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 30 (4),

(1969). 22. R. V. Williamson, Ind. Eng. Chem., 21(11), (1929). 23. A. Doroszkowski and R. J. Lambourne, J. Colloid Interface Sci.,

26, 128 (1968).


68

24. W. F. Asbeck and M. Van Loo, Ind. Eng. Chem., 46, 1291 (1954).

25. S. D. Cramer, Ph.D. Thesis, University of Maryland, 1968. 26. M. M. Cross, Advances in Polymer Science and Technology

(S.C.I. Monograph 26), Gordon and Breach, New York, 1967. 27. R. J. Hunter and S. F. Nichol, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 28 (2),

250 (1968). 28. T. C. Patton, J. Paint Technol., 38(502), 656 (1966). 29. R. Houwink, Elasticity, Plasticity and Structure of Matter,

Dover, New York, 1958. 42 30. R. Kreider, Offic. Dig., Fed. Soc. Paint Technol., 36, 1244

(1964). 31. P. Sherman, Emulsion Science, Academic, New York, 1968,

Chap. 4. 32. A. DeWale, J. Oil Colour Chem. Assoc., 4, 33 (1923). 33. R. B. Bird et al., Transport Phenomena, Wiley, New York, 1962. 34. E. L. Warrick, Ind. Eng. Chem., 47, 1616 (1955). 35. A. L. Back, Rubber Age, 85 (4), 639 (1959). 36. P. E. Pierce, J. Paint Technol., 41 (533), 383 (1969). 37. H. Green, Industrial Rheology and Rheological Structure, Wiley,

New York, 1949, pp. 52. 38. R. N. Weltmann, Ind. Eng. Chem., 35, 424 (1943). 39. H. A. Gardner and G. G. Sward, Paint Testing Manual, 12 ed.,

Gardner, Bethesda, Maryland, 1962. 40. J. R. Van Wazer et al., Viscosity and Flow Measurement, A

Laboratory, Handbook of Rheology, Interscience, New York, 1963, pp. 18, 20.

41. G. C. Johnson, J. Chem. Eng. Data, 6 (2), 275 (1961). 42. Cannon Instrument Co., Viscometers (Bulletin 19). 43. I. M. Krieger and S. H. Maron, J. Appl. Phys., 23 (l), 147 (1952). 44. S. Middleman, The Flow offfigh Polymers, Continuum and

Molecular Rheology, Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1968, pp. 2.

45. M. R. Rosen, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 36, 350 (1971). 46. Personal Communication to Mr. David Howard, Applied

Rheologist, Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Stoughton, Massachusetts.

Practical Rheology

69

47. Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Brookfield Synchro-Lectric Viscometers, Shear Rate and Shear Stress Formulas (Data Sheet 66-0112).

48. M. R. Rosen, J. Colloid Interface Sci., 39(2), 413 (1972). 49. Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., The Brookfield UL

Adapter (Laboratory Data Sheet 034-C). 50. Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc., Solutions to Sticky

Problems. 51. N. Z. Erdi et.al. J. Colloid Interface Sci, 28 (1), (1968) 52. I. M. Krieger, Trans. Social Rheology, 12,5 (1968) 53. Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, More Solutions to Sticky

Problems, Rosen, M. R., contributing author. 54. Standard Test Method for Rheological Properties of Non-

Newtonian Materials by Rotational Viscometer, ASTM D 2196. 55. M.R. Rosen, Characterization of Non-Newtonian Flow,

Polym.-Plast. Technol. Eng., 12(1), 1-42, Marcel Dekker, Inc., (1979)

56. T.C. Patton, Paint Flow and Pigment Dispersion-A Rheological Approach to Coating and Ink Technology, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, (1979)

57. D. B. Braun, Formulating and Characterizing Cosmetic Suspensions/Emulsions, R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc. Report No. 910, (1995)

58. M.R. Rosen, Practical Rheology A Thinking Protocol for the Cosmetic Chemist, Presented at the HBA Global Expo Scientific Conference 1999, June, 1999, New York

71

Part 2

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers

Contents Page Introduction 72 1. Acrylic Polymers 74 2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 81 3. Alginates 89 4. Associative Thickeners 94 5. Carrageenan 99 6. Microcrystalline Cellulose 106 7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 109 8. Hydroxyethylcellulose 114 9. Hydroxypropylcellulose 119 10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 121 11. Methylcellulose 128 12. Guar & Guar Derivatives 132 13. Locust Bean Gum 138 14. Organoclays 141 15. Polyethylene 151 16. Polyethylene Oxide 157 17. Polyvinylpyrrolidone 161 18. Silica 167 19. Water-swellable Clay 174 20. Xanthan Gum 184


72

Introduction

This part of the handbook presents the commercially available product lines of the 26 rheology modifier suppliers who have provided technical information for this work. Over 1000 products are included herein. It is also probable that there are other suppliers that the authors are not aware of, especially in the Pacific Rim or South America. Handbook users in those areas should consult local manufacturer directories to determine if other suppliers exist in their area. The term commercially available is intended to indicate that the products listed are available to any customer in any quantity, from as little as 50 lbs. to 50 tons or more. Many suppliers also produce other grades of product that are classified as experimental or proprietary. These are grades that are specially manufactured for specific large-volume applications or customers. These grades are not included in this handbook. Twenty different chemical types of rheology modifiers are included in this part of the handbook. They differ in chemical structure and performance. Each Section begins with a brief description of the chemical type and some key features and recommended applications for the particular type of rheology modifier. This information is obtained from the suppliers technical literature and is not intended to be an exhaustive treatise on the subject. In-depth technical information is usually available in the suppliers technical literature. Reference to this technical literature is also included in the introduction to each Section. It does not contain information on the suppliers recommended handling procedures for his products. This is because it may vary for different suppliers and may, in fact, vary for different products from the same supplier. The suppliers technical literature is always the best source of information on the recommended handling procedure to use.


73

In each section the product lines are presented alphabetically by suppliers name. Each product line is arranged according to the suppliers recommended application area for the products, i.e., food, pharmaceutical, personal care or household/institutional. The product line data are believed to be complete and accurate as of mid-1999. But suppliers are continually adding new and improved products to their lines. The handbook user is urged to contact suppliers (see Appendix C for contact information) to learn about new products that might also be candidates for the intended application. Note: These tables also contain the following less common abbreviations: cSt = centistoke n/a = not available or not

applicable mPas = milliPascal•second = centipoise ppm = parts per million INCI = International Nomenclature Cosmetic Ingredient

soln = solution

µm = micrometer or micron (10-6 meter) nm = nanometer (10-9 meter)


74

1. Acrylic Polymers A. Chemical Nature Acrylic acid, H2C=CHCOOH, is an important building block of the chemical industry. The molecule contains both an unsaturated moiety that can be used for free-radical polymerization and a carboxylic acid group that can be reacted with a host of different chemical species. Although the overall chemical structure of the group of polymers in this Section varies, they all possess two common features; an acrylic polymer or copolymer backbone and pendant carboxylic acid groups, in some cases reacted with other organic species. When dispersed in aqueous media, and while the system is acidic, they produce minimal rheological effects. But when the pendant carboxylic groups are neutralized with an alkaline ingredient, the polymer is said to swell producing dramatic viscosity increase and rheology modification. Thus, these products are sometimes referred to as alkali-swellable acrylic polymers. They are highly efficient thickeners and rheology modifiers.

A. Recommended Application Areas

C. Ionic Charge

1. Personal Care 2. Household/Institutional

Anionic

B. Recommended Solvent Systems

D. Compatibility/Stability Characteristics

1. Water 2. Mixtures of water and minor amounts of water-miscible organic solvents

1. Not recommended for systems containing monomeric, cationic species 2. Some products suitable for high pH (>10) systems 3. Some products suitable for systems containing peroxides


75

F. Useful References: 1. Acrysol Thickeners and Rheology Modifiers, Rohm and Haas

Company Bulletin RMT2A. 2. Aculyn33 personal care polymer, Rohm and Haas Company

Bulletin FC-258.

2. Hypan Hydrogels The link to versatile elegance, LIPO Chemicals Bulletin.

3. STRUCTURE Rheology modifiers for hard-to-thicken systems,

National Starch & Chemical Bulletin1715-97-292.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

76

1. Acrylic Polymers

Table 2.la LIPO Chemicals, Inc.Patterson, NJ, USA

Trade Name INCI Name Viscosity’, Appearance CommentsmPas

Hypan ® SA- 1 00H Acrylic Acid/Acrylonitrogens 15,000-40,000 Off-white to Straw RequiresCopolymer Powder Neutralization

Hypan SR- 150H Acrylic Acid/Acrylonitrogens 3,000-25,000 Off-white to Straw RequiresCopolymer Powder Neutralization

Hypan SS-201 Ammonium 35,000-65,000 Off-white to Straw PreneutralizedAcrylates/Acrylonitrogens Copolymer Powder with NH4OH

Note for LIPO Acrylic Polymer data:1 0.5% Aqueous solution measured at 25°C using Brookfield Model LVT with Helipath spindle T-E @ 12 rpm.

1. Personal Care Grades

.

.

.

.

.

.

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers

77

1. Acrylic Polymers

Table 2.lb National Starch and ChemicalBridgewater, NJ, USA

1. Personal Care GradesTrade Name Viscosity mPas4 pH Form Solids, Features

(As Supplied) %STRUCTURE® 2001 1 15,000-30,000 @ 1% 2.2-3.5 Emulsion 28-30 For high pH systems, low

odorSTRUCTURE 300 l2 20,000-52,000 @ 2% 2.2-3.5

Emulsion28-30

STRUCTURE PLUS3 High salt stability, low odor

n/a 8-9Emulsion

19-21 Compatible with cationics, /I

Notes for National Starch and Chemical Data:1 INCI Name: Acrylates/Steareth-20 Itaconate Copolymer2 INCI Name: AcrylatesKeteth-20 Itaconate Copolymer

3 INCI Name: Acrylates/Aminoacrylates Copolymer (Proposed)4 pH adjusted to 9 with NH4OH using Brookfield Model RV @ 10 rpm..

acid-swellable

.

.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

78

1. Acrylic Polymers

Table 2.1c. RHEOX, Inc.Hightstown, NJ, USA

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers

79

1. Acrylic Polymers

Table 2.ld. Rohm and Haas CompanyPhiladelphia, PA, USA

1. Personal Care GradesTrade Name I INCI Name 1 Viscosity, mPas 1 pH 1 Appearance I Solids Content, %ACULYN® 22 Acry1ates/Steareth-20 202 3.0 Milky Liquid 30

Methacrylate CopolymerACULYN 33 Acrylates Copolymer n/a 3.5 Milky Liquid 28

2 . Industrial GradesTrade Name 1 Polymer Type1 1 Viscosity mPas 1 pH I Appearance 1 Solids Content, %

ACRY SOL® ASE-60 ASAE 20 max.3 3.5 Milky Liquid 28ACRYSOL ASE-75ACRYSOL ASE-95

ACRY SOL ASE-95N-PACRYSOL ASE-108

ACRYSOL ASE- 108NPACRYSOL ASE-1000

ACRYSOL G-l 10ACRYSOL G- 111

ACRYSOL GSACRYSOL HV- 1

ASAEASAEASAEASAEASAEASAE

APNPS

SPSP

20 max.3503

200 max.2003

70 max.100 max.90-1704

70010,000-20,0004

15,000-20,0004

3.03.02.93.03.03.09.29.39.19.6

Milky LiquidMilky LiquidMilky LiquidMilky LiquidMilky LiquidMilky Liquid

Colorless SolutionClear-Hazy SolutionClear, Amber Soln.Clear, Amber Soln.

401818201829221 1

12.510

.

.

.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

80

Table 2.1d, continued

Rohm and Haas Acrylic Polymers2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Polymer Type1 Viscosity mPas pH Appearance Solids Content, %ACRYSOL RM-5 HMAE 30 max. 2.7 Milky Liquid 30ACRYSOL RM-6 30 max. 2.7 Milky Liquid 30

ACRYSOL T-P-615 20 max.2 3.0 Milky Liquid 30ACRYSOL T-T-935 25 max. 3.2 Milky Liquid 30ACRYSOL T-T-950 40 3 Milky Liquid 30ACRYSOL WS-24 ASAE n/a 7.0 Milky Liquid 36 ACUSOL® 810 ASEA 2003 2.8-3.8 Milky Liquid 18

ACUSOL 820 1003 3.0 Milky Liquid 30ACUSOL 823 30 3.2 Milky Liquid 30ACUSOL 830 ASAE 10 3 2.5-3.5 Milky Liquid 28

Notes for Rohm and Haas Acrylic/Acrylate data:1ASAE = Alkali-swellable Acrylic Emulsion, NPS = Neutralized Polyacrylate Solution, HMAE = Hydrophobically-modified, Alkali-swellable Acrylic Emulsion.2 Brookfield Model LV @ 60 rpm with Spindle #13 Brookfield Model LV @ 12 rpm with Spindle #14 Brookfield Model LV @ 12 rpm with Spindle #3 #3

ACUSOL 842 ASAE 50 3.0 Milky Liquid 18

HMAE HMAE HMAE HMAE

HMAE

HMAE

.

Commercially Available Rheology Modifiers 81

2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers Like the products included in the previous section, this group of rheology modifiers is also derived from acrylic acid. But, unlike those polymers, these products are high molecular weight homopolymers of acrylic acid cross-linked with an allyl ether of pentaerythritol, an allyl ether of sucrose or an allyl ether of propylene. Figure 2.1 below schematically depicts these cross-linked acrylic polymers.

Figure 2.1 (Reprinted from B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Technical Bulletin)

In the dry state, these polymers are in a tightly coiled configuration. When dispersed in water, slight uncoiling of the molecule occurs accompanied by minimal thickening of the system. Neutralization of the pendant carboxylic acid groups causes the molecule to uncoil and provide dramatic and instantaneous thickening as well as other desirable rheological effects such as yield stress (yield value). Since a concentration of 0.5% or less is normally used, they can be classified as very high efficiency rheology modifiers.

Rheology Modifier Handbook 82

A. Recommended Application

Areas C. Ionic Charge

1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional

Anionic



1. Water 2. Mixtures of water with water-miscible organic solvents

1. Not recommended for systems containing monomeric, cationic species 2. Products are most effective in the pH range from 5-10 but a few are also useful outside that range 3. Most products are sensitive to the presence of dissolved electrolytes 4. Certain products are suitable for systems containing NaOCL

Nomenclature note: These products are listed under the name “Carbomer” in The United States Pharmacopoeia/National Formulary. Personal care grades have the INCI name Carbomer for CARBOPOL and ACRITAMER products and “Acrylates/C10-30 Alkyl Acrylate Crosspolymer” for the PEMULENproducts. E. Useful References 1. “CARBOPOL The Proven Polymers in Pharmaceuticals”, B.F.

Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Pharmaceutical Bulletins #1 thru #17. 2. “Thickening and Suspending with CARBOPOL Thickeners”, B.F.

Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Bulletin IT.

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers

83

2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers

Table 2.2a B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Cleveland, OH, USA

1. Pharmaceutical Grades

Trade Name1

Viscosity, mPas2

pH, (0.5% Soln.)

Appearance

Moisture, %

Features

Carbopol 910 NF 3,000-7,0003 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Low Viscosity

Carbopol 934 NF 30,500-39,400 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. High Viscosity, Short Flow Carbopol 934P NF 29,400-39,400 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. High Viscosity, Short Flow Carbopol 940 NF 40,000-60,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Very High Viscosity, Very

Short Flow Carbopol 941 NF 4,000-11,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Low Viscosity, Long Flow

Carbopol 971P NF 4,000-11,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Low Viscosity, Long Flow Carbopol 974P NF 29,400-39,400 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. High Viscosity Carbopol 980 NF 40,000-60,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Very High Viscosity, Very

Short Flow Carbopol 981 NF 4,000-10,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Low Viscosity, Long Flow

Carbopol 1342 NF 9,500-26,5003 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Medium Viscosity, Long Flow

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

84

Table 2.2a, continued

B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 1. Pharmaceutical Grades (continued)

Trade Name1 Viscosity, mPas2

pH, (0.5% Soln.)

Appearance Moisture, %

Features

Carbopol 1382 NF 25,000-45,0003 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Medium Viscosity

Pemulen

TR-1 NF Pass6 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. High Viscosity

Pemulen TR-2 NF Pass6 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Low Viscosity

2. Personal Care Grades Carbopol 2984 45,000-80,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. High Viscosity Carbopol 5984 25,000-45,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. High Viscosity

Carbopol ETD 2001

45,000-65,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Easy to Disperse, High Viscosity

Carbopol ETD 2020 32,000-77,0003 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Easy to Disperse, High

Viscosity Carbopol ETD 2050 3,000-15,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Easy to Disperse, Low

Viscosity

Carbopol Ultrez 10 45,000-65,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder 2.0 max. Easy to Disperse, High Viscosity

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers

85


B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 3. Industrial Grades

Trade Name1 Viscosity mPas2

pH, (0.5% Soln.)

Appearance Solids, %

Solvent

Carbopol 643 7,000±2,500 8.0±0.3 Tan, Opaque Dispersion

50 Mineral Spirits


50 Mineral Spirits


50 Mineral Spirits


50 Mineral Spirits


50 Mineral Spirits

Carbopol 681-XI 12,000±2,500 2.0-3.0 White Dispersion 50 Mineral Spirits Trade Name1 Viscosity,

mPas2 pH,

(0.5% Soln.) Appearance Moisture,

% Features

Carbopol 672 25,000-37,500 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 High Viscosity, Short Flow Carbopol 674 5,000-13,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Low Viscosity, Long Flow Carbopol 675 45,000-65,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 High Viscosity, Short Flow Carbopol 676 45,000-80,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Very High Viscosity, Very

Short Flow Carbopol 678 2,000-9,000

3 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Ion Tolerance, Long Flow

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

86




pH (0.5% Soln.)


Features

Carbopol 679 350-25004 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Ion Tolerance, Long Flow

Carbopol 690 45,000-65,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 High Viscosity, Very Short Flow Carbopol 691 2,000-11,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Low Viscosity, Long Flow Carbopol 694 40,000-80,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 High Viscosity, Short Flow Carbopol 1610 8,000-27,000

3 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Medium Viscosity Carbopol 1623 25,000-45,000

3 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 High Viscosity Carbopol ETD

2623 30,000-60,000

3 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 High Viscosity, East to Disperse

Carbopol ETD 2690

45,000-60,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Very High Viscosity, East to Disperse

Carbopol ETD 2691

8,000-17,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder <3.0 Low Viscosity, East to Disperse

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers

87



Trade Name Viscosity mPas2

pH (0.5%)


Features

Carbopol EZ-1 45,000-65,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 High Viscosity, East to Disperse Carbopol EZ-2 50,000-70,000 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Very High Viscosity, East to Disperse Pemulen 1621 2,000-12,000

3 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Low High Viscosity Pemulen 1622 2,000-12,0005 2.7-3.5 White Powder < 3.0 Low High Viscosity

Notes for B.F. Goodrich Cross-linked Acrylic Polymer data: 1 CARBOPOL is listed in The USP/NF as Carbomer. This is also the INCI name. 2 0.5% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm and 250 C with appropriate spindle.

3 1.0% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm with appropriate spindle.

4 4.0% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm with appropriate spindle.

5 0.2% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm with appropriate spindle. 6 B.F. Goodrich Emulsion Test.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

88

2. Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers

Table 2.2b R•I•T•A Corp. Woodstock, IL, USA

Cosmetic and Industrial Grades


pH, (0.5% Soln.)


Features2

ACRITAMER 501E 5,400-11,400 2.7-3.3 White Powder 2.0 max Lower viscosity, for moderately ionic systems

ACRITAMER 504E 26,500-39,500 2.7-3.3 White Powder 2.0 max Intermediate viscosity ACRITAMER 505E 40,000-70,000 2.7-3.3 White Powder 2.0 max Highest viscosity, excellent

clarity ACRITAMER 934 26,000-39,500 2.7-3.3 White Powder 2.0 max. Intermediate viscosity ACRITAMER 940 45,000-70,000 2.7-3.3 White Powder 2.0 max. Highest viscosity, excellent

clarity ACRITAMER 941 5,400-11,400 2.7-3.3 White Powder 2.0 max. Lower viscosity, for moderately

ionic systems Notes for R•I•T•A Cross-linked Acrylic Polymer data: 1 0.5% Solution neutralized. Measured using Brookfield Model RV @ 20 rpm and 25 0 C with appropriate spindle.

2 Residual solvent in ACRITAMER “E” series is aliphatic hydrocarbon, in all others, Benzene. 3ACRITAMER has the INCI name Carbomer


89

3. Alginates

This group of rheology modifiers is truly derived from the sea. Although several chemical treatments are utilized in their manufacture, they can still be classified as natural products. Brown seaweed, Macrocytis pyrifera, is the main source of algin, the raw material for the production of alginates. It is found in kelp beds in the relative calm waters along the coastline of six of the seven continents and Greenland. Macrocystis, a perennial plant, is harvested on a continuing basis. Subsequent processing produces the products, described in this section, which are mainly various salts of alginic acid. Efforts to define the structure of alginic acid and its salts began in 1930 and have continued since. As expected, the structure is complex and varies depending on the species of brown seaweed used in its manufacture and consists primarily of homo- and copolymers of Mannuronic Acid and Glucuronic Acid. A more thorough discussion of the structure can be found in the reference below.


C. Ionic Charge

Food

Anionic



1. Water 2. Mixtures of water and minor amounts of water-miscible organic solvents

1. Not recommended for systems containing monomeric, cationic species 2. Recommended for systems with pH of 4-9 3. Sensitive to dissolved mono- and polyvalent electrolytes

E. Useful Reference Kelco Alginate products for scientific water control, Third Edition, Monsanto-Kelco Technical Bulletin.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

90

3. Alginates

Table 2.3. Monsanto-Kelco Company San Diego, CA, USA

1. Food Grades

Trade Name Viscosity1, mPas pH Appearance Mesh Size

a. Sodium Alginates KELGIN HV/F 800 7 Ivory-Granular 28 KELGIN MV/F 400 7 Ivory-Granular 28 KELGIN F/F 300 7 Ivory-Granular 80 KELGIN LV/F 80 7 Ivory-Granular 42 KELGIN XL/F 30 7 Ivory-Granular 42

KELVIS 760 7 Ivory-Granular 150 KELCOSOL 1300 7 Cream Fibers 80

KELTONE HV 400 7 Cream-Fibrous 80 MANUGEL DMB 300 7 Ivory-Granular 150

MANUGEL DJX 200 n/a 200 MANUGEL GHB 75 7 Ivory-Granular 60

KELTONE LV 50 7 Cream-Fibrous 150 MANUCOL DH 65 7 n/a 60 MANUCOL DM 250 7 Cream-Granular 60

MANUCOL DMF 300 7 Cream-Granular 150

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology Modifiers

91

Table 2.3, continued

Monsanto-Kelco Alginates 1. Food Grades, continued

Trade Name Solution Characteristics

pH Appearance (As Received)

Mesh Size

b. Self-gelling Alginates

KELTOSE Soft Gel @ 2% n/a Ivory Granular 80

KELSET Soft Gel @ 2% n/a Lt. Ivory Fibrous 80

c. Specialty Algin Blends MANUGEL C Gelling Blend n/a Ivory Granular 60

MANUGEL JKB Gelling Blend n/a Ivory Granular 60 MANUGEL L98 Gelling Blend n/a Ivory Granular 150 MANUGEL PTJ Gelling Blend n/a Ivory Granular 150 MANUCOL JKT Gelling Blend n/a Ivory Granular 250

DARILOID Soluble in Milk 10.0 Light Ivory-Granular 42 DARILOID QH Soluble in Milk 10.2 Light Ivory-Granular 100

Conc. DARILOID XL Soluble in Milk 10.0 Light Ivory-Granular 42 MARLOID CMS Soluble in Milk 10.0 Light Ivory-Granular 28 LACTICOL F336 Soluble in Milk 10.0 Light Ivory-Granular 60 LACTICOL F616 Soluble in Milk n/a n/a 42 LACTICOL CFT Soluble in Milk n/a n/a 200

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

92


Monsanto-Kelco Alginates 1. Food Grades, continued


c. Refined Potassium Alginates KELMAR 270 7.0 Cream-Granular 100

Improved KELMAR 400 7.0 Cream-Fibrous 80 d. Propylene Glycol Alginates

KELCOLOID HVF 400 4.0 Cream-Fibrous 80 KELCOLOID LVF 120 4.0 Cream-Fibrous 80 KELCOLOID DH 400 4.0 Cream-Agglomerate 20 KELCOLOID S 20 4.0 Cream-Fibrous 80 KELCOLOID O 25 4.0 Cream-Fibrous 80

MANUCOL ESTER B 20 4.0 Cream-Fibrous 60 MANUCOL ESTER E/RK 125 n/a n/a 60

MANUCOL ESTER M 5002 4.0 Fibrous 40

e. Propylene Glycol Alginate Blends

SHERBELIZER 300 @ 2% 7 Light Ivory-Granular 14

Conc. DARILOID KB Soluble in Milk n/a n/a 29

DRICOID

KB Soluble in Milk 5.4 Light Ivory-Granular 14

KELNOODLIZER

150 n/a n/a 20

Com

mercially A


93


Monsanto-Kelco Alginates 2. Industrial Grades a. Sodium Alginates


MANUTEX RS 300 7 Tan-Granular n/a MANUTEX RS 92 49 7 Tan-Granular n/a MANUTEX RSX 200 7 Tan-Granular n/a

KELTEXTM 800 7 Tan Granular KELTEX S 1300 7 Tan Granular

MANUTEXTM RM 3002 7 Tan Granular

MANUTEX RH 602 7 Tan Granular

MANUTEX RD 92 7 Tan Granular

b. Alginic Acid

KELACIDTM 3 n/a White-Fibrous 80

Notes for Monsanto-Kelco Alginate data: 1 1% Aqueous solution with Brookfield Model LV @ 60rpm 250C with appropriate spindle. 2. 1% Sodium Citrate solution with Brookfield Model RV @ 20rpm and 25

0C with appropriate spindle.

3 1% Aqueous solution sequestered with Calgon, measured with Brookfield Model RV @ 20rpm and 200C with

appropriate spindle.


94

4. Associative Thickeners

The rheology modifiers in this section are grouped together because of their functionality rather than their chemical structure. Although the structure of the products listed in this section vary considerably, all develop their rheological benefits through the process of associative thickening. The various structures of the products described in this section are listed in the following tables. Further details about their structures may be obtained directly from the suppliers. They are water-soluble or water-dispersible polymers that feature both hydrophilic and hydrophobic moieties within the same polymeric molecule. The hydrophobic segments of the molecule are capable of forming intermolecular associations and absorbing on the surface of dispersed particles in the system, hence the name, associative. This mechanism provides thickening and rheology modification much greater than achieved with unmodified polymers of equal molecular weight.


C. Ionic Charge

1. Personal Care 2. Household/Institutional

Nonionic



Water

1. Suitable for systems containing anionic, nonionic and cationic species 2. Some products recommended for systems between pH of 2&10 3. Some products suitable for

systems containing H2O2 or NaOCl


95

E. Useful References 1. Acrysol Thickeners and Rheology Modifiers, Rohm and Haas

Company Bulletin RMT2A. 2. Aculyn46 personal care polymer, Rohm and Haas Company

Bulletin FC-404.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

96


Table 2.4a RHEOX, Inc. Hightstown, NJ, USA

A. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Polymer Type Appearance % Active Solvent(s) RHEOLATE 204 Polyether Urea Polyurethane Powder 100 None RHEOLATE 205 Polyether Urea Polyurethane Powder 100 None RHEOLATE 208 Polyether Urea Polyurethane Powder 100 None RHEOLATE 210 Polyether Urea Polyurethane Liquid (Soln.) 25 Water RHEOLATE 244 Polyether Urea Polyurethane Liquid (Soln.) 25 Water/DGBE1 RHEOLATE 255 Polyether Urea Polyurethane Liquid (Soln.) 25 Water/DGBE RHEOLATE 278 Polyether Urea Polyurethane Liquid (Soln.) 25 Water/DGBE RHEOLATE 300 Polyether Polyol Liquid (Soln.) 32 Water/DGBE RHEOLATE 310 Polyether Polyol Liquid (Soln.) 32 Water RHEOLATE 350 Polyether Polyol Liquid (Soln.) 50 Water

Notes for RHEOX Associative Thickener data: 1 Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether

Com

mercially A


97


Table 2.4b Rohm and Haas Company Philadelphia, PA, USA


Trade Name Polymer Type1 Viscosity, mPas Appearance % Active Solvent2

ACULYN 44 HMNP 11,000 Hazy Liquid 35 Water/PG ACULYN 46 HMNP <3000 Hazy Liquid 14-16 n/a

2. Industrial Grades ACRYSOL RM-8W HMEOUC 3,000-3,500 Hazy Liquid 17.5 Water ACRYSOL RM-825 HMEOUC 1,000-2,500 Hazy Liquid 25 Water/DGBE

ACRYSOL RM-2020 HMEOUC 2,500-3,800 Hazy Liquid 20 Water ACRYSOL SCT-275 HMEOUC 2,000-3,000 Hazy Liquid 17.5 Water/DGBE ACRYSOL TT-678 HMNP 275-375 Hazy Liquid 60 Water/Methanol

ACUSOL 880 HMNP 11,000 Hazy Liquid 35 Water/PG ACUSOL 882 HMNP 2,500 Hazy Liquid 17.5 Water/DGBE

Notes for Rohm and Haas Associative Thickener data: 1 HMNP = Hydrophobically Modified Nonionic Polyol, HMEOUC = Hydrophobically Modified Ethylene Oxide Urethane Block Copolymer. 2 PG = Propylene Glycol, DGBE = Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

98


Table 2.4c Süd-Chemie Rheologicals München, Germany

Industrial Grades

Trade Name Polymer Type1 Viscosity, mPas Appearance % Active Solvent2

OPTIFLO L100 HMNP 2,500-2,000 n/a 20 Water OPTIFLO H400 HMNP 2,500-3,500 n/a 20 Water/DGBE OPTIFLO H500 HMNP 3,500-4,000 n/a 17.5 Water/DGBE

Notes for Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Associative Thickener data: 1 HMNP = Hydrophobically Modified Nonionic Polymer 2 DGBE = Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether.

6. Microcrystalline Cellulose

These rheology modifiers are produced from alpha cellulose. Cellulose fibers consist of amorphous (paracrystalline) regions and crystalline regions. Hydrolysis permits the separation and removal of the amorphous material leaving the crystalline portion for further processing to obtain microcrystalline cellulose that is produced in either powdered or colloidal grades. The powdered grades are pure microcrystalline cellulose while colloidal grades are mixtures of microcrystalline cellulose and a protective colloid, usually Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC) but also Xanthan Gum.

Useful References

1. “Avicel ® Cellulose Gel (Microcrystalline Cellulose) General Technology”, FMC Corp. Technical Bulletin.

2. “Avicel RC-591 Microcrystalline Cellulose and Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium, NF, BP, Pharmaceutical Emulsions and Suspensions”, FMC Corp. Technical Bulletin.

A. Recommended Application C. Ionic Charge Areas

1. Food 1. Powdered grades: nonionic 2. Pharmaceutical 2. Colloidal grades: Anionic

(because of presence of the protective colloid)

B. Recommended Solvent D. Compatibility/Stability Systems Characteristics

1. Water 1. Excellent thermal stability 2. Mixtures of water with water- 2. Readily flocculated by

Note: Microcrystalline is insoluble surfactants in water but can be dispersed in it to achieve rheology modification.

miscible organic solvents electrolytes, cationic polymers and


106

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Com

mercially A


107

Microcrystalline Cellulose

Table 2.6 FMC Corp. Philadelphia, PA, USA

1. Food Grades Trade Name Microcrystalline

Cellulose, % % Colloidal (0.2 micron)

Initial Viscosity, mPas1

Features

Avicel RC-501 91 30 72-168 @ 2.1% Bulk dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC

Avicel RC-581 89 70 72-168 @ 1.2% Bulk dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC

Avicel RC-591F 88 70 39-175 @ 1.2% Spray dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC

Avicel CL-611 85 70 50-151 @ 2.6% Spray dried colloidal grade, co-processed with CMC

Avicel RCN-30 75 40 620 @ 3% Colloidal grade co-processed with Xanthan Gum & Maltodextrin

MicroQuick

WC-595 Stabilizer 22 15 10-100 @ 6% Colloidal grade co-processed with whey

Avicel PH-101 100 0 n/a Spray dried powdered grade Avicel PH-102 100 0 n/a Spray dried powdered grade Avicel PH-105 100 0 n/a Spray dried powdered grade Avicel FD-100 100 0 n/a Spray dried powdered grade

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

108


FMC Microcrystalline Cellulose 1. Food Grades, continued

Trade Name Microcrystalline Cellulose, %

Guar Gum, %

Viscosity @ 4%, mPas1

Features

Novagel RCN-10 90 10 4,000 max. Co-processed MCC and Guar Gum Novagel RCN-15 85 15 4,000 max. Co-processed MCC and Guar Gum 2. Pharmaceutical Grades

Trade Name Microcrystalline Cellulose, %

Sodium CMC, %

Viscosity, mPas1

pH

Loss on Drying, %

Avicel RC-581 80.2-85.7 8.3-13.8 72-168 @ 1.2% 6-8 @ 1.2% 6.0 max. Avicel RC-591F 80.2-85.7 8.3-13.8 39-91 @ 1.2% 6-8 @ 1.2% 6.0 max. Avicel CL-611 75.2-82.7 11.3-18.8 50-118 @ 2.6% 6-8 @ 2.6% 6.0 max. Notes for FMC Microcrystalline Cellulose data: 1 Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm with appropriate spindle, measured at 120 sec.


109

7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium

These rheology modifiers are classified chemically as cellulose ethers and are produced by reacting alkali cellulose with sodium monochloroacetate. Their unit chemical structure, depicted in Figure 2.3 below, is composed of two anhydroglucose units each of which originally contains three hydroxyl. Sodium Carboxymethyl groups are substituted for some of the hydrogens of these hydroxyl groups. The Degree of Substitution (DS) is defined as the average number of substituted with Sodium Carboxymethyl substituted per anhydroglucose unit. Commercial products typically have a DS between about 0.7 and 1.2.

Figure 2.3 (Reprinted from Aqualon Div, Hercules, Inc. Technical Bulletin Ref. 1)


1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care 4. Household/Institutional


1 . Hot or cold water

C. Ionic Charge

Anionic


1. Best stability at pH 7-9 2. Trivalent cations can cause precipitation

.

.

.


110

Useful References

“AQUALON Sodium Carboxymethylcellulose, Physical and Chemical Properties”, Hercules, Inc., Technical Bulletin 250-10F.

Com

mercially A


111

7. Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium

Table 2.7 Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA

1. Food Grades Trade Name Viscosity, mPas

1 DS

3 pH, 2% Soln.


Aqualon CMC 7HF 1,000-3,000 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7H3SF 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7H4F 2,500-6,000 @1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7HOF 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7LF 25-50 @2%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7MF 400-800 @2% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7M2F 100-200 @2%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7M8SF 200-800 @2% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9H4F 2,500-6,000 @1% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9M8F 400-800 @2% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9M31F 1,500-3,100 @2% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

112


Aqualon Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 2. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas1 DS

3 pH, 2% Soln.


Aqualon CMC 7HP 1,000-3,000 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7H3SP 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7H4P 2,500-6,000 @1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7HOP 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7LP 25-50 @2%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7L2P 50-200 @4%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7MP 400-800 @2% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7M2P 100-200 @2%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7M8SP 200-800 @2% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9H4P 2,500-6,000 @1% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9M8F 400-800 @2% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9M31F 1,500-3,100 @2% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 12M8P 800-3,100 @2% 1.15-1.45 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 12M31P 400-800 @2% 1.15-1.45 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max.

Com

mercially A


113


Aqualon Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 3. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas1 DS

3 pH, 2% Soln. Appearance Moisture, %

Aqualon CMC 7H 1,000-3,000 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7H3S 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7H4 2,500-6,000 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7HO 1,000-2,800 @ 1% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7L 25-50 @ 2%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7L2 50-200 @ 4%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7M 400-800 @ 2% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7M2 100-200 @ 2%2 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 7M8S 200-800 @ 2% 0.65-0.90 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9H4 2,500-6,000 @ 1% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9M8 400-800 @ 2% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 9M31 1,500-3,100 @ 2% 0.80-0.95 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 12M8 800-3,100 @ 2% 1.15-1.45 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. Aqualon CMC 12M31 400-800 @ 2% 1.15-1.45 7.5 White Powder 8.0 max. AMBERGUM1221 ≅ 500 @ 12% 1.15-1.45 7.0 White Powder 8.0 max.

Notes for Aqualon Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium data: 1 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0 C and 30 rpm with appropriate spindle. 2 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0 C and 60 rpm with appropriate spindle. 3 Degree of substitution, i.e. the average number of hydroxyl groups substituted per anhydroglucose unit.


114

8. Hydroxyethylcellulose

The reaction of Ethylene Oxide with Cellulose produces this group of rheology modifiers. Hydroxyethyl groups are attached to Cellulose by direct reaction of Ethylene Oxide with one or more of the three Anhydroglucose units of the polymer backbone or by reaction with previously substituted hydroxyl groups to form side chains. The Idealized structure of these cellulosic polymers is depicted in Figure 2.4 below:

Figure 2.4 Structure of Hydroxyethylcellulose

(Reprinted from Union Carbide Corp. Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below)


1. Pharmaceutical 2. Personal Care 3. Household/Institutional

B. Ionic Charge Nonionic

C. Recommended Solvent Systems

Water


1. Compatible with most anionic, nonionic, amphoteric and cationic ingredients

2. Excellent stability in the presence of electrolytes


115

Useful References

1."NATROSOL® Hydroxyethylcellulose ", Aqualon Technical Bulletin 250-1 1E

2. "CELLOSIZE® Hydroxyethylcellulose", Union Carbide Corp. Technical Bulletin P3-5777

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

116


Table 2.8a Aqualon Company Wilmington, DE, USA


Trade Name Viscosity, mPas1 pH, 2% Soln. Appearance Moisture, % NATROSOL250G Pharma 150-400 @2%

2 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max.

NATROSOL 250H NF 1,500-2,500 @1% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250 HX Pharma 1,500-2,500 @1% 7 Fine, White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max.

NATROSOL 250L NF 75-150 @5% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250M Pharma 4,500-6,500 @2%


Com

mercially A


117


Aqualon Hydroxyethylcellulose 2. Personal Care and Industrial Grades

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas1 pH, 2% Soln. Appearance Moisture, % NATROSOL 250ER 25-105 @2% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250GR 150-400 @2%


NATROSOL 250H Pharma 1,500-2,500 @1% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250HR 1,500-2,500 @1% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max.

NATROSOL 250HHR 3,500-5,000 @1% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250H4R 2,600-3,300 @1% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250JR 150-400 @5%


NATROSOL 250KR 1,500-2,500 @2% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250LR 75-150 @5% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL 250MR 4,500-6,500 @2%


NATROSOL 250MHR 800-1,500 @1% 7 White-Lt. Tan Powder 5.0 max. NATROSOL PLUS3 150-750 @ 1% ≈ 7 Off-white Powder 8.0 max.

Notes on Aqualon Hydroxyethylcellulose data: 1 Brookfield Model LV @ 25

0 C and 30rpm with appropriate Spindle.

2 Brookfield Model LV @ 25

0 C and 60rpm with appropriate Spindle

3 Cetyl Hydroxyethylcellulose (INCI Adopted Name)

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

118


Table 2.8b Union Carbide Corporation Danbury, CT, USA

1. Personal Care and Industrial Grades

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas1 pH, 2% Soln. Appearance Volatile, % CELLOSIZE PCG 10 4,400-6,000 @ 1% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE QP 3L

215-282 @ 5%2 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5

CELLOSIZE QP 09L 75-112 @ 5% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE QP 09H 113-150 @ 5% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE QP 40 80-125 @ 2% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE QP 300 300-400 @ 2%

2 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5

CELLOSIZE QP 4400H 4,800-6,000 @ 2%2 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5

CELLOSIZE QP 15000H 1,100-1,500 @1% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE QP 30000H 1,500-1,900 @1% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE QP 52000H 2,400-6,000 @1% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE QP 100MH 4,400-6,000 @1% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5

CELLOSIZE WP 09L 75-112 @5% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5 CELLOSIZE WP 09H 113-150 @5% 6-7 White-Cream Powder 5

Notes on Union Carbide Hydroxyethylcellulose data: 1 Brookfield Model LVF @ 250 C and 30rpm with appropriate Spindle.

2 Brookfield Model LVF @ 250 C and 60rpm with appropriate Spindle.


119

9. Hydroxypropylcellulose

The reaction of Propylene Oxide with Cellulose produces this group of rheology modifiers. Hydroxypropyl groups can attached to cellulose by direct reaction of propylene oxide with one or more of the three hydroxyl groups of the anhydroglucose units that make up the polymer backbone or by reaction with previously substituted hydroxyls to form side chains. One major difference between Hydroxyethylcellulose and Hydroxypropylcellulose is the solubility characteristics, the latter being soluble in water and a number of organic solvents while the former is soluble only in water.




1. Water at room Temp. to 40°C 2. Polar Organic Solvents 3. Certain Chlorinated Hydrocarbons

C. Ionic Charge

Nonionic


1. Compatible with most anionic and nonionic gums and polymers

Useful References

“KLUCEL® Hydroxypropylcellulose, Physical and Chemical Properties”, Aqualon Technical Bulletin 250-2D

.

.

.

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

120

9. Hydroxypropylcellulose

Table 2.9 Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA

1. Food, Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas pH, 2% Soln. Appearance Moisture, % KLUCEl HFF 1,500-3,000 @ 1%1 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL MFF 4,000-6,500 @ 2%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL GFF 150-400 @ 2%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL JFF 150-400 @ 5%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL LFF 75-150 @ 5%1 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL EFF 200-600 @ 10%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max.

2. Industrial Grades KLUCEL H 1,500-3,000 @ 1%1 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL M 4,000-6,500 @ 2%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL G 150-400 @ 2%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL J 150-400 @ 5%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL L 75-150 @ 5%1 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max. KLUCEL E 150-700 @ 10%2 5.0-8.5 White-Off-white Powder 5.0 max.

Notes for Aqualon Hydroxypropylcellulose data: 1 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0C and 30rpm with appropriate spindle. 2 Brookfield Model LV @ 25 0C and 60rpm with appropriate spindle.


10. Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose

As with other cellulose derivatives, the average number of hydroxyl groups of each anhydroglucose unit in the polymer backbone that have been substituted with an organic group is referred to as the Degree of Substitution (DS). For these products, DS is ≈ 1.2-2.0. Another parameter that defines these rheology modifiers is the number of moles of hydroxypropyl per mole of anhydroglucose. This is the Molar Substitution (MS). For these products, its range is ≈ 0.1 0.8.

Reacting both Methyl Chloride and Propylene Oxide with cellulose produces this group of rheology modifiers. The structure of these products is depicted in Figure 2.5 below.

Figure 2.5 Typical Chemical Structure of Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (Reprinted from The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below)




1. Water 2. Mixtures of water and polar organic solvents

C. Ionic Charge

Nonionic

D. Compatibility/Stability

1 . Compatible with most anionic and nonionic gums and polymers 2. Good tolerance for electrolytes

Characteristics

.

.

.

Joe Sulton


122

Useful References

1. “BENECEL® High Purity Methylcellulose, Methylhydroxy- ethylcellulose, Methylhydroxypropylcellulose

2. “METHOCEL® Cellulose Ethers Technical Handbook”, The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin 192-01062-1296XGW.

3. “A Formulators Guide to METHOCEL Cellulose Ethers in Personal Care Products”, The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin 199- 1149-1292AMS.

Com

mercially A


123


Table 2.10a Aqualon, A Division of Hercules, Inc. Wilmington, DE, USA

1. Food, Pharmaceutical & Personal Care Grades

Trade Name

Viscosity,

mPas1

Methoxyl DS2

Hydroxy- Propyl MS 3

pH, 1% Soln.

Appearance

BENECEL MP 824 20,000 19-24 4-12 5.5-8.0 Fine, White-Cream Powder BENECEL MP 843 4,000 19-24 4-12 5.5-8.0 Fine, White-Cream Powder BENECEL MP 874 40,000-60,000 19-24 4-12 5.5-8.0 Fine, White-Cream Powder BENECEL MP 943 3,800-5,700 28-30 7-12 5.5-8.0 Very Fine, White-Cream Powder

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

124


Aqualon Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Viscosity,

mPas1

pH, 1% Soln.

Appearance

CULMINAL MHPC-25 25-35 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Granules CULMINAL MHPC-50 45-55 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Granules CULMINAL MHPC-400 400-500 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Granules CULMINAL MHPC-843 3,800-5,700 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Powder CULMINAL MHPC-1034 25,500-34,500 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Granules CULMINAL MHPC-3000 3,500-4,700 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Granules

CULMINAL MHPC-6000 PF 6,000-8,000 5.5-8.0 Fine, White-Cream Powder CULMINAL MHPC-12000 PFF 12,000-16,000 5.5-8.0 Very Fine, White-Cream Powder

CULMINAL MHPC-20000 P 20,000-27,500 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Powder CULMINAL MHPC-20000 PFR 20,000-27,500 5.5-8.0 Fine, White-Cream Powder

CULMINAL MHPC-20000 S 10,000-20,000 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Granules Notes for Aqualon Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose data: 1 2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 200 C 2 DS = Degree of Substitution, i.e. the average number of substituent groups per anhydroglucose unit. 3 MS = Molar Substitution , i.e. the number of moles of hydroxypropyl groups per mole of anhydroglucose.

Com

mercially A


125


Table 2.10b The Dow Chemical Company Midland, MI, USA

1. Food Grades

Trade Name

Viscosity,

mPas1

Methoxyl DS2


Moisture, %

Appearance

METHOCEL

E15 Food Grade 15 1.9 0.23 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL E50 Food Grade 50 1.9 0.23 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL E4M Food Grade 4,000 1.9 0.23 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL F50 Food Grade 50 1.8 0.13 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL F4M Food Grade 4,000 1.8 0.13 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K100 Food Grade 100 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K4M Food Grade 4,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K15M Food Grade 15,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K100M Food Grade 100,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

126

Table 2.10b, continued

Dow Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 2. Pharmaceutical Grades

Trade Name

Viscosity,

mPas1

Methoxyl DS2


Moisture, %

Appearance

METHOCEL E15LV Premium 2.4-3.6 1.9 0.23 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL E50 Premium 4,000 1.9 0.23 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL E4MPremium 4-6 1.9 0.23 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL F50 Premium 5-7 1.8 0.13 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL F4M Premium 12-18 1.8 0.13 3.0 White/Off-white Powder

METHOCEL K100LV Premium 40-60 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K4M Premium 4,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K15M Premium 15,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K100M Premium 100,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder

Com

mercially A


127


Dow Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 3. Personal Care Grades


mPas1

Methoxyl DS2

Hydroxy- propyl MS 3

Moisture, %

Appearance

METHOCEL 40-100 12,000 1.4 0.85 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL 40-101 75,000 1.4 0.85 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL 40-202 4,000 1.9 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K4MS 4,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder METHOCEL K15MS 15,000 1.4 0.21 3.0 White/Off-white Powder

Notes for Dow Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose data: 1 2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 200 C 2 DS = Degree of Substitution, i.e. the average number of substituent groups per anhydroglucose unit. 3 MS = Molar Substitution , i.e. the number of moles of hydroxypropyl groups per mole of anhydroglucose.


128

11. Methylcellulose

This group of rheology modifiers is produced by reacting Methyl Chloride with Cellulose. The resulting polymers are depicted structurally in Figure 2.6 below:

Figure 2.6 Chemical Structure of Methylcellulose

(Reprinted from The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below) As with other cellulose derivatives, the average number of hydroxyl groups of each anhydroglucose unit in the polymer backbone that have been substituted with an organic group is referred to as the Degree of Substitution (DS). For these products, DS is ≈ 1.61.9.


1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care

C. Ionic Charge

Nonionic


1. Water 2. Mixtures of water with minor

amounts of water-miscible organic solvents


1. Compatible with most anionic, nonionic, amphoteric and cationic ingredients

2. Good tolerance for dissolved electrolytes


129

Useful References

1. “BENECEL® High Purity Methylcellulose, Methylhydroxy-ethylcellulose, Methylhydroxypropylcellulose

2. “METHOCEL® Cellulose Ethers Technical Handbook”, The DowChemical Company Technical Bulletin 192-01062-1296XGW.

3. “A Formulators Guide to METHOCEL Cellulose Ethers in PersonalCare Products”, The Dow Chemical Company Technical Bulletin 199-1149-1292AMS.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

130

11. Methylcellulose


1. Food, Pharmaceutical & Personal Care Grades


mPas1

Methoxyl %

pH, 1% Soln.

Appearance

BENECEL M 042 380-570 27.5-31.5 5.5-8.0 Fine, White-Cream Powder BENECEL M 043 3,800-5,700 27.5-31.5 5.5-8.0 Fine, White-Cream Powder

2. Industrial Grades CULMINAL MC 25S 25-35 27.5-31.5 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Granules CULMINAL MC 3000P 3,400-4,700 27.5-31.5 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Powder

CULMINAL MC 4000PS 4,700-5,700 27.5-31.5 5.5-8.0 White-Cream Powder Notes for Aqualon Methylcellulose data: 1 2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 20

0 C

Com

mercially A


131

11. Methylcellulose

Table 2.11b The Dow Chemical Company Midland, MI, USA


Trade Name

Viscosity, mPas1

Methoxyl, %

pH, 1% Soln.

Appearance

METHOCEL A40M Food Grade 40,000 27.5-31.5 6-8 White-Cream Powder METHOCEL A4C Premium 400 27.5-31.5 6-8 White-Cream Powder METHOCEL A4M Premium 4,000 27.5-31.5 6-8 White-Cream Powder

METHOCEL A15LV Premium 15 27.5-31.5 6-8 White-Cream Powder Notes for Dow Methylcellulose data: 1 2% Aqueous Solution measured with Ubbelhode capillary viscometer @ 20

0 C


132

12. Guar & Guar Derivatives

Guar gum is obtained from the endosperm of two leguminous plants, cyamaposis tetragonalobus and psoraloides. It is composed of galactose and mannose connected through glycosidic linkages. Thus, it is classified chemically as a galactomannan, a hydrophyllic polysacharride. Product variations are achieved by reacting pendant methoxy groups on the guar molecule with various organic species to produce hydroxypropyl and quaternary ammonium guar derivatives. The idealized structure of unmodified guar gum is depicted in Figure 2.7 below.

Figure 2.7 (Reprinted from Hercules, Inc. Technical Bulletin, Ref 1)


C. Ionic Charge

1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical 3. Personal Care

Nonionic or Cationic



Water

Good compatibility with most surfactant systems.


133

Useful References 1. SUPERCOL Guar Gum, Hercules, Inc. Technical Bulletin 250-

21A. 2. JAGUAR C, Rhodia Technical Bulletin RP-JAGC. 3. JAGUAR HP, Rhodia Technical Bulletin RP-JAGHP.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

134



1. Food Grades

Trade Name

Guar Type1

Viscosity, mPas2

Appearance

Moisture, %

% -200 Mesh

Features

SUPERCOL G2-S GG 4,500 Tan Powder 8-12 20 max. Excellent dispersability SUPERCOL G3-S GG 3,800 Tan Powder 8-12 10 max. Slower hydration than G2-S SUPERCOL GF GG 4,500 Tan Powder 8-12 70 max. Fast hydration SUPERCOL K-1 GG 1,000 Tan Powder 8-12 70 max. Retort stability SUPERCOL U GG 5,100 Tan Powder 8-12 80 min. High thickening efficiency

Com

mercially A


135


Aqualon Guar & Guar Derivatives 2a. Personal Care Grades - Hydroxypropyl Guar

Trade Name

Guar Type1

Viscosity, mPas2

Appearance

Moisture, %

-200 Mesh, %

Features

N-Hance HP40 HPG 4,000-5,000 Fine, Off-white Powder n/a 90 Non-buffered polymer N-Hance HP40S HPG 3,800-4,800 Fine, Off-white Powder n/a 90 Self-hydrating grade

2b. Personal Care Grades - Cationic Guar N-Hance 3000 GHPTC 2,500 min.3 Fine, Off-white Powder 10 max. 80 min. Degree of Cationic

Substitution - 0.07 N-Hance 3196 GHPTC 4,000 min. Fine, Off-white Powder 10 max. n/a Degree of Cationic

Substitution - 0.13 N-Hance 3198 GHPTC 3,800-4,800 Fine, Off-white Powder 10 max. n/a Degree of Cationic



Substitution - 0.20 Notes on Aqualon Guar Gum data: 1 INCI names: GG= Guar Gum, HPG = Hydroxypropyl Guar, GHPTC= Guar Hydroxypropyltrimonium Chloride 2 1.0% aqueous solution measured with Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm and 250 C. 3 1.0% aqueous solution measured with Brookfield Model LV at 6 rpm and 250 C.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

136


Table 2.12b Rhodia, Inc. Courbevoie, France, Cranbury, NJ, USA

1. Food & Pharmaceutical Grades

Trade Name

Viscosity, mPas.1

Appearance

Moisture, %

-200 Mesh, %

Features

Jaguar 45DF 4,000 - 5,000 Cream Powder 8-13 Moderate hydration rate, dust free Jaguar 4000FC 3,500-4,500 Cream Powder 8-13 20 max. Moderate hydration rate Jaguar 4500F 4,000-5,000 Cream Powder 8-13 80 min. Fast hydration rate Jaguar 6,000 6,000 Cream Powder 12 max. 90 min. Very fast hydration rate Jaguar EZ 3,500-4,500 Cream Powder 8-13 30 max. Very fast hydration rate, easy to disperse

Jaguar GSA 2,600-3,600 Cream Powder 12 max. 94 max. Moderate hydration rate Jaguar HV 400F 5,000 min. Cream Powder 12 max. 80 min. Fast hydration rate UNIGUAR 20 12,5002 Cream Powder 11 98 min. -40 Very easily dispersible UNIGUAR 150 3,000 Cream Powder 11 65-85 max. Easily dispersible

Com

mercially A


137


Rhodia Guar and Guar Derivatives 2a. Personal Care Grades - Hydroxypropyl Guar

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas.1 pH Appearance Moisture, % Features JAGUAR HP-8 3,600-4,600 8.5-11.0 Powder 6.0-12-0 Highest viscosity grade JAGUAR HP-11 3,100-3,900 6-7.5 Powder 12 High viscosity, medium. HP3

substitution JAGUAR HP-60 2,800-4,000 9.5-10.5 Powder 6.0-13.0 Glycol compatible JAGUAR HP-105 2,500-4,500 9.0-11.0 Powder 3.5-10.0 High clarity, moderate HP3

substitution JAGUAR HP-120 1250 8.5-11.0 Powder 5.0-9.0 Thickens ethanol solutions

2b. Personal Care Grades - Cationic Guar

Trade Name INCI Name3 Viscosity,mPas.1 pH Appearance % Moisture JAGUAR C-13S GHPTC 3,000-4,000 6-7 Powder 6-12 JAGUAR C-14S GHPTC 3,000-4,000 9-11 Powder 6-13 JAGUAR C-17 GHPTC 2,000-4,000 8.5-10.5 Powder 6-12 JAGUAR C-162 HPGHPTC 300-1,000 8.5-10.5 Powder 13 max. HI-CARE 1000 GHPTC 1,200-1,900 8.0-11.0 Powder 13 max

Notes for Rhodia Guar Gum data: 1 1.0% aqueous solution measured using Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm and 250 C. 2 2.0% aqueous solution measured using Brookfield Model RV at 20 rpm and 250 C. 3 HP = Hydroxypropyl, GHPTC = Guar Hydroxypropyl Trimonium Chloride, HPGHPTC = Hydroxypropyl Guar Hydroxypropyl Trimonium Chloride.


138

13. Locust Bean Gum

Another type of rheology modifier obtained from the endosperm of a seed is Locust Bean Gum. In this case, the seeds are from the carob tree, ceratonia siliqua. Thus, the gum is sometimes referred to as carob gum. The structure of Locust Bean Gum is reported to consist of a linear chain of β-D-mannopyranosyl units linked 1,4 with single-membered α-D-galactopyranosyl units occuring as side branches. The galactopyranosyl units are linked 1,6 with the main chain1. It is classified as a high molecular weight, hydrophilic polysaccharide.


C. Ionic Charge

Food

Nonionic



Water

Requires heating to develop rheological properties

Useful Reference Handbook of Water-Soluble Gums and Polymers, Davidson, R.L, Ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, 1980

Com

mercially A


139

13. Locust Bean Gum

Table 2.13a Ashland Chemical Company Fine Ingredients Div. Columbus, OH, USA

Food Grades

Trade Name

Gum Content, %

Viscosity @ 1%, mPas

pH

Moisture, %

Type C233 FCC 73 min. 2,800-3,200 6-7 14 max. Type 28/32 FCC 76 min. 2,800-3,200 5.5-7 14 max.

Type 28/32 FCC, Coarse Mesh 76 min. 2,800-3,200 5.5-6 13 max. Type 20/24 FCC 73 min. 2,000-2,400 6-7 14 max.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

140

13. Locust Bean Gum

Table 2.13b Rhodia, Inc. Courbevoire, France, Cranbury, NJ, USA

Food Grades

Trade Name Viscosity @ 1%, mPas

pH Appearance -200 Mesh, %

Locust Bean Gum 100MST 3,000 min. 3.5-8.0 n/a 10 min. Locust Bean Gum HG-175 3,000 min. 5.4-7.0 Cream Powder 25 max. Locust Bean Gum HG-200 2,800 min. 5.4-7.0 Cream Powder 60 max.

MEYPRODYN 200 2,000 min. 6.0-7.0 Cream Powder 65 max.


141

14. Organoclays

Organoclays, as their name suggests, are mineral-based rheologymodifiers, the first of three such types of additives included in thishandbook (the others being Silica and Water-swellable Clays). They areproduced from clay minerals of the smectite group of clays, principallyhectorite and bentonite. Following mining and grinding of the crude clayore, extensive beneficiation processes are used to remove undesirablecomponents yielding highly-purified smectite clays that are used as thebasis for these products.

At this point in the process, these clays are termed “water-swellable”.They can be readily dispersed (not dissolved) in water where theydevelop a three-dimensional colloidal structure, not unlike a “house-of-cards”. This colloidal structure provides thickening and other desirablerheological effects (see Part 2, Section 19 for further information aboutWater-Swellable Clays).

The purified smectite clays can also be modified with a number ofdifferent long-chain organic compounds. These compounds, usuallycationic in nature, are electrostatically bonded to the surfaces ofindividual clay platelets. This modification process converts the clay to ahydrophobic, solvent-dispersible ingredient that can modify the rheologyof organic solvent-based systems.

They are commercially available as dry, free-flowing powders or“mastergels” where the Organoclay has been predispersed in one or morean organic compounds or silicones.

A. Recommended Application C. Ionic ChargeAreas

1. Personal Care Cationic2. Household/Institutional

B. Recommended Solvent D. Compatibility/StabilitySystems Characteristics

Aliphatic and aromatic Some grades require use of ahydrocarbons chemical (polar) activator

142 Rheology Modifier Handbook

Useful References

1. “Rheology Handbook”, RHEOX, Inc. Technical Bulletin PB 113.

2. “Cosmetics & Rheology”, RHEOX, Inc. Technical BulletinDS1799E.

3 . “Rheological Additives”, Süd Chemie Rheologicals TechnicalBulletin.

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 143

14. Organoclays

Table 2.14a RHEOX, Inc. Hightstown, NJ, USA

1. Personal Care Grades Trade Name INCI Name Appearance Comments

a. Dry Products

BENTONE

27 Stearalkonium Hectorite Powder High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended

BENTONE 34 Quaternium-18 Bentonite Powder High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended

BENTONE 38 Quaternium-18 Hectorite Powder High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended

b. “Mastergels” Trade Name INCI Name Appearance Other Ingredients

BENTONE GEL CAO Castor(Ricinus Communis)Oil(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and) Propylene Carbonate

Gel Castor Oil, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL DOA Dioctyl Adipate(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Dioctyl Adipate, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL EUG Octyldodecanol(and) Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Octyldodecanol, Propylene Carbonate

144 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


RHEOX Organoclays 1b. Personal Care Mastergls, continued

Trade Name INCI Name Appearance Other Ingredients

BENTONE GEL EUG Octyldodecanol(and) Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Octyldodecanol, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL GTCC Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL IPM Isopropyl Myristate(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Isopropyl Myristate, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL IPP Isopropyl Palmitate(and) Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Isopropyl Palmitate, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL ISD Isododecane(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite (and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Isododecane, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL LOI Lanolin Oil(and)Isopropyl Palmitate(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate(and)Propylparaben

Gel Lanolin Oil, Isopropyl Palmitate, Propylene Carbonate

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 145


RHEOX Organoclays 1b. Personal Care Mastergels, continued

Trade Name INCI Name Appearance Other Ingredients

BENTONE GEL MIO Mineral Oil(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite (and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Mineral Oil, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL 10ST Petroleum Distillates(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Petroleum Distillates, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL SIL Cyclomethicone(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Alcohol 40

Gel Cyclomethicone, Alcohol SDA 40

BENTONE GEL TN C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate(and) Stearalkonium Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate, Propylene Carbonate

BENTONE GEL VS-5 Cyclomethicone(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Alcohol 40

Gel Cyclomethicone, Alcohol SDA 40

BENTONE GEL VS-5PC

Cyclomethicone(and)Quaternium-18 Hectorite(and)Propylene Carbonate

Gel Cyclomethicone, Propylene Carbonate

2. Industrial Grades Trade Name Organoclay Type Appearance Comments

BENTONE

27 Stearalkonium Hectorite Powder High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended

BENTONE 34 Quaternium-18 Bentonite Powder High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended BENTONE 38 Quaternium-18 Hectorite Powder High shear dispersion and polar activator recommended

146 Rheology M

odifier Handbook

14. Organoclays

Table 2.14b Southern Clay Products, Inc. Gonzales, TX, USA

1. Personal Care and Industrial Grades

Trade Name

Organoclay

Type1

Appearance

Moisture, %

Comments

Claytone

40 Q-18H Light Cream Powder 2.0 High shear, polar activator recommended

Claytone AF SAB Light Cream Powder 2.0 Easily dispersible, no activator needed Claytone APA SAB Light Cream Powder 2.0 High shear dispersion recommended Claytone HT Q-18/BAB Light Cream Powder 2.0 High shear and a polar activator recommended

Claytone LMW n/a Cream Powder 2.0 High shear dispersion recommended Claytone SO Q-18H Powder 2.0 For Silicone Oil Systems

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 147


Southern Clay Products Organoclays 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name

Organoclay2

Appearance Moisture,

%

Comments Claytone 38H OMH Off-white to Pink Powder 4.0 High shear, polar activator recommended Claytone 2000 OMM Light Cream Powder 2.0 High shear, polar activator recommended

Claytone II OB Off-white Powder n/a Easily dispersible Claytone ED OMM Powder n/a Easily dispersible, for low to medium

polarity systems Claytone EM Powder 1.2 Very rapid dispersing Claytone HY OMM Light Cream Powder 2.0 Self-activating, easily dispersible

Claytone IMG-400 n/a Powder 2.0 Claytone PS-3 n/a Light Cream Powder 2.0 Claytone TG OMM Tan Powder 4.0 High shear and a polar activator

recommended Notes for Southern Clay Products data: 1 INCI Names: Q-18B = Quaternium-18 Bentonite, SAB = Stearalkonium Bentonite,

Q-18/BAB = Quaternium-18/Benzalkonium Bentonite, BAB = Benzalkonium Bentonite 2OMH = Organically Modified Hectorite, OB = Organophilic Bentonite, OMM = Organically Modified Montmorillonite.

148 Rheology M

odifier Handbook

14. Organoclays

Table 2.14c Süd-Chemie Rheologicals München, Germany

1. Personal Care Grades a. Powder Form

Trade Name

Organoclay Type1

Appearance

Particle Size, µm

Moisture, %

TIXOGEL LG SAB Lt. Cream Powder 90% <88 3.0 max. b. “Mastergels”

Trade Name Organoclay Type1

Viscosity, mPas

Appearance Other Ingredients

TIXOGEL FTN SAB 1,500,000 Green Gel C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate, Propylene Carbonate TIXOGEL IDD-1168 Q-18B 2,400,000 Green Gel Isododecane, Propylene Carbonate TIXOGEL IHD-1235 Q-18B 3,500,000 Green Gel Isododecane, Propylene Carbonate

TIXOGEL IPM Q-18B 2,000,000 Buff Gel Cyclomethicone, Propylene Carbonate TIXOGEL LAN Q-18B 2,000,000 Yellow-Green

Gel Lanolin Oil, IPP, Propylene Carbonate

TIXOGEL MIO Q-18B 1,300,000 Green Gel Odorless Mineral Spirits, Propylene Carbonate TIXOGEL OMS Q-18B 1,300,000 Green Gel Odorless Mineral Spirits, Propylene Carbonate

TIXOGEL TIO-1234 Q-18B 2,000,000 White Gel Cyclomethicone, Phenyl Trimethicone, Micronized TiO2, Propylene carbonate

TIXOGEL VSP Q-18B 2,000,000 Buff Gel Cyclomethicone, Propylene Carbonate

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 149

Table 2.14c, continued

Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Organoclays 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Organoclay Type2

Appearance

Moisture, %

Comments

a. Conventional Organoclays TIXOGEL VP QABC Lt. Cream Powder 2.5 max. Requires polar activator plus high shear TIXOGEL TE QAS Lt. Cream Powder 2.5 max. Requires polar activator plus high shear TIXOGEL TP QABC Lt. Cream Powder 1,5 max. Requires polar activator plus high shear TIXOGEL VZ QABC Lt. Cream Powder 3.0 max. Requires polar activator plus high shear

b. Self-Activating Organoclays TIXOGEL EZ 100 QABC Lt. Buff Powder 2.5 max. Easily dispersible for low-medium polarity systems TIXOGEL EZ 200 QABC Lt. Buff Powder 3.0 max. Easily dispersible for medium to high polarity

systems TIXOGEL EPA QABC Lt. Buff Powder 3.0 max. Easily dispersible for low-medium polarity systems

c. Heat-Activated Organoclay ADVITROL 8-10 COOCC Off-white Powder 3.0 max Requires heat activation

150 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Organoclays 2. Industrial Grades d. Maximum Performance Organoclays

Trade Name

Organoclay Type2

Appearance

Moisture, %

Comments

TIXOGEL MP QABC Lt. Cream Powder 2.5 max Requires polar activator + high shear TIXOGEL MP 100 QABC Lt. Buff Powder 2.5 max. Self Activating, easily dispersible TIXOGEL MP 250 QABC Lt. Buff Powder 2.5 max. Self Activating, easily dispersible for medium

to high polarity systems Notes for Süd-Chemie Organoclays: 1 INCI Names; SAB = Stearalkonium Bentonite, Q-18B= Quaternium-18 Bentonite, 2 QAS = Quaternary Ammonium Smectite, QABC = Quaternary Ammonium Bentonite Complex, COOCC = Castor Oil/Organoclay Complex 3 Brookfield Model RV with Helipath Stand and TF Spindle at 2.5 rpm. 4 PC = Propylene Carbonate, IPP = Isopropyl Palmitate


15. Polyethylene

Polyethylene is the most widely used plastic in the world today. Itschemical structure is:

(-CH2 - CH2-)n

High molecular weigh versions of this ubiquitous polymer are verycommonly found in film, extruded and molded products. But lowermolecular weight Polyethylene is also used as a rheology modifier fororganic solvent systems. Available product line variations includeoxidized homopolymers, oxidized high density homopolymers andcopolymers with Vinyl Acetate or Acrylic Acid.

These products are available as powders, granules, prills and grease-likeproducts.

Useful References

“Performance Additives”, AlliedSignal Advanced Materials TechnicalBulletin AS-506-Rl

A. Recommended ApplicationAreas

1. Personal Care2. Household/Institutional

B. Recommended SolventSvstems

1 .Aliphatic and aromatichydrocarbons2. Organic esters3. Oils, silicones

n/a

C. Ionic Charge

D.Compatibility/StabilityCharacteristics

152 Rheology M

odifier Handbook

15. Polyethylene

Table 2.15 AlliedSignal, Inc. Morristown, NJ, USA


Trade Name

Density, g/cc

Appearance

Acid No., mg KOH/g

Mettler Drop Point, 0 C2

Ave. Particle Size, µm

a. Micronized Polyethylene Wax

ACumist B-6 0.96 Micronized Powder nil 126 6

ACumist B-12 0.96 Micronized Powder nil 126 12 ACumist B-18 0.96 Micronized Powder nil 126 18 ACumist C-5 0.95 Micronized Powder nil 121 5 ACumist C-12 0.95 Micronized Powder nil 121 12 ACumist C-18 0.95 Micronized Powder nil 121 18

b. Oxidized Polyethylene ACumist A-12 0.99 Micronized Powder 26-40 137 12 ACumist A-18 0.99 Micronized Powder 26-40 137 18

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 153


AlliedSignal Polyethylene 1. Personal Care Grades, continued

Trade Name

Density, g/cc

Vinyl Acetate, %

Appearance

Viscosity, mPas1

Mettler Drop Point,

0C2

c. Ethylene/Acrylic Acid Copolymers

A-C

400 0.92 13 Prills 595 92

A-C 400A 0.92 13 Powder 595 92 A-C 405(S) 0.92 11 Prills 600 94 A-C 405(M) 0.92 8 Prills 600 100 A-C 405(T) 0.92 6 Prills 600 102

A-C 430 0.93 26 Grease-like 600 75 A-C 540 0.93 40 Prills 575 105

A-C 540A 0.93 40 Powder 575 105 A-C 580 0.94 75 Prills 650 95

154 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


AlliedSignal Polyethylene 2. Industrial Grades a. Ethylene Homopolymers

Trade Name

Density, g/cc

Appearance

Viscosity, mPas1

Acid No., mg KOH/g

Mettler Drop Point,

0 C2

A-C 6 0.92 Prills 375 nil 106 A-C 6A 0.92 Powder 375 nil 106 A-C 7 0.92 Prills 450 nil 109

A-C 7A 0.92 Powder 450 nil 109 A-C 8 0.93 Prills 450 nil 113

A-C 8A 0.93 Powder 450 nil 113 A-C 9 0.93 Prills 450 nil 115

A-C 9A 0.93 Powder 450 nil 115 A-C 9F 0.93 Fine Powder 450 nil 115 A-C 15 0.93 Prills 125 nil 109 A-C 16 0.91 Prills 525 nil 102 A-C 617 0.91 Prills 180 nil 101

A-C 617A 0.91 Powder 180 nil 101 A-C 715 0.92 Diced 4,000 nil 109 A-C 725 0.92 Diced 1,400 nil 110 A-C 735 0.92 Diced 6,000 nil 110 A-C 1702 0.88 Grease-like 30 nil 90

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 155


AlliedSignal Polyethylene 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name

Density, g/cc

Appearance

Viscosity, mPas1

Acid No., mg KOH/g

Mettler Drop

Point, 0 C2

b. Oxidized Homopolymers A-C 629 0.93 Prills 200 15 101

A-C 629A 0.93 Powder 200 15 101 A-C 655 0.93 Prills 210 16 107 A-C 656 0.92 Prills 185 15 98 A-C 680 0.93 Prills 250 16 108 A-C 6702 0.85 Grease-like 35 15 88

c. High Density Oxidized Homopolymers A-C 307 0.98 Granular 85,000

3 5-9 1404

A-C 307A 0.98 Powder 85,0003 5-9 140

4

A-C 316 0.98 Granular 8,5003 16 140

A-C 316A 0.98 Powder 8,5003 16 140

A-C 325 0.99 Granular 4,4003 25 136

A-C 330 0.99 Granular 3,6003 30 137

A-C 392 0.99 Granular 4,5003 30 138

A-C 395 1.00 Granular 2,5003 41 137

A-C 395A 1.00 Powder 2,5003 41 137

156 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


AlliedSignal Polyethylene 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name

Density, g/cc

Appearance

Viscosity, mPas1

Acid No., mg KOH/g Mettler Drop Point,

0 C2

d. Ethylene/Acrylic Acid Copolymers A-C 5120 0.94 Prills 650 120 92 A-C 5180 0.96 Grease-like 650 185 75

e. Micronized Polyethylene Wax ACumist A-6 0.99 Micronized Powder 26-40 137 6 ACumist A-45 0.99 Micronized Powder 26-40 137 45 ACumist B-9 0.96 Micronized Powder nil 126 9 ACumist C-9 0.95 Micronized Powder nil 121 9 ACumist C-30 0.95 Micronized Powder nil 121 30 ACumist D-9 0.95 Micronized Powder nil 118 9

Notes on AlliedSignal Polyethylene data: 1 Brookfield @ 140 0C

2 Per ASTM D-3954 3 Brookfield @ 150 0C

4 Per ASTM D-3104


16. Polyethylene Oxide

Polyethylene Oxide polymers are produced by heterogeneouspolymerization of ethylene oxide using any one of several metalliccatalyst systems’. The chemical structure of these resins is:

The molecular weight of these polymers ranges from about 100,000 toseveral million. Although Polyethylene Oxide has the same chemicalstructure as Polyethylene Glycol, the latter polymers are produced by adifferent process, have molecular weights of 20,000 or less and are notnormally considered to be rheology modifiers.


1. Pharmaceutical Nonionic2. Personal Care3. Household/Institutional

B. Recommended SolventSystems

1. Water2. Chlorinated Hydrocarbons

D. Compatibility/StabilityCharacteristics

1. Very shear sensitive insolution

2. Compatible with anionic,cationic and amphotericspecies

Useful References

1. Braun, D.B. and DeLong, D.J., Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia ofChemical Technology, Third Edition, 18, pp616-632, John Wiley &Sons, Inc., New York, 1982.

2. “RITA PEO”, R·I·T·A Corp. Technical Bulletin

3. “POLYOX® Water-soluble Resins”, Union Carbide TechnicalBulletin P5-2655.

158 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Table 2.16a R•I•T•A. Corp. Woodstock, IL USA


Trade Name Viscosity, mPas1 ≈ Molecular Wt. pH Appearance % Moisture PEO-1 NF 50-200 @ 5% 210,000 6-8 White Powder <1.0

2. Personal Care and Industrial Grades PEO-2 200-2,500 @ 5% 400,000 6-8 White Powder <1.0 PEO-3 2,500-5,500 @ 5% 1,000,000 6-8 White Powder <1.0 PEO-8 20-70 @ 0.5% 1,900,000 6-8 White Powder <1.0 PEO-15 130-250 @ 0.5% 3,600,000 6-8 White Powder <1.0 PEO-18 240-430 @ 0.5% 4,400,000 6-8 White Powder <1.0 PEO-27 600-800 @ 0.5% 7,200,000 6-8 White Powder <1.0

Note for R•I•T•A. Polyethylene Oxide data: 1 At 250 C. (Contact supplier for other measurement parameters)

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 159


Table 2.16b Union Carbide Corp. Danbury, CT USA


Trade Name

Viscosity1, mPas

~ Mol. Wt. pH

Appearance

Moisture, %

SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-10 NF 30-50 @ 5%2 100,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-80L NF 65-90 @ 5%2 200,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-80H NF 90-115 @ 5%2 200,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-750 NF 600-1,200 @ 5%3 300,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0

SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-3000 NF 2,250-4,500 @ 5% 400,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSR-205 NF 4,500-8,800 @ 5% 600,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSR-1105 NF 8,800-17,600 @ 5% 900,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-12K NF 400-800 @ 2%3 1,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSRN-60K NF 2,000-4,000 @ 2%3 2,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSR-301 NF 1,500-4,500 @ 1% 4,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0

SENTRY POLYOX WSR-Coagulant NF 4,500-7,500 @ 1% 5,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 SENTRY POLYOX WSR-303 NF 7,500-10,000 @ 1% 7,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0

160 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Union Carbide Polyethylene Oxide 2. Personal Care and Industrial Grades

Trade Name

Viscosity1, mPas

~ Molecular Wt. pH

Appearance

Moisture, %

POLYOX WSRN-10 10-50 @ 5%2 100,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSRN-80 65-115 @ 5%2 200,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSRN-750 600-1,200 @ 5%3 300,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSRN-3000 2,250-4,500 @ 5% 400,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSRN-3333 2,250-3,350 @ 5% 400,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0

POLYOX WSR-205 4,500-8,800 @ 5% 600,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSR-1105 8,800-17,600 @ 5% 900,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSRN-12K 400-800 @ 2%3 1,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSRN-60K 2,000-4,000 @ 2%3 2,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSR-301 1,650-5,500 @ 1% 4,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0

POLYOX WSR- Coagulant 5,500-7,500 @ 1% 5,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSR-303 7,500-10,000 @ 1% n/a 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0 POLYOX WSR-308 10,000-15,000 @ 1% 7,000,000 8-10 Off-white Powder <1.0

Notes for Union Carbide Polyethylene Oxide data: 1 Brookfield Model RV @ 2rpm and 250C with appropriate spindle 2 Brookfield Model RV @ 50rpm and 250C with appropriate spindle 3 Brookfield Model RV @ 10rpm and 250C with appropriate spindle


17. Polyvinylpyrrolidone

These rheology modifiers are produced by the polymerization of N-vinylpyrrolidone to yield polymers with the chemical structure depictedbelow:

Figure 2.8 Structure of Polyvinylpyrrolidone(Reprinted from ISP Corp. Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2)

Commercial grades of Polyvinylpyrrolidone, a.k.a. PVP, are producedwith average molecular weight ranging from 2,000 to about 3 million.They are supplied as free-flowing white powders or aqueous solutions.


1. Pharmaceutical2. Personal Care3. Household/Institutional


1. Water2. Alcohols3. Glycerin & Glycols4. Chlorinated Hydrocarbons

C. Ionic Charge

when heated.

Nonionic


1. Compatible with most anionic,cationicspecies

and amphoteric

2. Can be cross-linked by strongalkali.

3. Solutions can turn yellow


Useful References:

1. “Soluble Polyvinylpyrrolidone for the Pharmaceutical Industry”.BASF Technical Bulletin ME 270e.

2. “Performance Enhancing Products for Personal Care”, InternationalSpecialty Products Product Bulletin P PC01-1297USA.

3. “Performance-Enhancing Products for Industrial Markets”,International Specialty Products Product Bulletin 2302-300.

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 163


Table 2.17a BASF Aktiengesellschaft Ludwigshafen, Germany, Mount Olive, NJ, USA


Trade Name

K-Value @ 1%, cstk.1

Molecular Weight

Appearance

pH, 5% Soln.

Moisture, %

Kollidon 12PF 10.2-13.82 2,000-3,000 Off-white Powder 3.0-5.0 = 5.0 Kollidon 17PF 15.3-18.02 7,000-11,000 Off-white Powder 3.0-5.0 = 5.0

Kollidon 25 22.5-26.7 28,000-34,000 Off-white Powder 3.0-5.0 = 5.0 Kollidon 30 27.0-32.1 44,000-54,000 Off-white Powder 3.0-5.0 = 5.0

Kollidon 90F 81.0-96.3 1,000,000-1,500,000 Off-white Powder 4.0-7.0 = 5.0

164 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


BASF Polyvinylpyrrolidone 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name

K-Value @ 1%, cstk.1

Solids Content, %

Appearance

pH, 5% Soln.

Luviskol K17 15.0-19.02 95.0-100.0 Off-white Powder 3.0-7.0 Luviskol K30 27.0-33.0 95.0-100.0 Off-white Powder 3.0-7.0 Luviskol K80 74.0-82.0 95.0-100.0 Off-white Powder 5.0-8.0 Luviskol K90 88.0-96.0 95.0-100.0 Off-white Powder 5.0-9.0

Luviskol K30 Solution 27.0-33.0 29.0-31.0 Yellow Solution 7.0-9.0 Luviskol K60 Solution 52.0-62.0 44.0-46.0 Yellow Solution 7.0-9.0 Luviskol K85 Solution 83.0-88.0 19.0-21.0 Yellow Solution 7.0-9.0 Luviskol K90 Solution 90.0-98.0 19.0-21.0 Yellow Solution 7.0-9.0 Luviskol K115 Solution 110.0-130.0 10.5-11.5 Yellow Solution 7.0-9.0

Notes for BASF Polyvinylpyrrolidone data: 1 K-Values are derived from relative viscosity measurements and are calculated according to Fikentscher’s equation. 2 5% aqueous solution.

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 165


Table 2.17b International Specialty Products

Wayne, NJ, USA


Trade Name K-Value @ 1%,

cstk.1 ~Molecular

Weight

Appearance pH,

5% Soln. Moisture,

% PLASDONE C-15 16-182 8,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max. PLASDONE C-30 29-32 58,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max. PLASDONE K-25 24-26 34,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max. PLASDONE K-29 29-32 58,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max. PLASDONE K-32 29-32 58,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max. PLASDONE K-90 85-95 1,300,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max.

PLASDONE K-90D 85-95 1,300,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max. PLASDONE K-90M 85-95 1,300,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max.

2. Personal Care Grades POVIDERM SK3 28-34 n/a White Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max.

PVP K-15 13-192 6,000-15,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max PVP K-30 26-35 40,000-80,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max PVP K-60 50-62 240,000-450,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max PVP K-90 80-100 900,000-1,500,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max PVP K-120 114-130 2,000,000-3,000,000 White - Cream Powder 3.0-7.0 5.0 max

166 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


International Specialty Products Polyvinylpyrrolidone

3. Industrial Grades

Trade Name K-Value @ 1%

cstk.1 Viscosity @ 5%

mPas.3

Appearance pH,

5% Soln.

Actives, % PVP K-15 13-192 n/a Yellow Aqueous Soln. 6-9 28-32 PVP K-15 13-192 1 White - Cream Powder 3-7 95 min. PVP K-30 27-33 n/a Yellow Aqueous Soln. 6-9 29-31 PVP K-30 27-33 3 White - Cream Powder 3-7 95 min. PVP K-60 50-62 10 White - Cream Powder 3-7 95 min. PVP K-90 88-92 n/a Yellow Aqueous Soln. 4-9 20-24 PVP K-90 90-100 150 White - Cream Powder 3-7 95 min. PVP K-120 110-130 n/a Yellow Aqueous Soln. 6-9 11-13 PVP K-120 108-130 350 White - Cream Powder 4-8 95 min.

Notes for International Specialty Products Polyvinylpyrrolidone data: 1 K-Values are derived from relative viscosity measurements and are calculated according to Fikentscher’s equation. 2 5% aqueous solution. 3 Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm and 250 C and appropriate spindle.


18. Silica

Silica, the most abundant mineral on the earth’s surface, occurs in naturein both crystalline form and amorphous form. The most commoncrystalline form of silica is the mineral quartz and diatomaceous earth isan example of the amorphous form of silica. It is more formally knownas silicon dioxide:

SiO2

This section focuses on synthetically produced silicas useful as rheologymodifiers. The first type of synthetic silica is referred to as fumed silica.This is an amorphous form produced by high temperature, vapor phasehydrolysis of silicon tetrachloride in a mixed oxygen/hydrogen flame.The resulting particles of silica are of extremely small size and have verylarge surface area per gram. Because of the particle characteristics andthe ability to form a three-dimensional network in liquid systems, theycan be effectively used to modify the rheology of compositions in whichthey are used. The unique particle characteristics of fumed silica alsoaccounts for the very low bulk density of these products. Some gradesare therefore “densed” or compressed to increase the bulk density tofacilitate packaging, shipping and use in certain applications.

Precipitated silica, a second type of synthetic silica, is also amorphousand of very fine particle size and large surface area. It is produced byreaction of an alkaline silicate, preferably sodium silicate, with a mineralacid, usually sulfuric acid. The silicon dioxide precipitate thus formed isfiltered, dried, milled and classified by particle size. Some grades arealso available in granular form.

Since it is a mineral, silica is insoluble in water and organic solvents. Butthe fine particle size of these grades of silica permits them to bedispersed in these solvents to produce desirable rheological effects.

Although both fumed and precipitated silica are hydrophilic as produced,it is sometimes desirable in certain systems to use a hydrophobic grade ofsynthetic silica. These types of products are produced by reacting thenumerous silanol (SiOH) groups on the surface of the silica particles


with appropriate organic hydrophobes. Chlorosilanes are a commonchoice although there are a myriad of other possibilities.

Although silica is approved as a direct food additive for humanconsumption, its primary function in those applications is to improve theflow and anti-caking characteristics of powdered food products.




1. Water2. Most Organic Liquids3. Silicones

C. Ionic Charge

n/a


1. Effectiveness increases withdegree of dispersion2. Excellent viscosity/temperaturestability

Useful References:

1 . “Cab-0-Sil® Untreated Fumed Silica Properties and Functions”,Cabot Corp. Technical Bulletin CGEN-8A.

2 . “Basic Characteristics of AEROSIL®, Number ll”, Degussa AGTechnical Bulletin 11-10-l-596DD.

3 . “Fumed Silica”, Degussa AC Technical Bulletin 6-50-1-694H.

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 169

18. Silica

A. Fumed Silica

Table 2.18a Cabot Corp. Tuscola, IL, USA

1. Pharmaceutical Grades (Untreated)

Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4% Moisture, % CAB-O-SIL M-5 200 ± 25 14 3.7-4.3 <1.5 CAB-O-SIL M-5P 200 ± 15 14 3.8-4.2 <1.0 CAB-O-SIL PTG 200 ± 25 14 3.7-4.3 <1.5 CAB-O-SIL HS-5 325 ± 25 7 3.7-4.3 <1.5

2a. Personal Care Grades (Untreated) CAB-O-SIL M-5 200 ± 25 14 3.7-4.3 <1.5 CAB-O-SIL H-5 300 ± 25 7 3.7-4.3 <1.5

CAB-O-SIL HS-5 325 ± 25 7 3.7-4.3 <1.5 CAB-O-SIL EH-5 380 ± 30 7 3.7-4.3 <1.5

2b. Personal Care Grades (Surface-Treated) Trade Name Surface Treatment Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4%

CAB-O-SIL TS-720 Dimethylsiloxane 100 ± 20 n/a n/a CAB-O-SIL TS-610 Dimethydichlorosilane 120 ± 20 n/a n/a CAB-O-SIL TS-530 Hexamethyldisilazane 212 ± 28 n/a n/a

170 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Cabot Fumed Silica 3a. Industrial Grades (Untreated)

Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4% Moisture, % CAB-O-SIL L-90 90 ± 10 20 3.7-4.3 <0.5

CAB-O-SIL LM-130 130 ± 15 16 3.7-4.3 <1.0 CAB-O-SIL LM-150 160 ± 15 n/a 3.7-4.3 <1.0

CAB-O-SIL LM-150D2 160 ± 15 n/a 3.7-4.3 <1.0 CAB-O-SIL M-5 200 ± 25 14 3.7-4.3 <1.5

CAB-O-SIL M-7D2 200 ± 25 14 3.7-4.3 <1.5 CAB-O-SIL MS-55 255 ± 25 n/a 3.7-4.3 <1.5

CAB-O-SIL MS-75D2 255 ± 25 n/a 3.7-4.3 <1.5 CAB-O-SIL H-5 300 ± 25 7 3.7-4.3 <1.5

CAB-O-SIL HS-5 325 ± 25 7 3.7-4.3 <1.5 CAB-O-SIL EH-5 380 ± 30 7 3.7-4.3 <1.5

3b. Industrial Grades (Surface-Treated) Trade Name Surface Treatment Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4%

CAB-O-SIL TS-720 Dimethylsiloxane 100 ± 20 n/a <0.6 CAB-O-SIL TS-610 Dimethydichlorosilane 120 ± 20 4.0-5.0 <0.5 CAB-O-SIL TS-530 Hexamethyldisilazane 212 ± 28 4.5-6.5 n/a CAB-O-SIL TS-500 n/a 212 ± 28 9.50-11 n/a

Notes for Cabot Fumed Silica: 1 BET method , 2 “Densed” (compressed) Grade

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 171

18. Silica

A. Fumed Silica

Table 2.18b Degussa AG Frankfurt am Main, Germany

1. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades (Untreated)

Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4% Moisture, % AEROSIL 200 200 ± 25 12 3.6-4.3 <1.5 AEROSIL 380 380 ± 30 7 3.6-4.3 <1.5

2. Personal Care Grades ( Surface Treated) Trade Name Surface Treatment Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4%

AEROSIL R812 Trimethylsilyl 260 ± 30 7 5.5-8.52 AEROSIL R972 Dimethylsilyl 110 ± 20 16 3..6-5.02

3. Industrial Grades a. Standard Hydrophilic (Untreated) Grades

Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4% Moisture, % AEROSIL 90 90 ± 15 20 3.6-4.3 <1 AEROSIL 130 130 ± 25 16 3.6-4.3 <1.5 AEROSIL 150 150 ± 15 14 3.6-4.3 <0.5 AEROSIL 200 200 ± 25 12 3.6-4.3 <1.5 AEROSIL 300 300 ± 30 7 3.6-4.3 <1.5 AEROSIL 380 380 ± 30 7 3.6-4.3 <1.5

172 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Degussa Fumed Silica 3. Industrial Grades b. Special Hydrophilic (Untreated) Grades

Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, nm pH @ 4% Moisture, % AEROSIL OX50 50 ± 15 40 3.8-4.5 <1.5 AEROSIL TT600 200 ± 50 40 3.6-4.5 <2.5

AEROSIL MOX803 80 ± 20 30 3.6-4.5 <1.5 AEROSIL MOX1703 170 ± 30 15 3.6-4.5 <1.5 AEROSIL COK844 170 ± 30 n/a 3.6-4.3 <1.5

c. Hydrophobic (Surface Treated) Grades Trade Name Surface Treatment Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size,

nm pH @ 4%

AEROSIL R202 Dimethylsiloxane 90 ± 20 14 4-62 AEROSIL R805 Octyl 150 ± 25 12 3.5-5.52 AEROSIL R812 Trimethylsilyl 260 ± 30 7 5.5-8.52 AEROSIL R972 Dimethylsilyl 110 ± 20 16 3.6-5.02 AEROSIL R974 Dimethylsilyl 170 ± 20 12 3.4-5.02

Notes for Degussa Fumed Silica: 1 BET method. 2 Measured in 50:50,Water:Methanol. 3 “Co-fumed” Silicon Dioxide with a minor amount ot Aluminum Oxide. 4 A 5:1 Mixture of Fumed Silica and Fumed Aluminum Oxide

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 173

18. Silica

B. Precipitated Silica

Table 2.18c Degussa AG Frankfurt am Main, Germany

Pharmaceutical & Personal Care Grade (Untreated)

Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, µm pH @ 5% Moisture, % SIDENT 22S 190 <10 5.5-7.5 <=7

Industrial Grades (Untreated) SIPERNAT 22S 190 5 6.2 5.5 SIPERNAT 22LS 190 3 6.2 5.5

FK 500 LS 475 4 6.7 2.5 Industrial Grade (Surface-Treated)

Trade Name Surface Area, m2/gm1 Ave. Particle Size, µm pH @ 5% Moisture, % SIPERNAT D11 90 3 10.0 3.0

Notes for Degussa Precipitated Silica: 1 BET method


19. Water-swellable Clay

These rheology modifiers, as their name suggests, are mineral-based, thethird of three such types of additives included in this handbook (theothers being Silica and Organoclays). Most are produced from clayminerals of the smectite group of clays, principally hectorite andbentonite. Following mining and grinding of the crude clay ore,extensive beneficiation processes are used to remove undesirablecomponents yielding high purity smectite clay.

But also included in this section are unique water-swellable clays calledSodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate. These are synthetic hectoriteminerals that closely resemble natural hectorite in both structure andcomposition. They are layered hydrous magnesium silicates that are freeof natural clay impurities and are synthesized under controlledconditions2. They produce clear, thickened fluids and gels, unlike thenatural water-swellable clays which produce opaque aqueousdispersions.

When dispersed in water (not dissolved, for they are not soluble inwater), the clay particles do swell (hence the name) and, if exposed tosufficient shear forces during mixing, separate into individual clayplatelets. Because these platelets have negatively-charged faces andedges with a small positive charge, the edges of one platelet are attractedto the faces of another platelet and they develop a three-dimensional,“house-of-cards” colloidal structure. This colloidal structure providesthickening and other desirable rheological effects.





1. Water2. Mixtures of water and minor

amounts of water-miscibleorganic solvents

Anionic


1. Effectiveness increases withamount of shear applied duringdispersion2. Excellent viscosity/temperaturestability3. Most grades sensitive todissolved electrolytes4. Not recommended for systemscontaining cationic species

Useful References

1 .

2 .

3 .

4 .

“Rheological Additives for Waterborne Systems”, RHEOX, Inc.Technical Bulletin PB 192.

“LAPONITE® Properties and Applications”, Southern ClayProducts/Laporte Absorbents Technical Bulletin TB-3.

“Rheological Additives Handbook”, Süd-Chemie RheologicalsTechnical Bulletin.

“VEEGUM®/VAN GEL® From the Earth... A Natural Ingredient forCosmetics, Pharmaceuticals and Household Products”, R.T.Vanderbilt Company, Inc. Technical Bulletin VAS 1462.

176 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Table 2.19a Laporte Absorbents Cheshire, UK

1. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades

Trade Name

Mineral Type

Appearance

pH @ 2%

Moisture, %

Features

LAPONITE D Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate

White Powder n/a n/a Dentifrice grade

LAPONITE DF Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate

White Powder n/a n/a Dentifrice grade, stabilized against fluoride absorption

LAPONITE XLG Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate

White Powder n/a n/a High clarity

LAPONITE XLS Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate

White Powder n/a n/a Sol grade of XLG, improved electrolyte tolerance

LAPONITE RD Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate

White Powder 9.8 10 Standard grade

LAPONITE RDS Sodium Lithium Magnesium Silicate

White Powder 9.7 10 Sol grade of RD, improved electrolyte tolerance

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 177


Table 2.19b RHEOX, Inc. Hightstown, NJ, USA


Trade Name INCI Name Viscosity, mPas Appearance BENTONE EW Hectorite n/a Powder BENTONE LT1 Hectorite(and)Hydroxyethylcellulose n/a Powder BENTONE MA Hectorite n/a Powder

2. Industrial Grades Trade Name Mineral Type Viscosity, mPas Appearance

BENTONE AD Hectorite n/a Powder BENTONE CT Hectorite n/a Powder BENTONE EW Hectorite n/a Powder BENTONE HC Hectorite n/a Powder BENTONE LT1 Hectorite n/a Powder BENTONE MA Hectorite n/a Powder

Note for RHEOX Water-swellable Clay: 1. Blend of Hectorite Clay and Hydroxyethylcellulose

178 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Table 2.19c Southern Clay Products, Inc. Gonzales, TX, USA


Trade Name

Mineral Type

Viscosity mPas2

Appearance

pH Moisture, %

Features

Bentolite NF Bentonite n/a Fine Powder n/a 5-8 Meets NF requirements

Gelwhite H NF Montmorillonite 1,950 @ 5% Fine Powder 9.5 8 Meets NF requirements

2. Personal Care Grades Gelwhite GP Montmorillonite 2,500 @ 5% Fine Powder 10.0 8 General purpose grade Gelwhite L Montmorillonite 525 @ 10% Fine Powder 9.0 10 Lower viscosity grade

Gelwhite MAS-L Magnesium Aluminum Silicate

275 @ 10%2 Fine Powder n/a n/a Low viscosity grade

Gelwhite MAS-H Magnesium Aluminum Silicate

700 @ 5%2 Fine Powder n/a n/a High viscosity grade

3. Industrial Grades Bentolite D Bentonite 1900 @ 5% Off-white

Powder 10.5 6 For paints and

coatings Bentolite H Bentonite n/a Fine Powder 9.5 10 max. Bentolite L Bentonite n/a Fine Powder 7.5 10 max. Neutral pH

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 179


Southern Clay Products Water-swellable Clay 3. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Mineral Type

Viscosity mPas1

Appearance pH Moisture, %

Comments

Bentolite L-3 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate

n/a Off-white powder

7.5 10 For refractory mixes

Bentolite L-10 Bentonite n/a Off-white powder

7.5 8 Low viscosity for coating applications

Bentolite WH Bentonite n/a Fine Powder n/a n/a Mineral Colloid BP Montmorillonite 750 @ 5%3 Off-white

Powder 9.0 10 Low viscosity grade

Mineral Colloid MO

Montmorillonite 2,000 @ 3%3 Off-white Powder

9.0 10 High viscosity grade

Notes for Southern Clay Products Water-swellable Clay data: 1 Brookfield Model RV at 20rpm with appropriate spindle 2 Brookfield Model LV at 60rpm with appropriate spindle 3 Brookfield Model RV at 50rpm with appropriate spindle

180 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Table 2.19d Süd-Chemie Rheologicals München, Germany,

1. Pharmaceutical and Personal Care Grades

Trade Name

Mineral Type

Viscosity, mPas2

pH

Appearance

Moisture,%

Features

OPTIGEL CF Activated Smectite

n/a 9-11 Pink Powder 9 max. Stable against electrolytes

OPTIGEL CG Activated Smectite

n/a 9-11 Green Powder

10 Most effective in neutral - alkaline systems

OPTIGEL CK Activated Smectite

3,100 @ 4% Off-white Powder

10 High brightness, easy to disperse

OPTIGEL CL Activated Smectite

9-11 White Powder

9 max. Excellent brightness

OPTIGEL SH SMS1 10,000 @ 2% n/a White Powder

12 Synthetic Hectorite, Produces Clear Gels

2.Personal Care Grade “Mastergel” OPTIGEL GWX-

1285B Bentonite 50, 000 as

received3 n/a Light Gray

Gel n/a Also contains water, Xanthan

Gum and preservatives

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 181


Süd-Chemie Rheologicals Water-swellable Clay 3. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Mineral Type1

Viscosity, mPas2

pH Appearance Moisture,%

Comments

OPTIGEL WA OAMB 8,200 @ 2% 7 White Powder 10 General Purpose Industrial Grade OPTIGEL WM OMAB n/a Light Cream

Powder 9 For Systems with little or no

binder OPTIGEL WX OMAB 2,900 @ 2% n/a n/a 10 Stable against electrolytes

OPTIFLO L100 2,500-2,800 n/a n/a n/a OPTIFLO H400 n/a 2,500-3,500 n/a n/a n/a OPTIFLO H500 n/a 3,500-4,500 n/a n/a n/a

Note for Süd-Chemie Water-swellable Clay data: 1 OMAB = Organically Modified Activated Bentonite, SMS = Synthetic Magnesium Silicate, 2 Brookfield Model RV with Helipath stand, TF spindle at 2 rpm.

182 Rheology M

odifier Handbook


Table 2.19e R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. Norwalk, CT, USA


Trade Name

Mineral Type

Viscosity, mPas1

Al/Mg Ratio

pH @ 5%

Features

VEEGUM MAS2 Type IA 225-600 @ 5% 0.5-1.2 9.0-10-0 General purpose pharmaceutical grade

VEEGUM F MAS2 Type IB 150-450 @ 5% 0.5-1.2 9.0-10.0 Fine ground grade of VEEGUM VEEGUM HS Purified

Bentonite 40-200 @ 5% 3.5-5.5 9.0-10.0 Greater stability in presence of

electrolytes VEEGUM HV MAS2 Type IC 800-2200 @ 5% 0.5-1.2 9.0-10.0 High viscosity grade VEEGUM K MAS2 Type IIA 100-300 @ 5% 1.4-2.8 9.0-10.0 For acidic systems


Trade Name

INCI Name3 Viscosity,

mPas1

Appearance pH

@ 5%

Features VEEGUM D MAS 100-300 @ 5% Off-white Flakes 9.0 For dentifrice applications

VEEGUM PLUS4 MAS 350-750 @ 3% White Powder 9.0-10.0 High viscosity grade VEEGUM PRO TMAS 300-500 @ 1.5% Tan Flakes 8.0-9.0 Highest viscosity cosmetic

grade VEEGUM Ultra MAS 225-450 @ 5% White Powder 3.7-4.7 Easily dispersible, bright white

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 183

Table 2.19e, continued

R.T. Vanderbilt Water-swellable Clay 3. Industrial Grades

Trade Name

Mineral Type

Viscosity, mPas 1

Appearance

pH

Features

VAN GEL B MAS3 600±300 @ 4% Off-white Flakes 8.5-9.5 @ 4% General purpose industrial grade

VAN GEL C MAS3 150-350 @ 6% Off-white Flakes 9.0 For very high pH systems VAN GEL ES Purified

Bentonite 40-200 @ 5% Off-white Flakes 8.5-9.5 @ 5% Greater stability in presence of

electrolytes VAN GEL O MAS 200-450 @ 8% Off-white Flakes 9.0 For systems containing

oxidizing agents VEEGUM CER5 Hectorite 75-175 @ 1% Tan Powder 9.5-10.5 For ceramic applications

VEEGUM T Hectorite 220-800 @ 4% Tan Flakes 9.0-10.0 General purpose industrial grade

Notes for R.T. Vanderbilt Water-Swellable Clay data: 1 Measured on an aqueous dispersion at the solids content indicated using a Brookfield Model LV at 60rpm and 250 C with appropriate spindle 6 minute reading. 2 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate conforming to USP/ National Formulary monograph requirements. 3 MAS = Magnesium Aluminum Silicate, TMAS = Tromethamine Magnesium Aluminum Silicate. 4 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate/Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium blend. 5 Hectorite/Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium blend.


20. Xanthan Gum

Xanthan gum is described chemically as an exocellularheteropolysaccharide. The chemical structure of Xanthan gum isdepicted in the figure below:

M+=Na, KorCa

Figure 2.9 Structure of Xanthan Gum(Reprinted from Monsanto-Kelco Company Technical Bulletin. Ref. 2)

The molecular weight of the gum is reported to be approximately 2x106

and the molecular conformation is described as helical with thetrisaccharide side chains aligned with the backbone.

An aerobic fermentation process using the bacterium XanthomonousCampestris produces the gum The production process involves a multi-step inoculation preparation followed by fermentation, pasteurization,precipitation by an alcohol, drying, milling and packaging.



1. Food Anionic2. Pharmaceutical3. Personal Care4. Household/Institutional


Water


1. Excellent viscosity/temperaturestability2. Susceptible to gelation bypolyvalent cations3. Not recommended for systemscontaining cationic species

Useful References:

1. “Jungbunzlauer Xanthan”, Jungbunzlauer AG Technical Bulletin.

2. “Xanthan Gum Natural Biogum for Scientific Water Control”, FifthEdition, Monsanto-Kelco Co. Technical Bulletin.

3. “Guide to Hydrocolloid Products”, Rhodia, Inc. Technical Bulletin.

186 Rheology M

odifier Handbook

20. Xanthan Gum

Table 2.20a Jungbunzlauer, Inc. Vienna, Austria


Trade Name Viscosity, mPas.1 Mesh Size % Moisture Features J.X.G. FNA 1,550-1,700 80 <13 High viscosity standard grade J.X.G. FFA 1,550-1,700 200 <13 High viscosity standard grade J.X.G. FGA 1,550-1,700 45 <13 High viscosity standard grade J.X.G. FNB 1,400-1,550 80 <13 Low viscosity standard grade J.X.G. FFB 1,400-1,550 200 <13 Low viscosity standard grade

J.X.G. FNAC 1,550-1,700 80 <13 Better stability at low pH and with salts J.X.G. FGAC 1,550-1,700 45 <13 Better stability at low pH and with salts J.X.G. FNS >1900 80 <13 For low salt systems

J.X.G. FNAS 1,700-1,850 80 <13 50:50 blend of XNA & XNS J.X.G. FFST 1,400-1,550 200 <13 Salt tolerant grade J.X.G. FNP 1,200-1,600 80 <13 Smooth flow characteristics J.X.G. FED 1,200-1,600 n/a <13 Agglomerated grade

J.X.G. FNFD 1,200-1,600 80 <13 “Dust free”, treated with 1% edible oil J.X.G. FDF 1,200-1,600 200 <13 “Dust free”, treated with 1% edible oil J.X.G. FCS 1,300-1,700 200 <13 Forms clear solutions

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 187


Jungbunzlauer Xanthan Gum 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas.1 Mesh Size % Moisture Features J.X.G. TNAC 1,550-1,700 80 <13 Better stability at low pH and with salts J.X.G.TGAC 1,550-1,700 45 <13 Better stability at low pH and with salts J.X.G. TNS >1900 80 <13 For low salt systems J.X.G. TGE 1,200-1,600 45 <13 Easily dispersible J.X.G. TGD n/a 45 <13 Easily dispersible (not sold in USA)

Note for Jungbunzlauer Xanthan Gum data: 1 1% in 1% KCl Solution, Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm. and 250 C with appropriate spindle.

188 Rheology M

odifier Handbook

20. Xanthan Gum

Table 2.20b Monsanto-Kelco Co. San Diego, CA, USA


Trade Name Viscosity, mPas.1 pH2 Mesh Size % Moisture Features KELTROL 1,400 7.0 80 12 Standard grade KELTROL F 1,400 7.0 200 12 Fine powder KELTROL T 1,400 7.0 80 12 Produces clear solutions KELTROL TF 1,400 7.0 200 12 Fine powder, produces clear solutions KELTROL BT 1,400 7.0 80 12 Brine tolerant KELTROL GM 1,400 7.0 42 12 Agglomerated grade KELTROL SF 1,050 7.0 80 12 Smooth flow characteristics KELTROL RD 1,400 7.0 14 12 Easily Dispersible

KELTROL RHD 1,400 7.0 28 12 Easily Dispersible KELTROL HP 1,500 7.0 80 12

a. Xanthan Gum Blends GFS Gel @ 1% n/a 60 n/a

KELGUM Gel @ 1% n/a 60 n/a DRICOID 200 600 n/a 14 n/a DRICOID 280 400 n/a 14 n/a

KOB87 2700 n/a 100 n/a

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 189


Monsanto-Kelco Xanthan Gum 2. Industrial Grades

Trade Name Viscosity, mPas.1 pH2 Mesh Size % Moisture Features KELZAN 1,400 7.0 40 12 Standard Grade

KELZAN AR n/a 7.0 n/a 12 Altered rheology & alkali stability KELZAN D n/a 7.0 n/a 12 Cellulase enzyme free KELZAN S 1,400 7.0 40 12 Easily dispersible KELZAN T 1,400 7.0 40 12 Produces clear solutions KELFLO n/a 7.0 n/a 12 For liquid animal feed supplements

Notes for Monsanto-Kelco Xanthan Gum data: 1 1% in 1% KCl Solution, Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm and 250 C with appropriate spindle 2 1.0% Solution in distilled water.

190 Rheology M

odifier Handbook

20. Xanthan Gum

Table 2.20c Rhodia, Inc. Courbevoie, France, Cranbury, NJ USA

1. Food & Pharmaceutical Grades

Trade Name

Viscosity, mPas.1

pH3

Mesh Size

Moisture, %

Features

RHODIGEL 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 95% min. -80 6-12 Standard Grade RHODIGEL 200 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 92% min. -200 6-12 Fine powder

RHODIGEL Clear 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 92% min. -200 6-12 Produces clear solutions RHODIGEL EZ 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 90% min. -30 6-12 Easily dispersible

RHODIGEL Supra 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 95% min. -14 6-12 Very coarse grade RHODIGEL Ultra 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 95% min. -80 6-12 Unusual viscosity characteristics

RHODIGUM WV-H 14,000 5.5-7.0 85% min. -200 14 max. Xanthan/Guar Blend RHODIGUM WV-M 7,500 5.5-7.0 85% min. -200 14 max. Xanthan/Guar Blend RHODIGUM OE-H 3,000 5.5-7.0 45% min. -200 14 max. Xanthan/Guar Blend RHODIGUM OE-M 3,900 5.5-7.0 55% min. -200 14 max. Xanthan/Guar Blend RHODIGUM WG-H 145-1702 5.5-7.0 30% max.. -200 14 max. Xanthan/Locust Bean Blend RHODIGUM WG-M 100-1252 5.5-7.0 25% max. -200 14 max. Xanthan/Locust Bean Blend RHODIGUM WG-L 35-552 5.5-7.0 20% max.. -200 14 max. Xanthan/Locust Bean Blend

Com

mercially A

vailable Rheology M

odifiers 191


Rhodia Xanthan Gum

2. Personal Care Grades Trade Name Viscosity,

mPas.1 pH3 Mesh Size Moisture,

% Features

RHODICARE H 1,200-1,800 6.0-8.0 200 13 max. Fast hydration grade RHODICARE S 1,200-1,800 6.0-8.0 80 13 max. Standard cosmetic grade RHODICARE T 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 95% min. -80 6-14 Produces clear solutions

RHODICARE XC 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 95% min. -80 6-12 Lower microbial content

3. Industrial Grades RHODOPOL 23 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 98% min. -50 12 max. Standard Grade

RHODOPOL 50MC 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 98% min. -50 12 max. Cationic tolerant RHODOPOL 50MD 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 98% min. -50 12 max. Easily dispersible

RHODOPOL G 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 98% min. -50 12 max. Fast hydration RHODOPOL T 1,200-1,600 6.0-8.0 98% min. -50 12 max. Produces clear solutions

Notes for Rhodia Xanthan Gum data: 1 1.0% in 1% KCl Solution, Brookfield Model LV at 60 rpm. and 250 C with appropriate spindle 2 Gel strength in grams using Texture Technologies TA-XT2 3 1.0% Solution in distilled water,

Joe Sulton

Selecting the Best Candidates 193

Part 3

Selecting the Best Candidates for the Application

Introduction

Rheology Modifiers forFood Applications

Rheology Modifiers forPharmaceutical Applications

Rheology Modifiers forPersonal Care Applications

Rheology Modifiers forHousehold/Institutional Applications

Page

194

199

213

222

242


Introduction

Part 2 of this handbook lists about 750 commercially available rheologymodifiers. With so many choices, the task of selecting the bestcandidates for the intended application might seem formidable. But themanufacturers of these products have greatly simplified the task byproviding considerable guidance in the selection process. Their technicalliterature usually contains recommendations for the appropriateapplication of their products. References to this technical literature arecontained in the introduction to each section of Part 2.

Tables in this Part summarize these supplier’s recommendations andwere developed, in most cases, with the assistance of supplier’s technicalpersonnel. The tables are arranged by industry, i.e. Food,Pharmaceutical, Personal Care or Household/Institutional. The termHousehold/Institutional encompasses such products as dish and fabricdetergents, hand soaps, hard-surface cleaners, auto and furniturepolishes, etc.

Each table consists of two columns. The left column lists specificconsumer product types within the given industry category. The rightcolumn is headed by the name of a specific chemical type of rheologymodifier. Below this, are listed the supplier’s product recommendations.These are the specific grades of their rheology modifiers theyrecommend for use in the indicated type of consumer product. Note thatall tables do not have the same types of products listed because onlythose for which there is a recommended rheology modifier are includedin any given table.

Having identified the trade name rheology modifier(s) recommended forthe intended application, more information about them can be found inthe pertinent section of Part 2. A cross-reference to the appropriate tablein Part 2 is included in the heading of the right column. There may alsobe a supplier-developed starting formulation(s) in Part 4, although it wasnot possible to include starting formulations for every type of consumerproduct containing every rheology modifier recommended.


At this point, direct contact with the supplier(s) of the rheologymodifier(s) candidates is strongly recommended. Appendix C providescontact information. Such contact can provide additional importantinformation such as the availability and selling price of the product,information on new and improved products that might be even moresuitable for the application and supplier-developed starting formulationsfor the desired product.

Another approach to selecting the best candidates, particularly in caseswhere the intended application is not included in the Part 3 tables, is toconsider the following important parameters when attempting to selectthe best rheology modifier candidates for the application:

1. Type of ApplicationIn many countries, the federal government regulates the ingredients usedin food and pharmaceutical products. In the United States, the Food andDrug Administration (FDA), an agency of the U.S. Governmentregulates food and pharmaceutical ingredients including rheologymodifiers and determines which additive are acceptable for humanconsumption. Similar regulations exist in other nations. The FDAregulations relating to rheology modifier use in foods are published inthe Code of Federal Regulations, (Latest Revision) Title 21, § 172, 182and 184. In some cases, the regulations may also include reference to twoother important compendia, The Food Chemicals Codex and the UnitedStates Pharmacopoeia/National Formulary. These two publicationscontain monographs that are, in effect, specifications for the properties ofrheology modifiers used as direct food and pharmaceutical additives.Handbook users involved with the use of rheology modifiers in food orpharmaceutical applications should be intimately familiar with thepertinent sections of local regulations and will want to select candidatesthat conform to these regulatory requirements.

Excipients in personal care products are not normally regulated butmanufacturers of personal care products usually decide that the productsthey use in these consumer products should meet the same stringentrequirements as food or pharmaceutical grade products with respect tomicrobial, pathogen and heavy metal content.


The ingredients in household and institutional products are essentiallyunregulated. Any of the 20 types of rheology modifiers couldconceivably be used in these products. But other considerations comeinto play here not the least of which are cost effectiveness, compatibilityand stability in the system.

2. The Liquid PhaseThe second parameter that should be considered is the nature of theliquid phase of the composition. The most common liquid phase is, ofcourse, water. But other possible liquid phases include mixtures of waterand minor amounts of water-miscible polar organic solvents such asalcohols, glycols and glycol ethers or polar solvents such as alcohols,glycols and glycol ethers alone, or non-polar solvents such as lowmolecular weight aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons, organic estersand silicon fluids. The rheology modifier selected should berecommended for the intended liquid phase by the supplier.

3. Other Application ParametersDoes the intended application require a rheology modifier that producesa clear product? Many, but not all, of the products listed herein can yieldclear compositions. In some cases, suppliers have developed special“clear” grades of their products to answer this need.

It is frequently necessary to consider also other ingredients in theintended formulation that might influence the performance of therheology modifier. Common ingredients that sometimes affect rheologymodifier performance are strong acids (pH of system >3), strong bases(pH of system <11), strong oxidizing agents, dissolved electrolytes andorganic cationic species such as quaternary ammonium compounds.

Considering these three parameters, Figure 3.1, Selection Worksheet, ispresented as an aid to rheology modifier selection. The left column of thechart lists the 20 types of rheology modifiers. To the right are columnsheaded by the performance parameters listed above. One suggested wayto use this worksheet is to highlight the columns that are pertinent to theapplication. Then, using a straight edge horizontally across the page,identify those rheology modifiers that will satisfy all the desiredperformance requirements.

Selecting the Best C

andidates 197

Table 3.1a Selection Worksheet

Application Type Fluid Phase Other Ingredients/Parameters

Rheology Modifier

Foo

d

Pha

rma-

ceut

ical

Per

sona

l C

are

Hou

seho

ld/

Inst

itut

iona

l

Wat

er &

M

ixtu

res1

Pol

ar

Solv

ents

Org

anic

s &

Si

licon

es2

Cle

ar

Syst

ems

Syst

em

pH <

3

Syst

em

pH >

11

Stro

ng

Oxi

dize

rs

Dis

solv

ed

Ele

ctro

lyte

s

Cat

ioni

cs

Pre

sent

Acrylic Polymers Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Alginates Ó Ó AssociativeThickeners Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Carrageenan Ó Ó Ó Microcrystalline Cellulose

Ó Ó Ó

Carboxymethyl-cellulose Sodium

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Hydroxyethylcellulose Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Hydroxypropyl - cellulose

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Hydroxypropyl - methylcellulose

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Methylcellulose Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

198 Rheology M

odifier Handbook

Table 3.1b Selection Worksheet

Application Type Fluid Phase Other Ingredients/Parameters

Rheology Modifier

Foo

d

Pha

rma-

ceut

ical

Per

sona

l C

are

Hou

seho

ld/

Inst

itut

iona

l

Wat

er &

M

ixtu

res1

Pol

ar

Solv

ents

Org

anic

s &

Si

licon

es2

Cle

ar

Syst

ems

Syst

em

pH <

3

Syst

em

pH >

11

Stro

ng

Oxi

dize

rs

Dis

solv

ed

Ele

ctro

lyte

s

Cat

ioni

cs

Pre

sent

Guar & Guar Derivatives

Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó

Locust Bean Gum Ó Ó Organoclays Ó Ó Ó Ó n/a n/a n/a n/a Polyethylene Ó Ó Ó n/a n/a n/a n/a Polyethylene Oxide Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Polyvinylpyrrolidone Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Silica Ó Ó Ó Ó n/a n/a n/a n/a Water-swellable Clay Ó Ó Ó Ó Xanthan Gum Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Ó Legend: Ó = Recommended, Only certain grades recommended, n/a not applicable Notes: 1 Includes mixtures of water and minor amount of water-miscible polar solvent 2 May also include chlorinated hydrocarbons


Table 3.2a

1. Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application

Alginates see Table 2.3

1. Bakery Products Cheesecake KELTONE, MANUGEL, MANUCOL,

KELGIN, KELVIS, KELCOSOL, DARILOID & LACTICOL

Glazes & Icing KELTONE, MANUGEL, MANUCOL, KELGIN, KELVIS, KELCOSOL, DARILOID, KELMAR & LACTICOL

Pie & Pastry Filling KELTONE, MANUGEL, MANUCOL, KELGIN, KELVIS, KELCOSOL, DARILOID, KELMAR & LACTICOL

2. Beverages Fruit Drinks KELCOLOID HVF & LVF 3. Dairy Products Cream Cheese DARILOID, LACTICOL

& MARILOID Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet

KELCOSOL, KELTONE, DARILOID, LACTICOL, MARILOID, DRICOID & SHERBILIZER

Milk Shakes DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID Processed Cheese & Cheese Sauce

KELCOSOL, KELTONE, DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID

Sour Cream DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID Whipped Topping KELTONE, MANUGEL & KELCOLOID Yogurt DARILOID, LACTICOL & MARILOID 4. Prepared Foods Relish KELCOLOID, MANUCOL ESTERS Salad Dressing KELCOLOID, MANUCOL ESTERS


Table 3.2b

Rheology Modifiers for Food Applications

Application

Carrageenan see Tables 2.5a & 2.5b

1. Bakery Products Pie & Pastry Filling GENU USD-1 2. Beverages Fruit Drink SEAKEM & VISCARIN 3. Dairy Products Chocolate Milk GENULACTA LK-60 & K-100 Coffee Creamer GENULACTA K-100 Evaporated Milk GENULACTA LRC-21 Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet GENUVISCO CSH-2 &

GENULACTA L-100 Milk Shake GENULACTA LP-60 & LRC-21 Whipped Topping GENULACTA LRC-21 Yogurt GENULACTA LRA-50 4. Prepared Foods Cooked Fish Product GENUGEL FB-91 & MB-73 Cooked Ham Product GENUGEL CHP-200, CHP-2, MB-61F

& ME-83F Cooked Poultry Product GENUGEL CHP-2, CHP-200 & MB-

61F, ME-83 & ME-83F Cooked Pudding GENULACTA P-100 & PL-93 Low-Fat Ground Meat, Sausage

GENUGEL ME-83 & GENUVISCO MP-11F

Ready-to-Eat Dessert SEAKEM & VISCARIN Salad Dressing GENUVISCO CJ Structured Food SEAKEM & VISCARIN Water-gel Dessert SEAKEM & VISCARIN 5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert GENUVISCO CSM-2

SEAKEM & VISCARIN Instant Pudding GENULACTA CP-100


Table 3.2c


Application

Cellulose, Microcrystalline see Table 2.6

1. Bakery Products Glazes & Icing AvicelRC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611,

WC-595 WCN-30 & Novagel RCN-15 2. Beverages Bar Mix Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611,

WC-595 & WCN-30 Fruit Drink Novagel RCN-10 & RCN-15 High Fiber Drink Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611,

WC-595 & WCN-30 3. Dairy Products Cheese, Creamed and Processed

Novagel RCN-10 & RCN-15

Chocolate Milk Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611, WC-595 & WCN-30

Ice Cream, Sherbet Novagel RCN-10 Low Fat Sour Cream Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611,

WC-595 & WCN-30 Whipped Topping Avicel RC-501 4. Prepared Foods Salad Dressing Avicel RC-591, CL-611 & Novagel RCN-15 Sauces and Gravy Avicel RC-591 & CL-611 5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert Avicel WC-595 Frying Batter Avicel RC501, RC-581, RC-591, CL-611,

WC-595 & WCN-30


Table 3.2d


Application Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium

see Table 2.7 1. Bakery Products Glazes & Icing Aqualon CMC 9H3SXF 2. Beverages Bar Mix Aqualon CMC 7LF & 7HXF Fruit Drink Aqualon CMC 9M31XF, 7HXF &

9H4XF High Fiber Drink Aqualon CMC 7LF 3. Dairy Products Cheese, Creamed and Processed

Aqualon CMC 7H3SF

Chocolate Milk Aqualon CMC 9M31F Ice Cream, Sherbet Aqualon CMC 7HF & 7HOF Whipped Topping Aqualon CMC 7MF & 7HF 4. Prepared Foods Ready-to-Eat Dessert Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Salad Dressing Aqualon CMC 9M31XF & 9H4XF Sauces and Gravies Aqualon CMC 7H3SF & 7H4R Syrups Aqualon CMC 7LF & 9M31XF 5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF & 9M31XF Frying Batter Aqualon CMC 7HF, 9M8F & 9M31XF Pet Food Aqualon CMC 7H4F, 7HF & 9H4XF


Table 3.2e


Application

Hydroxypropylcellulose see Table 2.9

1. Bakery Products Glazes & Icing KLUCEL GFF 2. Dairy Products Whipped Topping KLUCEL GFF 3. Prepared Foods Structured & Extruded Food KLUCEL MFF


Table 3.2f


Application

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose see Tables 2.10a & 2.10b

1. Bakery Products Cake BENECELMP843

METHOCEL F50FG1, K100FG & K4MFG Doughnut BENECEL MP 843

METHOCEL F50FG & K100FG Glazes & Icing BENECEL MP 843

METHOCEL E15FG, K-100FG & K4MFG Muffin BENECEL MP 843

METHOCEL F50FG & K100FG Pie & Pastry Filling BENECEL MP 874

METHOCEL K100FG & K100MFG Tortilla/Taco BENECEL MP 843

METHOCEL E-15FG, K100MFG & K4MFG

2. Dairy Products Ice Cream, Sherbet BENECEL MP 824 & MP 843

METHOCEL K4MFG & K100MFG Whipped Topping BENECEL MP 824

METHOCEL F50FG, & K100FG


Table 3.2f, continued

Application Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 3. Prepared Foods Fruit Spread METHOCEL K4MFG Salad Dressing BENECEL MP 824, MP 874 & MP 943

METHOCEL F4MFG, K4MFG, & K100MFG

Sauce and Gravy METHOCEL K4MFG, & K100MFG, Soup METHOCEL K4MFG Structured & Extruded Food

BENECEL MP 824 & MP 843 METHOCEL F4MFG

Syrup BENECEL MP 824 METHOCEL K4MFG

Water-gel Dessert METHOCEL K4MFG & K100MFG 4. Other Food Products Flavor Oil Emulsion METHOCEL E15FG & E50FG Frying Batter BENECEL MP 874

METHOCEL E15FG, F50FG, K100FG Pet Food BENECEL MP 843 & MP 874

METHOCEL K100FG, K4MFG & K100MFG


Table 3.2g


Application

Methylcellulose see Tables 2.11a & 2.11b

1. Bakery Products Cake Mix METHOCEL A4CFG1 Doughnut BENECEL M 043

METHOCEL A4CFG Muffin METHOCEL A4CFG Pie & Pastry Filling BENECEL M 043

METHOCEL A4MFG & A15FG Tortilla/Taco METHOCEL A4MFG 2. Beverages Fruit Drink METHOCEL A15FG 3. Dairy Products Cream Cheese METHOCEL A4CFG Ice Cream, Sherbet METHOCEL A4CFG Milk Shake METHOCEL A40MFG Processed Cheese & Cheese Spread

METHOCEL A4CFG

Whipped Topping METHOCEL A15FG Yogurt METHOCEL A40MFG 4. Prepared Foods Baby Food METHOCEL A4MFG Ready-to-Eat Dessert METHOCEL A4CFG Salad Dressing BENECEL M 043

METHOCEL A4MFG Sauce and Gravy BENECEL M 043

METHOCEL A4MFG & A40MFG Soup METHOCEL A4MFG Structured & Extruded Food BENECEL M 043

METHOCEL A4MFG & A40MFG


Table 3.2g, continued

Application Methylcellulose 5. Other Food Products Frying Batter BENECEL M 042 & M 043

METHOCEL A4MFG Pet Food METHOCEL A4MFG


Table 3.2h


Application

Guar & Guar Gum Derivatives see Tables 2.12a & 2.12b

1. Bakery Products Cake Mix SUPERCOL U

Jaguar 4500F, EZ, 6000 & HV400F Doughnut SUPERCOL U

Jaguar 4500F, 6000, HV400F & EZ Glazes & Icing SUPERCOL GF & U

Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Muffin SUPERCOL U

Jaguar HV400F, 4500F & 6000 Pie & Pastry Filling SUPERCOL GF & U

Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Tortilla/Taco SUPERCOL GF

Jaguar 4500F & 4000FC 2. Beverages Fruit Drink SUPERCOL GF & U

Jaguar 400FC 3. Dairy Products Chocolate Milk SUPERCOL U

Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Cream Cheese SUPERCOL GF & U

Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Ice Cream, Sherbet SUPERCOL G2-S & G3-S

Jaguar 4000FC Milk Shake SUPERCOL GF & U

Jaguar 4500F & HV400F Processed Cheese & Cheese Spread

SUPERCOL GF & U Jaguar 4000FC,4500F, EZ & HV400F


Table 3.2h, continued

Application Guar & Guar Gum Derivatives 3. Dairy Products, continued Whipped Topping Jaguar 4000FC, 4500F & HV 400F Yogurt SUPERCOL GF & U

Jaguar 4500F & 4000FC 4. Prepared Foods Baby Food SUPERCOL GF

Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Ready-to-Eat Dessert SUPERCOL U

Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F Salad Dressing SUPERCOL GF

Jaguar HV400F & 6000 Sauce and Gravy Jaguar 6000, 4000FC, 4500F, EZ &

HV400F Soup SUPERCOL GF & U

Jaguar 6000, 4500F, EZ & HV400F Structured & Extruded Food

Jaguar 4000FC & 4500F

5. Other Food Products Frying Batter Jaguar HV400F & 4500F, 6000 & EZ Pet Food SUPERCOL G2-S & G3-S

Jaguar 4000FC


Table 3.2i


Application

Locust Bean Gum see Tables 2.13a & 2.13b

1. Bakery Products Bakery Filling Ashland Locust Bean Gum

Locust Bean Gum HG-175 & HG-200

2. Beverages Fruit Drink, Dry Mix & Liquid Ashland Locust Bean Gum

Locust Bean Gum HG-175 & HG-200

3. Dairy Products Cream Cheese Ashland Locust Bean Gum

Locust Bean Gum HG-175, HG-200 & MEYPRODYN

Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet

Ashland Locust Bean Gum Locust Bean Gum HG-175 & HG-200

Milk Shake Ashland Locust Bean Gum Cottage Cheese Ashland Locust Bean Gum Sour Cream Ashland Locust Bean Gum Yogurt Ashland Locust Bean Gum


4. Prepared Foods Instant Soups Ashland Locust Bean Gum

MEYPRODYN Sauce. Gravy & Marinade Ashland Locust Bean Gum



Table 3.2j


Application

Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20a – 2.20c

1. Bakery Products Bakery Filling J.X.G. FFB

KELTROL RHODIGEL, Ultra

Cake, & Brownie, Dry Mix & Finished Goods

J.X.G.. FFB KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM

RHODIGEL,, 200, Ultra Glazes & Icing J.X.G. FFB

KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM RHODIGEL Ultra

Muffin, Doughnut Dry Mix & Finished Goods

J.X.G. FFB KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM RHODIGEL 200 & Ultra

Pizza and Pie Crust, Tortilla, Pastry

KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM

2. Beverages Fruit Drink, Dry Mix & Liquid

J.X.G. FNA, FED & FNCS KELTROL & KELTROL F RHODIGEL, 200 & Ultra

3. Dairy Products Cheesecake KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM Cream Cheese

J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID RHODIGEL

Cottage & Ricotta Cheese KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID Ice Cream, Sherbet, Sorbet



Table 3.2j, continued

Application Xanthan Gum 3. Dairy Products, continued Milk Shake


Processed Cheese & Cheese Spread


Sour Cream J.X.G. FNA KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & DRICOID RHODIGEL

Whipped Topping J.X.G. FNA KELTROL RHODIGEL

Yogurt KELTROL 4. Prepared Foods Relish, Chutney & Salsa KELTROL Salad Dressing KELTROL Sauce. Gravy & Marinade J.X.G. FFB & FNA

KELTROL RHODIGEL, 200, EZ, Supra & Ultra

Syrup J.X.G. FED, FFB & FNA KELTROL RHODIGEL Ultra, EZ & Supra

5. Other Food Products Dry Mix Dessert J.X.G. FED, FFB & FNA

KELTROL RHODIGEL, RHODIGEL Ultra

Frying Batter KELTROL, GFS, KOB87 & KELGUM RHODIGEL, 200 & Ultra


Table 3.3a

2. Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application

Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers see Table 2.2

Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup CARBOPOL 934P NF, 974P NF, 971P NF Oral Suspension CARBOPOL 934P NF, 974P NF &

971P NF Topical Therapeutic Cream

CARBOPOL 910 NF, 934 NF, 940 NF, 980 NF, 342 NF, 382 NF, PEMULENTR-1 NF & TR-2 NF

Topical Therapeutic Gel CARBOPOL 910 NF, 934 NF, 940 NF, 980 NF, 941 NF, 981 NF, 1342 NF, 1382, PEMULENTR-1 NF & TR-2 NF

Topical Therapeutic Lotion

CARBOPOL 910 NF, 934 NF, 941 NF, 974 NF, 981 NF, 1342 NF, 1382, PEMULEN TR-1 NF & TR-2 NF

Topical Therapeutic Spray

CARBOPOL 941 NF

Topical Therapeutic Suspension

PEMULEN TR-1 NF


Table 3.3b

Rheology Modifiers for Pharmaceutical Applications

Application

Carrageenan see Table 2.5b

Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup ViscarinGP-109NF & GP-209NF Oral Suspension Gelcarin GP-379NF,

SeaSpen PF Topical Therapeutic Cream

Gelcarin GP-379NF & GP-911NF, Viscarin GP-109NF, GP-209NF, GP328NF

Topical Therapeutic Gel Gelcarin GP-379NF, GP812NF & GP-911NF Topical Therapeutic Lotion

Gelcarin GP-379NF, & GP-911NF, Viscarin GP-109NF,GP-209NF, GP-328NF, SeaSpen PF

Topical Therapeutic Spray

Gelcarin GP-379NF, Viscarin GP-109NF, GP-209NF & GP-328NF SeaSpen PF

Topical Therapeutic Suspension

Gelcarin GP-379NF Viscarin GP-109NF, GP-209NF & GP-328NF SeaSpen PF


Table 3.3c


Application

Microcrystalline Cellulose see Table 2.6

Aqueous Systems Oral Suspension AVICEL RC-591 NF

& CL-611 Topical Therapeutic Cream AVICEL RC-591 NF

& CL-611 Topical Therapeutic Suspension AVICEL RC-591 NF

Table 3.3d



see Table 2.7 Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel Aqualon CMC 7H3SF Ophthalmic Lubricant Aqualon CMC 7H3SF Oral Liquid/Syrup Aqualon CMC 9M31SF & 12M31 SF Oral Suspension Aqualon CMC 7MF & 7LF Topical Therapeutic Cream Aqualon CMC 7MF Topical Therapeutic Gel Aqualon CMC 7M3SF Topical Therapeutic Lotion Aqualon CMC 7MF Topical Therapeutic Suspension

Aqualon CMC 7LF & 7MF


Table 3.3e


Application

Hydroxyethylcellulose see Table 2.8a - 2.8b

1. Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel NATROSOL250HX Pharma Ophthalmic Lubricant NATROSOL 250HX Pharma Oral Suspension NATROSOL 250L NF Salve/Ointment NATROSOL 250H NF Topical Therapeutic Cream NATROSOL 250HX Pharma Topical Therapeutic Gel NATROSOL 250HX Pharma Topical Therapeutic Lotion NATROSOL 250HX Pharma Topical Therapeutic Suspension

NATROSOL 250L NF & 250H NF

2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup NATROSOL 250G Pharma Salve/Ointment NATROSOL 250G Pharma Suppository NATROSOL 250G Pharma Topical Therapeutic Cream NATROSOL 250 M Pharma Topical Therapeutic Lotion NATROSOL 250M Pharma


Table 3.3f


Application Hydroxypropylcellulose

see Table 2.9 1. Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel KLUCEL HF NF & HXF NF Ophthalmic Lubricant KLUCEL HXF NF & EXH Pharma Oral Liquid/ Syrup KLUCEL HXF NF Oral Suspension KLUCEL LF Pharma, & HF NF Salve/Ointment KLUCEL HF NF & HXF NF Topical Therapeutic Cream KLUCEL HF NF & MF NF Topical Therapeutic Gel KLUCEL HXF NF Topical Therapeutic Lotions KLUCEL HXF NF Topical Therapeutic Suspensions

KLUCEL LF Pharma

2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup KLUCEL HXF NF Salve/Ointment KLUCEL HXF NF Suppository KLUCEL GF NF Topical Therapeutic Cream KLUCEL MF NF Topical Therapeutic Lotion KLUCEL MF NF


Table 3.3g


Application Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose

see Tables 2.10a & 2.10b 1. Aqueous Systems Ophthalmic Lubricant

METHOCEL E50P, F4MP, E4MP

Oral Liquid/Syrup METHOCEL K15MP Oral Suspension METHOCEL K100MP Spray Bandage METHOCEL E50P Surgical Scrub METHOCEL K4MP Topical Therapeutic Cream METHOCEL K4MP Topical Therapeutic Gel METHOCEL K15MP Topical Therapeutic Lotion METHOCEL K15MP Topical Therapeutic Suspension METHOCEL K15MP 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup METHOCEL E4MP


Table 3.3h


Application

Methylcellulose see Tables 2.11a & 2.11b

1. Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup METHOCEL A4MP Oral Suspension METHOCEL A4MP Spray Bandage METHOCEL A15LVP Surgical Scrub METHOCEL A4MP Topical Therapeutic Cream METHOCEL A4MP Topical Therapeutic Gel METHOCEL A4MP Topical Therapeutic Lotion METHOCEL A4MP Topical Therapeutic Suspension METHOCEL A4MP

Table 3.3i


Application

Polyvinylpyrrolidone see Table 2.17a & 2.17b

1. Aqueous Systems Ophthalmic Lubricant Kollidon 17PF, 25, 30 & 90F Oral Liquid/Syrup Kollidon12PF, 17PF, 25, 30, 90F

PLASDONE C-15, C-30, K-25,K-29, K-32 & K-90/D/M

Oral Suspension Kollidon 12PF, 90F Surgical Scrub PLASDONE K-25,K-29, K-32 &

K-90/D/M Topical Therapeutic Cream PLASDONE K-25,K-29, K-32 & K-

90/D/M Topical Therapeutic Gel Kollidon 30 & 90F 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Suppository PLASDONE K-25,K-29, K-32 & K-

90/D/M


Table 3.3j


Application

Silica see Table 2.18a

1. Aqueous Systems Topical Therapeutic Cream CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5 Topical Therapeutic Spray CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5 2. Non-Aqueous Systems Oral Liquid/Syrup CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5 Salve/Ointment CAB-O-SIL M5, M-5P, PTG & HS-5

Table 3.3k


Application

Water-swellable Clay see Tables 2.19c & 2.19e

Aqueous Systems Dental Treatment Gel VEEGUMD Oral Suspension Bentolite NF

VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, K & HS Salve/Ointment VEEGUM Topical Therapeutic Cream VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV & K Topical Therapeutic Lotion VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV & K Topical Therapeutic Suspension

Bentolite NF VEEGUM & VEEGUM K


Table 3.3l


Application

Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20a – 2.20c

Aqueous Systems Dental Impression Material J.X.G. FNA

KELTROL CR RHODIGEL

Dental Treatment Gel J.X.G. FFB & FNA KELTROL, KELTROL CR, F & FT RHODIGEL

Oral Liquid/Syrup J.X.G. FNA & FNCS KELTROL T, TF RHODIGEL Clear

Oral Suspension J.X.G. FNA KELTROL & KELTROL CR RHODIGEL

Topical Therapeutic Cream J.X.G. FNA Topical Therapeutic Gel J.X.G. FNA

KELTROL T, TF RHODIGEL Clear

Topical Therapeutic Lotion J.X.G. FNA Topical Therapeutic Suspension

J.X.G. FNA KELTROL & KELTROL CR RHODIGEL


Table 3.4a

3. Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications

Application Acrylic Polymers see Tables 2.1a – 2.1c

1. Hair Care Conditioner STRUCTURE PLUS Hair Color STRUCTURE 2001 & 3001 Permanent Wave STRUCTURE 2001 & 3001 Relaxer STRUCTURE 2001 Shampoo STRUCTURE PLUS

ACULYN 22 & 33 Shampoo, Antidandruff ACULYN 22 Styling Gel/Cream STRUCTURE 2001

ACULYN 22 & 33 2. Skin Care Cream STRUCTURE PLUS

ACULYN 22 & 33 Depilatory STRUCTURE 2001

ACULYN 22 Gel STRUCTURE 2001

ACULYN 22 Liquid Soap ACULYN 22 Lotion ACULYN 22 & 33 Sunscreen RHEOLATE

ACULYN 22 & 33

Selecting the Best Candidate 223

Table 3.4b

Rheology Modifiers for Personal Care Applications

Application Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers

see Tables 2.2a & 2.2b 1. Hair Care Curl Activator Carbopol 940, Ultrez 10 Shampoo Carbopol ETD 2020 Shampoo, Antidandruff Carbopol ETD 2020 Styling Gel/Cream Carbopol 940, Ultrez 10 & Pemulen TR-1

ACRITAMER940 & 505E 2. Skin Care Cream Carbopol ETD 2020, Ultrez 10,

Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 ACRITAMER 934, 940 941 & 501E

Exfoliating Cream/Lotion

Carbopol ETD 2020 & Ultrez 10

Fragrance Carbopol 981, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 Gel Carbopol ETD 2020 & Ultrez 10

ACRITAMER 940 Lotion Carbopol 934, 940, 980, ETD 2050,

Ultrez 10, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2 ACRITAMER 934, 940 & 941

Shave Cream/Gel Carbopol 2984 & Ultrez 10 Shower Gel Carbopol ETD 2020 Sunscreen Carbopol ETD 2020, Pemulen TR-1 & TR-2

ACRITAMER 941


Table 3.4c


Application Associative Thickeners see Table 2.4b

1. Color Cosmetics Liquid Makeup ACULYN 44 & 46 Mascara ACULYN 44 & 46 2.Hair Care Conditioner ACULYN 44 & 46 Hair Color ACULYN 44 & 46 Permanent Wave ACULYN 44 & 46 3.Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

ACULYN 44 & 46

Cream ACULYN 44 & 46 Lotion ACULYN 44 & 46 Sunscreen ACULYN 44


Table 3.4d



see Table 2.7 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner Aqualon CMC 7LF Eye Shadow Aqualon CMC 7LF Liquid Makeup Aqualon CMC 7LF Mascara Aqualon CMC 7LF 2. Dental Care Denture Adhesive Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Mouthwash/ Gargle Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Toothpaste/Gel Aqualon CMC 7MXF & 9M31XF 3. Hair Care Conditioner Aqualon CMC 9H31SF Curl Activator Aqualon CMC 1221 Hair Color Aqualon CMC 9M8F 4. Skin Care Cream Aqualon CMC 9M8F Fragrance Aqualon CMC 9M8F Gel Aqualon CMC 7H3SXF Lotion Aqualon CMC 7M Shave Cream/Gel Aqualon CMC 9M3SXF Sunscreen Aqualon CMC 7M


Table 3.4e


Application Hydroxyethylcellulose see Tables 2.8a & 2.8b

1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner NATROSOL 250LR Eye Shadow NATROSOL 250LR Lipstick/Gloss NATROSOL 250H Pharma Liquid Makeup NATROSOL 250LR Mascara NATROSOL 250LR 2. Dental Care Denture Adhesive NATROSOL 250H Pharma Mouthwash/ Gargle NATROSOL 250H Pharma Toothpaste/Gel NATROSOL 250H Pharma &

NATROSOL PLUS (330 cstk.)

CELLOSIZEPCG-10 3. Hair Care Conditioner NATROSOL 250HR

CELLOSIZE QP-52,000H Curl Activator NATROSOL 250LR Hair Color NATROSOL 250MR Shampoo NATROSOL 250HR

CELLOSIZE QP-4400H Shampoo, Antidandruff NATROSOL 250HR

CELLOSIZE PCG-10 Styling Gel/Cream NATROSOL 250HHR 4. Skin Care Roll on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

NATROSOL 250HR

Cream NATROSOL 250HR Depilatory NATROSOL 250MR Exfoliating Cream/Lotion NATROSOL 250MR



Application Hydroxyethylcellulose 4. Skin Care, continued Facial Mask NATROSOL 250MR Gel NATROSOL 250HHR Liquid Soap NATROSOL 250HR Lotion NATROSOL 250HR Shave Cream/Gel NATROSOL 250HHR

CELLOSIZE PCG-10 Shower Gel NATROSOL 250HR Sunscreen NATROSOL 250HR


Table 3.4f


Application Hydroxypropylcellulose see Table 2.9

1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner KLUCEL LF Eye Shadow KLUCEL LF Lipstick/Gloss KLUCEL MF Liquid Makeup KLUCEL LF Mascara KLUCEL LF 2. Dental Care Mouthwash/ Gargle KLUCEL HXF Toothpaste/Gel KLUCEL HXF 3. Hair Care Conditioner KLUCEL MF Curl Activator KLUCEL EF Shampoo KLUCEL MF Shampoo, Antidandruff KLUCEL MF Styling Gel/Cream KLUCEL HF 4. Skin Care Roll on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

KLUCEL LF

Cream KLUCEL MF Depilatory KLUCEL LF Exfoliating Cream/Lotion KLUCEL LF Facial Mask KLUCEL GF Gel KLUCEL HF Lotion KLUCEL MF Shave Cream/Gel KLUCEL HF Shower Gel KLUCEL MF Sunscreen KLUCEL MF


Table 3.4g



see Tables 2.10a & 2.10b 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner METHOCEL 40-202 Eye Shadow METHOCEL 40-202 Liquid Makeup METHOCEL 40-202 Mascara METHOCEL 40-202 2. Dental Care Mouthwash/ Gargle METHOCEL E50P & E4MP Toothpaste/Gel METHOCEL K100MP 3. Hair Care Conditioner METHOCEL 40-202, K15MP &

K15MS Shampoo METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101,

40-202, E4MP & K4MP Shampoo, Antidandruff METHOCEL F4MP & 40-202 Styling Gel/Cream METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202

& K100MP 4. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

BENECEL MP943

Cream BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP

Depilatory METHOCEL 40-100 Exfoliating Cream/Lotion METHOCEL 40-100




4. Skin Care, continued Facial Mask BENECEL MP943

METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP

Gel BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-202

Liquid Soap BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101 & 40-202

Lotion BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP

Shave Cream/Gel BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202 & E4MP

Shower Gel BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101 & 40-202

Sunscreen BENECEL MP943 METHOCEL 40-100, 40-101, 40-202, E4MP & K4MP


Table 3.4h


Application Guar & Guar Derivatives see Tables 2.12a & 2.12b

1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner SUPERCOL K-1 Eye Shadow SUPERCOL K-1 Liquid Makeup SUPERCOL K-1 Mascara SUPERCOL K-1 2. Dental Care Denture Adhesive SUPERCOL U Mouthwash/ Gargle SUPERCOL K-1 Toothpaste/Gel SUPERCOL U 3. Hair Care Conditioner N-HANCE 3000

Hi-Care1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17, C-162 & HP-8

Shampoo N-HANCE HP-40, HP-40S, 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215 Hi-Care1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17, C-162 & HP-8

Shampoo, Antidandruff SUPERCOL U Styling Gel/Cream N-HANCE HP 40 & HP 40S

Jaguar HP-105 4. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

Jaguar HP-120

Cream SUPERCOL U, N-HANCE 3000, HP-40 & HP-40S

Depilatory N-HANCE 3000 & SUPERCOL K-1 Jaguar C-162


Table 3.4h, continued

Application Guar & Guar Derivatives 4. Skin Care, continued Exfoliating Cream/Lotion N-HANCE 3000, HP-40, HP-40S,

SUPERCOL K-1 Liquid Soap N-HANCE 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215

Hi-Care 1000 Jaguar C-13S, C14S, C-17 & C-162

Lotion N-HANCE HP-40, HP-40S, 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215 Hi-Care 1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17, C-162 & HP-8

Shave Cream/Gel N-HANCE HP-40, HP-40S, 3000, 3196, 3205 & 3215 Hi-Care 1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17 & C-162

Shower Gel N-HANCE 3196, 3205 & 3215, HP-40 & HP-40S Hi-Care 1000, Jaguar C-13S, C-14S, C-17 & C-162

Sunscreen N-HANCE 3000, HP-40, & HP-40S SUPERCOL U & K-1


Table 3.4i


Application Organoclays see Tables 2.14a – 2.14c

1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner BENTONE 27 & 38

TIXOGEL OMS Eye Shadow BENTONE 38, BENTONE GEL 10-ST,

OMS, ISD, VS-5, VS-5PC & SVS TIXOGEL MIO & OMS

Lipstick/Gloss BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL CAO, MIO & YVS TIXOGEL LAN & MIO

Liquid Makeup BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL EUG, CTCC, PGC, MIO, YVS, VS-5, VS-5PC & SVS TIXOGEL FTN

Mascara BENTONE GEL 10-ST, OMS, ISD, VS-5, VS-5PC & SVS TIXOGEL MIO, OMS, IDD-1678 & IHD-1235

2. Hair Care Styling Cream/Dressing BENTONE GEL LOI, MIO, YVS, VS-5,

VS-5PC, VS/IPM & SVS 3. Nail Care Nail Lacquer BENTONE 27

TIXOGEL LG


Table 3.4i, continued

Application Organoclays 4. Skin Care Stick & Spray Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL DOA, IPM, YVS, VS-5, VS-5PG, VS/IPM, & SVS Claytone SO TIXOGEL FTN, IPM, & VSP

Cream BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL EUG, GTCC, PGC, LOI, MIO, TN, YVS, VS-5, VS-5PG & SVS TIXOGEL FTN, IPM, LAN, MIO & VSP

Exfoliating Cream/Lotion

BENTONE GEL EUG, GTCC, PGC, IPM, LOI, MIO, TN, YVS, VS-5PC, & SVS TIXOGEL IPM, LAN, MIO & OMS

Lotion BENTONE GEL EUG, GTCC, PGC, IPM, LOI, MIO, TN, YVS, VS-5PC, & SVS TIXOGEL IPM, LAN, MIO & VSP

Sunscreen BENTONE 27, 38, BENTONE GEL GTCC, PGC, TN, & SVS TIXOGEL LAN, VSP, TN & TIO-1234


Table 3.4j


Application Polyethylene see Table 2.15

1. Color Cosmetics Liquid Makeup A-CPolyethylene Mascara A-C Polyethylene 2. Skin Care Stick & Spray Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

A-C Polyethylene

Cream AC Polyethylene Lotion A-C Polyethylene Sunscreen A-C Polyethylene


Table 3.4k


Application

Polyethylene Oxide see Tables 2.16a & 2.16b

1.Dental Care Denture Adhesive POLYOX WSR-301NF Toothpaste/Gel POLYOX WSR 205NF 2.Hair Care Conditioner Sentry POLYOX WSR-205 Shampoo POLYOX WSR N-750, 205, N-60K &

301 Shampoo, Antidandruff POLYOX WSR N-750, 205, N-60K &

301 3.Skin Care Cream POLYOX WSR-205 &

N-60K Liquid Soap POLYOX WSR-205,

N-12K & N-60K Lotion POLYOX WSR-205 &

N-60K Shave Cream/Gel POLYOX WSR-205 Shower Gel R.I.T.A. PEO-2


Table 3.4l


Application Polyvinylpyrrolidone see Table 2.17

1. Color Cosmetics Eye Liner POVIDERM SK3 Eye Shadow POVIDERM SK3 Liquid Makeup POVIDERM SK3 Mascara POVIDERM SK3 2. Hair Care Hair Color PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Permanent Wave PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Shampoo PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Styling Gel/Cream PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 3. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant/ Deodorant

POVIDERM SK3

Cream POVIDERM SK3 Depilatory POVIDERM SK3 Facial Mask POVIDERM SK3 Liquid Soap POVIDERM SK3 Lotion POVIDERM SK3 Shave Cream/Gel POVIDERM SK3 Shower Gel POVIDERM SK3 Sunscreen POVIDERM SK3


Table 3.4m


Application Silica see Tables 2.18a – 2.18 c

1. Color Cosmetics Lipstick/Gloss CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5 & EH-5

AEROSIL Liquid Makeup CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5

AEROSIL Mascara CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5

AEROSIL 2. Dental Care Toothpaste/Gel CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5

AEROSIL 200, SIDENT8, 9,10 & 22S 3. Hair Care Shampoo CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5

AEROSIL 4. Nail Care Nail Lacquer CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5, TS-

610 & TS-530 AEROSIL

5. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant & Deodorant

CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5 & TS-530 AEROSIL

Cream CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5, EH-5 AEROSIL, SIPERNAT22S & 22SL

Fragrance CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5 & HS-5 & EH-5 Gel SIPERNAT22S & 22SL Lotion SIPERNAT22S & 22SL Sunscreen CAB-O-SIL M-5, H-5, HS-5, EH-5 & TS-

720 AEROSIL


Table 3.4n


Application Water-swellable Clay

see Tables 2.19a – 2.19e 1. Color Cosmetics Eye Shadow BENTONEMA & EW

Gelwhite MAS-H & MAS-L VEEGUM

Liquid Makeup Laponite XLG BENTONE EW & LT Gelwhite MAS-H & MAS-L Mineral Colloid BP & MO OPTIGEL CK, CG & SH VEEGUM, VEEGUM PLUS & Ultra

Mascara BENTONE MA &EW VEEGUM

2. Dental Care Toothpaste/Gel Laponite D & DF

OPTIGEL SH VEEGUM D

3. Hair Care Conditioner BENTONE MA & EW

VEEGUM HS Shampoo BENTONE EW

OPTIGEL CK &CG VEEGUM & VEEGUM HS

Shampoo, Antidandruff Laponite XLG VEEGUM, VEEGUM HS & PRO

Straightener Laponite XLG VEEGUM HS

Styling Gel/Cream Laponite XLG


Table 3.4n, continued

Application Water-swellable Clay 4. Nail Care Cuticle Cream VEEGUM & VEEGUM Ultra 5. Skin Care Roll-on Antiperspirant & Deodorant

BENTONE EW & LT Gelwhite L, GP, H NF, MAS-H & MAS-L VEEGUM HV

Cream Laponite XLG BENTONE MA, EW & LT OPTIGEL CK &CG VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, PLUS & Ultra

Depilatory Laponite XLG VEEGUM HS

Exfoliating Cream/Lotion Laponite XLG VEEGUM, VEEGUM Ultra

Facial Mask Laponite XLG Mineral Colloid BP & MO VEEGUM, VEEGUM HS, F & Ultra

Lotion BENTONE MA, EW & LT Mineral Colloid BP & MO OPTIGEL CK &CG GWX-1285 & SH VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, PLUS & Ultra

Sunscreen Laponite XLG BENTONE MA, EW & LT VEEGUM, VEEGUM HV, PLUS & Ultra


Table 3.4o


Application Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20a – 2.20c

1. Color Cosmetics Liquid Makeup J.X.G. FNA

KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARES & T

2. Dental Care Mouthwash/Gargle J.X.G. FCS

KELTROL T & TF RHODICARE XC

Toothpaste/Gel J.X.G. FCS & FNA KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARE S, XC & T

3. Hair Care Shampoo J.X.G. FCS & FNA

KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARE T & XC

Styling Gel/Cream KELTROL RHODICARE T

4. Skin Care Cream KELTROL

RHODICARE S Liquid Soap KELTROL

RHODICARE XC Lotion J.X.G. FNA

KELTROL, KELTROL T & 1000 RHODICARE S & T

Shower Gel KELTROL RHODICARE T & XC

Sunscreen KELTROL J.X.G. FNA


Table 3.5a

4. Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products

Application Acrylic Polymers see Tables 2.1a & 2.1b

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Hand Dishwashing Detergent ACUSOL 810 & 823 LADD Without Bleach ACUSOL 810 & 842 2. Fabric Care Liquid Laundry Detergent ACUSOL 810, 820 & 823 3. Hand Cleaners Waterless Hand Cleaner ACUSOL 810 & 820 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Basin, Tub & Tile ACUSOL 810, 820, 823 & 842 Floor Cleaner & Polish ACUSOL 830 Glass Cleaner ACUSOL 830 Graffiti Cleaner RHEOLATE 420 Mildew Remover ACUSOL 830 Oven & Grill Cleaner RHEOLATE 1 & 101

ACUSOL 820 & 823 Solvent Degreaser ACUSOL 830 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Drain Unclogger ACUSOL 820


Table 3.5b

Rheology Modifiers for Household & Institutional Products

Application Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers

see Table 2.2 1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher Spot Remover

Carbopol672, 674, Carbopol ETD 2623 & 2691

Hand Dishwashing Detergent Carbopol 672, 676, ETD 2623 & 2690 Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent (LADD) with Bleach

Carbopol 672 & 676

LADD Without Bleach Carbopol 674 & Carbopol ETD 2691 2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener Carbopol ETD 2623 Laundry Pre-spotter Carbopol ETD 2623 Liquid Laundry Detergent Carbopol ETD 2691 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap Carbopol ETD 2020 & Ultrez 10 Waterless Hand Cleaner Carbopol ETD 2001, Pemulen TR-1

& TR-2 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Automobile Cleaner & Polish Carbopol 674, 694 & EZ-2 Basin, Tub & Tile Carbopol 674 & ETD 2691 Floor Cleaner & Polish Carbopol EZ-1 Furniture Polish Carbopol EZ-1 & EZ-2 Glass Cleaner Carbopol ETD 2623 Metal Cleaner & Polish Carbopol EZ-2 Mildew Remover Carbopol 672 & 676 Oven & Grill Cleaner Carbopol 672, 674, 676 & ETD 2691 Solvent Degreaser Carbopol ETD 2623



Application Cross-linked Acrylic Polymers 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish, continued Toilet Bowl Cleaner With Bleach

Carbopol 672 & 676

Toilet Bowl Cleaner, (Acid Type)

Carbopol 674, 676 & ETD 2691

5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel Carbopol 675, 690, EZ-1, EZ-2 &

PEMULEN TR-1 & TR-2 Insect Repellant Carbopol Ultrez 10

Table 3.5c


Application Associative Thickeners

see Table 2.4b 1. Fabric Care Fabric Softener ACUSOL 880 & 882 Liquid Bleach ACUSOL 880 & 882 Liquid Laundry Detergent ACUSOL 880 & 882 2. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Floor Cleaner & Polish ACUSOL 880 Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type

ACUSOL 880 & 882


Table 3.5d



see Table 2.7 1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher Spot Remover

Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM1221

Hand Dishwashing Detergent

Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221

Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent without Bleach


2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Laundry Pre-spotter Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Liquid Laundry Detergent


3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap Aqualon CMC 9M8 & 12M8 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Auto Cleaner & Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Basin, Tub & Tile Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Floor Cleaner & Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Furniture Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Glass Cleaner Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Graffiti Cleaner Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Metal Cleaner & Polish Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Oven & Grill Cleaner Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Solvent Degreaser Aqualon CMC 9M8 & AMBERGUM 1221 Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type





5. Other Hous ehold/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel Aqualon CMC 7L, 7M & 9M31 Drain Unclogger Aqualon CMC 7L, 9M8 & AMBERGUM

1221 Insect Repellant Aqualon CMC 7L, 9M8 & AMBERGUM

1221


Table 3.5e


Application

Hydroxyethylcellulose see Tables 2.8a & 2.8b

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher Pre-spotter

NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR

Hand Dishwashing Detergent NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR CELLOSIZE


NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR

2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Laundry Pre-spotter NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Liquid Laundry Detergent NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR

CELLOSIZE Starch, Aerosol NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Waterless Hand Cleaner NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR

CELLOSIZE 4. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Basin, Tub & Tile NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR

CELLOSIZE Floor Cleaner & Polish NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Furniture Polish NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Glass & Window NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Metal Cleaner NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Mildew Remover NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Oven & Grill Cleaner NATROSOL 250MBR & 250GR Solvent Degreaser NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type NATROSOL 250LR



Application Hydroxyethylcellulose

5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel NATROSOL 250MR & 250GR

CELLOSIZE Drain Unclogger NATROSOL 250LR Insect Repellant NATROSOL 250GR & 250LR Shoe Polish CELLOSIZE


Table 3.5f


Application

Hydroxypropylcellulose see Table 2.9

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher Spot Remover

KLUCEL L & G

Hand Dishwashing Detergent KLUCEL L & G Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent without Bleach

KLUCEL L & G

2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener KLUCEL L Laundry Pre-spotter KLUCEL L & E Liquid Bleach KLUCEL E Liquid Laundry Detergent

KLUCEL L & G

Starch, Aerosol KLUCEL L & E 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap KLUCEL L & G Waterless Hand Cleaner KLUCEL G, L & M 4. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish KLUCEL L & G Basin, Tub & Tile KLUCEL L & G Floor Cleaner & Polish KLUCEL L & G Furniture Polish KLUCEL L & G Glass & Window KLUCEL L & G Metal Cleaner KLUCEL L & G Mildew Remover KLUCEL L & G Oven & Grill Cleaner KLUCEL L & G


Table 3.5f, continued

Application Hydroxypropylcellulose 4. Hard Surface Cleaners, continued Solvent Degreaser KLUCEL L & G Toilet Bowl Cleaner With Bleach

KLUCEL L & G

Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type KLUCEL L & E 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel KLUCEL L & E Drain Unclogger KLUCEL L & E Insect Repellant KLUCEL L & E


Table 3.5g


Application

Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose see Table 2.10a

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Automatic Dishwasher Spot Remover

BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843

Hand Dishwashing Detergent




2. Fabric Care Fabric Softener BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Laundry Pre-spotter BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Liquid Laundry Detergent BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Starch, Aerosol BENECEL MP943 & CULMINAL

MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 3. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Waterless Hand Cleaner BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 4. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Basin, Tub & Tile BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Floor Cleaner & Polish BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843




4. Hard Surface Cleaners, continued Furniture Polish BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Glass & Window BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Metal Cleaner BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Mildew Remover BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Oven & Grill Cleaner BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Solvent Degreaser BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type


5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Drain Unclogger BENECEL MP943 &

CULMINAL MHPC 25, 50, 400 & 843 Insect Repellant



Table 3.5h


Application Polyvinylpyrrolidone see Table 2.17b

1. Fabric Care Laundry Pre-spotter PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Liquid Laundry Detergent PVP K-30 2. Hand Cleaners Detergent Bars PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Waterless Hand Cleaner PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 3. Hard Surface Cleaners Auto Cleaner & Polish PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Metal Cleaner PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 Solvent Degreaser PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120 3. Other Household/Institutional Products End Adhesive for Toilet Tissue

PVP K-60

Institutional Sanitizers PVP K-15, K-30, K-60, K-90 & K-120


Table 3.5i


Application Water-swellable Clay see Tables 2.19a-2.19e

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Hand Dishwashing Detergent LAPONITERD Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent (LADD) With Bleach

LAPONITE RDS VAN GEL ES & O

LADD Without Bleach BENTONE EW & LT OPTIGEL WA & SH VAN GEL ES

2. Fabric Care Liquid Bleach VAN GEL O 3. Hand Cleaners Waterless Hand Cleaner VEEGUM & VAN GEL B 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Auto Cleaner & Polish BENTONE EW

VEEGUM & VEEGUM T Basin, Tub & Tile Cleaner LAPONITE RD & RDS

BENTONE MA, HC, EW & LT GELWHITE GP & L OPTIGEL WX VEEGUM, VEEGUM, VAN GEL B, ES & O

Floor Cleaner & Polish BENTONE EW Furniture Polish BENTONE EW

VEEGUM, VEEGUM T & VAN GEL B

Glass Cleaner LAPONITE RD


Table 3.5i, continued

Application Water-swellable Clay 4. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish, continued Graffiti Cleaner BENTONE EW & LT

VEEGUM T & VAN GEL B Metal Cleaner LAPONITE RD

VEEGUM, VAN GEL B, C, & ES Mildew Remover LAPONITE RDS

VEEGUM T, VAN GEL B & O Oven & Grill Cleaner LAPONITE RD & RDS

BENTONE EW Mineral Colloid BP & MO VEEGUM T, VAN GEL B & C

Toilet Bowl Cleaner With Bleach

VEEGUM T & VAN GEL O

Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type VEEGUM & VAN GEL B 5. Other Household/Institutional Products Air Freshener Gel LAPONITE RD Carpet Shampoo LAPONITE RD Insect Repellant VEEGUM Ultra


Table 3.5j


Application Xanthan Gum see Tables 2.20b & 2.20c

1. Dish, Cutlery & Utensil Care Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent Without Bleach

KELZAN KELZAN S RHODOPOL 23, & 50MD

2. Hand Cleaners Liquid Soap KELZAN

RHODOPOL 23 Waterless Hand Cleaner KELZAN

RHODOPOL 23 3. Hard Surface Cleaner/Polish Auto Cleaner & Polish KELZAN S

RHODOPOL 23 & 50MD Basin, Tub & Tile Cleaner KELZAN S , AR & T

RHODOPOL 23, 50MD & T Metal Cleaner RHODOPOL 23 Oven & Grill Cleaner KELZAN S & D

RHODOPOL 23 & 50MD Toilet Bowl Cleaner, Acid Type KELZAN T

RHODOPOL 23

Formulary 257

PART 4

FORMULARY

Page Introduction 259 Food Formulations Baked Goods 261 Dairy Products 266 Desserts 270 Processed Foods 281 Sauces, Gravies and Glazes 286 Other Food Formulations 295 Pharmaceutical Formulations Therapeutic Creams 297 Therapeutic Gels 307 Therapeutic Lotions 319 Therapeutic Suspensions 323 Other Pharmaceutical Formulations 338 Personal Care Formulations Antiperspirants 340 Color Cosmetics 343 Dental Care 351 Hair Care 355 Skin Care 379 Shaving 403 Soaps 406 Sunscreens 411 Other Personal Care Formulations 418


Page Household/Institutional Formulations Air Fresheners 425 Dish, Cutlery and Utensil Cleaners 428 Fabric Care 435 Hard Surface Cleaners and Polishes 447 Oven and Grill Cleaners 478 Waterless Hand Cleaners 483 Other Household/Institutional Formulations 486

Formulary 259

Introduction Most suppliers of rheology modifiers have R&D personnel who are assigned the development of “starting/prototype” formulations designed to demonstrate how their products can be used in various applications and the recommended method of incorporating the rheology modifier into the formulation. This also offers another opportunity for the suppliers to “showcase” their product(s). This part of the handbook contains 231 of these starting formulations published by 18 of the suppliers. This is but the tip of the iceberg. Hundreds of other formulations are available and the user is encouraged to contact the suppliers to request starting formulations for other consumer products of interest but not included here. The formulations are arranged first by industry, i.e. Food, Pharmaceutical, Personal Care and Household/Institutional Products. and then by the type of compos ition. For example, in the Food Section, the formulations are grouped into Baked Goods, Dairy Products, Desserts, Processed Foods, Sauces and Other Foods. The name of the supplier who developed the formulation appears below the name of the formulation. The supplier’s rheology modifier(s) always appears in bold capital type as the trade name of a commercially available product of the formulation supplier. If the formulation also includes another rheology modifier that is not a product of the supplier, it also appears in bold type. The generic name common to the particular industry involved is used and the trade name in parenthesis follows. As will be apparent upon reviewing the formulations, it is a common practice to use more than one rheology modifier in a formulation. In some cases the supplier provides the industry-specific generic name for an ingredient as well as a trade name product for that ingredient. The user can find the supplier of the trade name product in the appropriate industry directory.


The number of abbreviations used in these formulations has been limited to three: “Wt.%” for Weight Percent, “ml” for milliliters and “q.s.”, (quantum sufficit) - as much as required. When a percentage appears in parenthesis following an ingredient, it refers to the concentration of the active ingredient the solution used (usually an aqueous solution). In a few formulations, the concentration of the individual ingredients in Wt.% does not total 100% for reasons unknown to the authors. These cases are noted at the bottom of the formulation. The user should discuss this issue with the supplier of the formulation. In almost all formulations, a recommended mixing procedure is presented. In those few cases where the supplier's literature did not include the mixing procedure, the user is encouraged to contact the supplier for the procedure. Some rheology modifier suppliers chose not to supply formulations for this handbook. So, if the user finds a formulation herein containing a particular type of rheology modifier, for example, xanthan gum, it is recommended that the user contact suppliers of xanthan gum to get their formulation recommendation too.

Food Formulations 261

1. Food Formulations

A. Baked Goods 1. Bakery Cream (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % GENULACTA USD-1 0.70 Modified Starch 4.00 Sugar 20.00

A Powdered Skim Milk 4.00 Salt q.s. Flavor q.s. Food Color q.s.

B Purified Water 71.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Dissolve the dry blend in the water. Pasteurize and fill.


2. Chocolate Layer Cake (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Sugar 22.60 Cake Flour 20.20 Dutch Cocoa 3.80 Dry Whole Eggs 2.50

A Powdered Non-Fat Dry Milk 2.50 Baking Powder 0.80 Salt 0.52 Baking Soda 0.23 METHOCEL K100 Food Grade 0.15 Purified Water 35.10

B Shortening 11.10 Vanilla 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Using a kitchen mixer with wire whisk attachment, dry blend the Part A ingredients thoroughly using slow speed. Add the Part B ingredients and mix using medium speed for 5 minutes. Pour the batter into a suitable size, greased baking pan and bake for 28 minutes @ 1820 C.


3. Reduced Calorie, Fat-Free Fudge Brownies (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Sugar 36.70

A Cocoa Powder, Fat-Free 7.00 EC25 Emulsifier 0.25 Corn Syrup 42DE 11.60

B Purified Water 8.10 Liquid Egg Whites 5.40

C Glycerin 4.00 Vanilla 0.25 Cake Flour 20.40 NOVAGEL BK2130 5.00

D Salt 0.80 Polargel Starch 0.25 Baking Powder 0.25

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in a bowl mixer at slow speed. Add the Part B ingredients and mix for 2-3 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until a smooth consistency is obtained. Add the Part D ingredients and mix for 3-4 minutes or until a smooth consistency is obtained. Pour into a suitable baking pan and bake for 22-30 minutes. @ 1750 C.


4. Plain Muffins (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation


A Salt 0.30 Powdered Non-Fat Dry Milk 2.10 Shortening 13.80

B Eggs 8.41

C Purified Water 28.82 Vanilla 0.30 METHOCEL F50 Food Grade 0.03

D Cake Flour 28.02 Baking Powder 1.40

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Cream the Part A ingredients. Add Part B in two stages, creaming well after each addition. Stir in the Part C ingredients and mix thoroughly. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the batter. Mix until smooth and uniform. Pour the batter into a greased muffin pan and bake for 15 minutes. @ 1960 C.


5. Whipped Topping Ink (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Glycerin 20.00

A METHOCEL K100M Food Grade 2.00 FD&C Blue No. 2 0.40


Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until smooth and uniform. Chill Part B to 7 0 C and mix with Part A for 5 minutes. Package and store at room temperature.


B. Dairy Products 6. Chocolate Milk with Stable Cocoa Suspension (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % GENULACTA LK-60 0.025

A Sugar 6.000 Cocoa 1.500

B Milk (9% Milk Solids, Non-Fat) 92.475 Total 100.000

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with Part B. Heat to pasteurization temperature and hold for the prescribed time, i.e. 30 minutes. @ 750 C for batch sterilization or 16 seconds. @. 820 C for continuous sterilization. Cool to 100 C and fill in paper cartons, plastic or glass bottles.


7. UHT Processed Chocolate Milk (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % SeaKem CM611 0.025

A Sugar 6.000 Cocoa 0.695

B Milk (2% Fat) 93.280 Total 100.000

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with cold Part B. Homogenize @ 650 C. Cool to 250 C or lower and fill aseptically. UHT process @ 143 -1490 C for 3-4 seconds.


8-10. Ice Cream Stabilizers (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulations Stabilizer Formula Ingredient 8 9 10 GENULACTA L-100 5.00 5.00 7.00 Guar Gum 45.00 Locust Bean Gum 45.00 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium 35.00 Sugar or Dextrose 50.00 50.00 58.00

Total 100.00 100.00 100.00 Mixing Procedure The ingredients are dry blended and incorporated into the ice cream formulation. The concentration of stabilizes required depends on many factors, i.e. the higher the solids content of the ice cream formulation, the lower the concentration of stabilizer required.


11. Non-Fat Process Cheese (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Standard Skim Milk Cheese 54.00-56.00

B Purified Water See Note 1 Non-Fat Dry Milk Solids 3.80 Sweet Dairy Whey Powder 3.80 Buttermilk Solids 3.00 Salt 2.10

C Disodium Phosphate Dihydrate 1.40 Sodium Citrate 0.80 NOVAGEL RCN-15 1.00 GELCARIN GP 911 0.60 SeaKem GP 418 0.30 Sorbic Acid 0.10 Lactic Acid (10% Solution) 3.00

D APO Caroteneal Solution #73 0.02 Annatto Extract 0.02

Note 1: Sufficient to achieve 58% water in the finished product Mixing Procedure Grind Part A to fine particles. Place Part A in the cooker and start heating. Add Part B and a dry blend of the Part C ingredients. Add the Part D ingredients and cook for about 3 minutes @ 750 C.


C. Desserts 12. Whipped Chocolate Dessert (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % GENULACTA SGI-3F 0.30 GENU Pectin LM-104AS 0.10 Powdered Skim Milk 3.00

A Sugar 22.00 Cocoa 4.50 Modified Starch 2.00 Whipping Agent 2.00

B Milk (5% Fat Content) 66.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with the cold milk(Part B). Preheat to 60-700 C. Homogenize and heat treat at ultra high temperature, 1400 C for 4 sec. Cool to 20-250 C and whip to a density of 0.6gms/ml. Fill into suitable containers.


13. Instant Chocolate Mousse Dry Mix Powder (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % GENUVISCO CSM-2 1.20 Whipping Agent 36.50

A Pregelatinized Starch 3.50 Powdered Sugar 47.00 Cocoa 11.80 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend all the ingredients and package. Directions for Use Disperse 85 gms. of dry mix in 250 gms. of whole milk using an electric beater at low speed. Whip at highest speed for 2-3 min., pour into serving dishes and refrigerate until served.


14. Low Calorie Whipped Chocolate Dessert (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % GENULACTA LRC-21 0.50 GENU Pectin LM-104AS 0.30 Powdered Skim Milk 4.00

A Aspartame 0.03 Cocoa 4.00 Acesulfame -K 0.05 Whipping Agent 2.00

B Skimmed Milk 89.12 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the ingredients in Part A. Thoroughly mix the dry blend with the cold Part B. Preheat to 60-700 C. Homogenize and heat treat at ultra high temperature, 1400 C for 4 seconds. Cool to 20-250 C and whip to a density of 0.6 gms/ml. Fill into suitable containers.


15. 10% Fat Whipped Topping (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 73.78

B METHOCEL F50 Food Grade 0.75

C Granulated Sugar 14.96 Sodium Alginate (Kelgin LV) 0.10

D Partially Hydrogenated Vegetable Oil 9.96 Polysorbate 60 0.30

E Sorbitan Monostearate 0.13 Polysorbate 80 0.02

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 900 C. Disperse Part B in Part A and cool while stirring to 250 C or below. Heat Parts A + B to 500 C. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to A +B. Mix until dissolved. Melt Part D and add it along with the Part E ingredients. Heat the mixture to 650 C and hold for 30 minutes. Homogenize for 10 minutes. Package and freeze. To whip the topping, thaw it and whip at high speed until the desired texture is achieved ( approx. 3 minutes).


16. Frozen Whipped Topping Mix (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 59.70 METHOCEL F50 Food Grade 0.40

B Polysorbate 60 0.30 Polysorbate 80 0.02

C Sugar 15.08 Sodium Alginate (Kelgin LV) 0.10

D Partially Hydrogenated Vegetable Oil 24.12 Sorbitan Monostearate 0.13

E Vanilla 0.10 Artificial Cream Flavor 0.05

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 820 C. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown with stirring. Continue stirring and hold at 820 C for 15 minutes. Cool while stirring in an ice water bath. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to the batch. Reheat to 490 C. Add the Part D ingredients and heat to 650 C for 10 minutes. Do not exceed 680 C! Homogenize for 10 minutes. Add the Part E ingredients and mix for 2 min. Pour into jars and freeze at -180 C. To prepare the topping, thaw the mix and whip it in a high speed mixer to the desired texture.


17. Non-Dairy Whipped Topping (30% Fat) (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation


B METHOCEL F50 Food Grade 0.15 METHOCEL K15M Food Grade 0.15

C Granulated Sugar 19.24 Sodium Alginate 0.05 Polysorbate 60 0.30

D Polysorbate 80 0.02 Sorbitan Monostearate 0.15

E Partially Hydrogenated Vegetable Oil 29.98 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 900 C. Add the Part B ingredients with stirring. Cool while stirring to 250 C or below. Reheat to 500 C. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to the batch. While mixing, add the Part D ingredients in the order shown. Melt Part E and add it to the batch with stirring. Heat to 650 C an hold for 30 minutes. Homogenize for 10 minutes. Package and freeze at -180 C. To prepare the topping, thaw the mix and whip it in a high speed mixer to the desired texture.


18. Ready-to Eat Water Gel Dessert (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation


A Tripotassium Citrate 0.15 GELCARIN DG 0.68

B Purified Water 85.57

C Food Color q.s. Flavor q.s.

D Adipic Acid 0.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Disperse Part A in Part B with agitation. Add the Part C ingredients and heat the dispersion to 850 C. Add Part D and start packaging within 5 minutes. (Solution can be held @ 850 C for up to 30 minutes in order to complete the packaging process. There will be minimal loss of gel strength).


19. Whipped Topping - Non-Dairy (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 60.00 AVICEL CL-611 0.40-0.60

B GELCARIN GP-359 0.01-0.05 Sucrose 7.00

C Sodium Caseinate 2.50

D Corn Syrup 5.00 Hydrogenated Vegetable Fat 24.00

E Polysorbate 60 (Tween 60) 0.30 Myverol 18 0.12 Total see note 1

Note 1: The amounts in this column do not total 100% but they are the exact values presented in the supplier’s literature. Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients with rapid agitation. Dry blend the Part B ingredients and disperse them in Part A with continuous agitation. Add Part C and heat the batch to 630 C. Add Part D. Separately heat and mix the Part E ingredients and add them to the batch with continuous agitation. Pasteurize at 71-770 C for 30 minutes. Homogenize and cool to 2-50 C. Age for 24 hours.


20. Whipped Topping - Dairy Type (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 59.00 AVICEL CL-611 0.40-0.60

B GELCARIN GP-359 0.01-0.05 Sucrose 6.00

C Non-Fat Milk Solids 5.00

D Corn Syrup 6.00

E Polysorbate 60 (Tween 60) 0.30 Myverol 18 0.15

F Milk Fat ( Cream) 20.00 Total see note 1

Note 1: The amounts in this column do not total 100% but they are the exact values presented in the supplier’s literature. Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients with rapid agitation. Dry blend the Part B ingredients and disperse them in Part A with continuous agitation. Add Part C and heat the batch to 630 C. Add Part D. Separately heat and mix the Part E ingredients and add them to the batch with continuous agitation. Add Part F with agitation. Pasteurize at 71-770 C for 30 minutes. Homogenize and cool to 2-50 C. Age for 24 hours.


21. Drinkable Dessert Gel (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % High Fructose Corn Syrup or Sucrose 15.30

A GELCARIN DG 425B 0.40 Sodium Citrate 0.15 Color 0.48 Flavor 0.24


C Adipic Acid 0.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Add Part A to Part B with agitation and heat to 850 C. Hold at that temperature for 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix for 1 minute. Pour into containers and cool to room temperature.


22. Custard-Type Dry Mix (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Grams/Pkg. SeaGel FL644L 1.24 Sugar 55.00

A Non-Fat Milk Solids 50.00 Spray-Dried Emulsified Fat 10.00 Cocoa 7.00 Salt 0.30 Sodium Hexametaphosphate 0.50 Total 124.04

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients thoroughly. To prepare the custard, add 124.04 gms. of the dry blend to 475 ml. water with stirring. Cook over medium heat for about 5 minutes. Pour into glasses or molds and allow to cool and set.


D. Processed Foods 23. Chicken Frankfurters (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredie nt Wt. % A Chicken MDM 40.00 Sodium Tripolyphosphate 0.30

B Nitrite Salt (0.6% NaNO2) 1.80 Water/Ice 18.00 GENUGEL ME-83 0.40

C Soy Protein (Danpro-S) 2.00 Spices 0.40

D Water/Ice 17.00

E Potato Starch 2.00 Sodium Ascorbate 0.05

F Chicken Skin with Fat 18.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Transfer the chicken to a bowl chopper. While chopping, add the ingredients in Part B. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add to Parts A + B while chopping. Add Parts D, E and F to the mix while chopping. Continue chopping until the desired consistency is achieved. Fill the mince into sterile casings. Cook @ 900 C until a center temperature of 750 C is reached in the sausage. Chill with a cold water spray for 30 minutes. If smoking is to be used; before cooking, dry for 15 minutes @ 550 C and smoke at 600 C and 60% R.H. for 15 minutes.


24. Chicken Bologna (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Pork Fat 8.50

A Beef Fat 8.50 Caseinate 1.00

B Boiling Water 8.50 Salt 1.40

C Chicken MDM 50.00 Sodium Tripolyphosphate 0.50 GENUGEL ME-83 0.70 Powdered Skin Milk 1.00 Dextrose 1.40 Soy Protein (Danpro-S) 0.70

D Potato Starch 1.50 Mustard 1.40 Dried Onion 0.70 Garlic Powder 0.10 Smoke Flavor 0.40 Sodium Ascorbate 0.05

E Water/Ice 13.65 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the pork and beef fat and mince through a 33 mm cutting plate. Transfer to a bowl chopper and add the caseinate at low speed. Increase the speed of the chopper. Add the boiling water and the salt after 2 minutes. Continue mixing until the emulsion is firm and homogeneous. Cool and store cold until the next day. Transfer the chicken to the bowl chopper and add the other Part C ingredient at low speed. (continued next page)


24. Chicken Bologna, continued Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the bowl chopper. Add Part E in two steps. Add the Part A + B emulsion and continue mixing and chopping until the desired consistency is achieved. Fill into sterile casings. Cook @ 750 C until a center temperature of 720 C is reached. Chill with a cold water spray until center temperature is below 300 C

25. Chicken Breast Roll (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 30.13 Sodium Tripolyphosphate 0.40

B Salt 1.60 GENUGEL CHP-2 or ME-38 0.33

C Dextrose 0.74 Chicken Flavor 0.13

D Chicken Breast Meat 66.67 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until the phosphate is dissolved. Dissolve Part B in Part A. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add to Parts A + B. Increase the surface area of Part D using a roller-tenderizer. Transfer Parts A - D to a vacuum tumbler and evacuate air until a 90% vacuum is achieved. Massage at 14 rpm for 30 minutes then at 8 rpm for 60 minutes. Stuff the drained meat into artificial casings or laminate bags (cook-in-bag). Heat the product at 750 C until the internal temperature reaches 720 C. Cool the product using direct water spray and store at 50 C.


26. Low Fat Bologna (Copenhagen Pectin A/S, A Division of Hercules, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Mechanically Deboned Meat 50.00 Sodium Tripolyphosphate 0.30 GENUGEL ME-83 0.70 Salt 2.00

B Dextrose 0.70 Powdered Skim Milk 0.50 Soy Protein (Danpro-S) or Pork Protein

(Drinde) 1.00

Gluten Protein 1.00

C Water/Ice 41.70 Spices 0.50

D Pepper 0.10 Potato Starch 1.50

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Add the Part A ingredients to a bowl chopper and mix thoroughly. Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add to Part A along with half of Part C. Continue mixing and add the remainder of Part C. Dry blend and add the Part D ingredients and continue mixing until the desired consistency is achieved. Transfer the mix to a filling machine and fill into suitable casings. Cook at 750 C until the internal temperature reaches 720 C. Cool the product using direct water spray to 300 C and store at 50 C or less.


27. Soy Patties - Cold Process (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water (at 2-50 C) 10.73 Texturized Soy Protein Concentrate 20.74 Wheat Gluten 4.74

B Functional Soy Protein Concentrate 3.12 METHOCEL A40M 0.75 Purified Water (at 2-50 C) 50.00 Dried Molasses 1.62 Salt 0.75 Autolyzed Yeast 0.75 Minces Onion 0.56

C Garlic Powder 0.56 Grill Flavor 0.56 Mace 0.04 Coriander 0.04 Ground Black Pepper 0.04

D Vegetable Oil 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in a bowl type mixer at low speed for 5 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients and mix at low speed for 10 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients and mix 3 min. Add Part D and mix 2 minutes. Chill, if necessary to 50 C or lower. Form into patties, parcook, freeze and package.


E. Sauces, Gravies and Glazes 28. Low-Fat Cheese Sauce (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Cheese Powder (SHARP-EE) 11.00 Non-Fat Dry Milk Powder 9.00 Starch (Thin ‘n Thik) 1.70

A METHOCEL A4C Food Grade 0.30 Mustard Powder 0.10 Garlic Powder 0.10 Onion Powder 0.10 White Pepper 0.10 Paprika 0.10

B Purified Water 77.50 Total

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly dry blend the Part A ingredients. Mix Part A with Part B using a wire whisk. Cook over medium heat for 5 minutes. Allow the sauce to cool for 30 minutes.


29. Newberg Sauce (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 87.25-88.65*

B AVICEL RC-591F 0.30-0.70

C Xanthan Gum 0.05

D Starch 1.00-2.00 Corn Oil 3.68 Non-Fat Dry Milk 3.09 Hydrolyzed Plant Protein 0.78 Monosodium Glutamate 0.66 Sugar 0.55

E Salt 0.50 Tetrasodium Pyrophosphate 0.27 Onion Powder 0.27 Polysorbate 60 0.10 Oleoresin Paprika 0.05 Pepper, Fine Ground 0.02 Celery Powder 0.02 Sherry Flavor 0.01

Total 100.00 * After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix using rapid agitation for 7 minutes. Slurry Part D in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part E ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill.

(continued next page)


29. Newberg Sauce, continued Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package. 30. White Sauce (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 83.46-84.86* B AVICEL RC-591F 0.30-0.70

C Starch 1.00-2.00 Corn Oil 3.77 Non-Fat Dry Milk 7.34 Hydrolyzed Plant Protein 0.81 Monosodium Glutamate 0.67 D Salt 0.55 Tetrasodium Pyrophosphate 0.28 Onion Flavor 0.28 Polysorbate 60 0.10 Celery (Ground) 0.03 Turmeric 0.01

Total 100.00 * After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Slurry Part C in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part D ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill. Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package.


31. Barbecue Sauce (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation


B AVICEL RC-591F 0.33-0.66

C Starch 1.00-2.00 Tomato Paste 37.95 Vinegar (50 grain distilled) 12.66 Lemon Juice 8.07

D Brown Sugar 5.65 Salt 2.42 Onion Powder 0.80 Paprika 0.30 Total 100.00

* After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Slurry Part C in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part D ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill. Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package.


32. Barbecue Sauce A (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 37.04 Tomato Paste 24.52 Brown Sugar 15.61 Cider Vinegar 12.72

A Oil 4.23 Salt 2.38 METHOCEL A15 Food Grade 1.36 Spices 1.07 Hickory Flavor 0.56 Starch (Instant Clearjel) 0.47 Xanthan Gum 0.04 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended mixing procedures.


33. Barbecue Sauce B (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 27.95 Tomato Paste 25.07 Brown Sugar 7.34 Cider Vinegar 19.72 Soy Sauce 4.48 Oil 1.79 Salt 1.79 METHOCEL A15 Food Grade 1.36 Spices 1.21 Hickory Flavor 1.79 Modified Starch (Thermflo) 0.18 White Sugar 7.34 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended mixing procedures.


34. Brown Gravy (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation


B AVICEL RC-591F 0.30-0.70

C Xanthan Gum 0.50

D Starch 1.00-2.00 Malto-Dextrin 4.00 Hydrolyzed Plant Protein 3.25 Hydrolyzed Plant Protein 2.20

E Non-Fat Dry Milk 1.75 Salt 1.50 Toasted Onion Powder 0.60 Caramel Color 0.25 White Pepper 0.02 Total 100.00

* After amounts of AVICEL and Starch have been decided upon, adjust the water content so the ingredients total 100.00% Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in 90% of Part A using rapid agitation. Mix 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix using rapid agitation for 7 minutes. Slurry Part D in the remaining water and add it to the batch. Blend in the Part E ingredients. Homogenize or pass through a colloid mill. Heat the batch to 820 C and hold at that temperature until the starch thickens. Package.


35. Fish Glaze (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Dextrose 10.00 Malto-Dextrin (M040) 8.16 Seafood Flavor 4.70 Starch (Tender Jel 480) 2.70 Salt 1.36

A METHOCEL K100M Food Grade 1.36 Orange Powder 0.85 Paprika 0.68 Garlic Powder 0.68 Parsley Powder 0.27 Dried Green Onions 0.20 Black Pepper, Ground 0.20


Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Add Part A to Part B with high speed mixing. Continue mixing for 15 minutes. After mixing, allow the glaze to stand for 10 minutes before use.


36. Liquid Lemon Butter Glaze (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Dextrose 2.04

Malto-Dextrin (M100) 13.59 Butter Flavor 2.10 Modified Starch 1.74 Salt 2.40 METHOCEL K100M Food Grade 1.80

A Lemon Powder 1.20 Dill Weed 0.15 Garlic Powder 1.02 Onion Powder 0.27 Black Pepper, Ground 0.18 Wheat Flour 1.77 Color q.s.

B Vegetable Oil 1.74

C Purified Water 70.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients. Add Part B to Part A and mix thoroughly. Add Parts A + B to Part C in a bowl-type mixer with high speed mixing. Continue mixing for 5 minutes. After mixing, allow the glaze to stand until the METHOCEL is fully hydrated.


F. Other Foods 37. Cream of Chicken Soup (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 49.69

A Whole Milk 26.11 Modified Starch (Consista) 2.53 Vegetable Oil 2.11 Chicken Bouillon 1.81

B Margarine 1.47 Salt 0.21 Pepper (Ground) 0.08 METHOCEL A4C Food Grade 0.20

C Chicken Meat (Cooked and Cubed) 15.79 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Blend the Part A ingredients in a pan on low heat for 2 minutes. Mix the Part B ingredients together and add them to Part A. Mix for 2.5 minutes. Add Part C and heat to boiling, stirring constantly. Simmer for 10 minutes. Chill overnight and reheat to serving temperature.


38. Italian Dressing (FMC Corporation, Food Ingredients Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Vegetable Oil 47.22

A White Vinegar (5% Acidity) 25.87 Purified Water 25.87

B VISCARIN SD 339 0.52 Spices, Seasoning (Seasoning Mix

#9849-A-36) 0.52

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients until thoroughly mixed. Add the Part B ingredients and mix until the dressing thickens.

Pharmaceutical Formulations

297

2. Pharmaceutical Formulations

A. Therapeutic Creams 1. Antibiotic Cream I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 1382 2.00

C Polymyxin B Sulfate 10.00 Mineral Oil 15.00

D Sorbitan Oleate 0.50 Methylparaben 0.10 Propylparaben 0.01

E Tromethamine 0.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm, add Part C to Parts A + B and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. with rapid agitation. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.


298

2. Antibiotic Cream II (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 1382 2.00

C Neomycin Sulfate 0.50 Polymyxin B Sulfate 0.07 Mineral Oil 15.00 Sorbitan Oleate 0.50

D Methylparaben 0.10 Propylparaben 0.01 Glycerol 10.00

E Tromethamine 1.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm, add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch with rapid agitation. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.


299

3. Analgesic Cream (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A PEMULEN TR-1 NF 0.30 CARBOPOL 940 NF 0.05

B Camphor 5.00 Methyl Salicylate 18.00

C Menthol 5.00 Eucalyptus Oil 2.50

D Cetyl Alcohol 10.00 Propylene Glycol 5.00

E Methylparaben 0.12 Propylparaben 0.01

F Sodium Hydroxide q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Blend the dry ingredients in Part A and slowly sift them into the water while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add Part B to Part A while mixing. Combine the Part C ingredients. Melt Part D at 500 C and combine the Part D ingredients. Mix Parts C, D and E. Heat Parts A + B to 500 C Add the mixture of Parts C, D and E to the batch. with good agitation. Neutralize with Part F and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.


300

4. 10% TEA Salicylate Cream (International Specialty Products) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Glyceryl Stearate 5.00 Cetyl Alcohol 2.50 Cetyl Phosphate (and) DEA Cetyl Phosphate 3.00

A Stearyl Stearoyl Stearate 4.00 Coco-Caprylate/Caprate 4.00 Cetyl Palmitate 4.00 Dimethicone 0.50


C Magnesium Aluminum Silicate 0.55 Xanthan Gum 0.25

D Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00

Purified Water 10.00

E Trolamine Salicylate (TEA Salicylate) 10.00 Propylene Glycol 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part B to 850C. Dry blend the Part C ingredients and add them to Part B with rapid agitation. Continue mixing at 850C until smooth and uniform. Add the Part A ingredients to Parts B+C at 850C. Continue mixing and cool to 600C. Add Parts D and E in that order and continue mixing while cooling to 350C.


301

5. Burn/Bite Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM 1.50

C Propylene Glycol 3.00 Dimethicone 0.20 Mineral Oil 10.00 Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol 17.00 Menthol USP 1.00

D Benzocaine USP 5.00 C18-36 Acid 3.00 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 12.00 Polysorbate 60 0.50 Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A with rapid agitation. Continue mixing until the dispersion is smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and mix while heating to 75-800C. Separately mix and heat the Part D ingredients, keeping the Benzocaine suspended, to 75-800C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing and begin cooling. Package at 400C.


302

6. Anti-Inflammatory Cream (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 1382 0.70 Mineral Oil 15.00 Sorbitan Oleate 0.50

C Methylparaben 0.10 Propylparaben 0.01 Betamethasone Dipropionate 0.05

D Tromethamine q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part C ingredients and add the mixture to the batch with rapid agitation. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.


303

7. Calamine Cream I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 32.00 B CARBOPOL 1382 1.50 C Diazolidinyl Urea 0.50 Propylene Glycol 15.00 Ethanol 15.00

D Lidocaine 1.00 Camphor 6.30 Mineral Oil 15.00

E Sorbitan Oleate 0.50 Calamine 8.00 F Cetyl Alcohol 5.00 G Fragrance 0.20 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B with good mixing. Separately combine the Part D ingredients, add them to the batch and continue mixing for about 20 minutes. Separately combine the Part E ingredients. Melt Part F at 500C and add it to the Part E mixture. Add Parts E + F to the batch with good mixing. Add Part G and mix well. Author’s note; The supplier of this formula appears to have omitted the Neutralizing Agent that is normally required for CARBOPOL Resins.


304

8. Calamine Cream II (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 65.30 Glycerin 10.00

B Methylparaben 0.18 Propylparaben 0.02

C AVICEL RC-591 2.00

D Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 10.00 Cetyl Alcohol 2.50

E Zinc Oxide 5.00 Calamine 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients together and heat to 750C. Add the Part B ingredients and mix until dissolved. Maintain the batch temperature @ 750C. Gradually add Part C to Parts A + B while mixing for 15 minutes or until Part C is homogeneously dispersed. Remove the heat and add the Part D ingredients with good mixing. Gradually add the Part E ingredients and continue mixing until uniformly dispersed. Adequate dispersion of the Part E ingredients was achieved with a propeller mixer. If the dispersion is not deemed adequate, an homogenizer or colloid mill may be used to improve it.


305

9. Benzoyl Peroxide Acne Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A VEEGUM HV 2.00


C Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 1.50 Ethyl Alcohol (SDA40) 30.00

D Propylene Glycol 6.00 Laureth-4 5.00

E Benzoyl Peroxide, 70% Paste 7.15 Purified Water 10.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part A to Part B with good agitation and mix the dispersion continually until smooth and uniform. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until a uniform slurry is achieved. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until the batch is smooth and uniform. Mix the Part E ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Pass the resulting cream through a 3-roll mill several times to reduce the benzoyl peroxide particle size to a point where any grittiness is eliminated.


306

10. Athlete’s Foot Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM 0.75 Sorbitol, 70% 10.00

C Polysorbate 80 1.00 Zinc Undecylenate 20.00 Caprylic Acid 5.00 C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate 3.00

D Sorbitan Oleate 1.50 C18-36 Acid 2.00 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 8.00

E Preservative q.s. 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A with rapid agitation. Continue mixing until the dispersion is smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform while heating to 70-750C. Separately mix and heat the Part D ingredients. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing and begin cooling. At 400C, add Part E


307

B. Therapeutic Gels

11. Benzoyl Peroxide + Alpha-Bisabolol Gel (BASF Aktiengesellshaft) Formulation


B Carbomer 940 1.00 Alpha-Bisabolol (BASF) 0.20 Propylene Glycol NF 6.00

C Triethanolamine 1.00 PEG-40 Hydrogenated Castor Oil

(Cremophor RH-40) 3.00

KOLLIDON 30 3.00 Purified Water 40.80

D Benzoyl Peroxide 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A with good mixing and stir for 1 hour. Separate mix the Part C ingredients until the solution is uniform. Add Parts A + B to Part C with good mixing. Add Part D and mix until uniform.


308

12. Surgical Lubricant Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 980 NF 1.00

C Chlorhexidine Digluconate (20%) 1.50

D Tromethamine 2.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add Part C and mix 30 minutes. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.


309

13. Anti-Inflammatory Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Che micals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 934P NF 2.00

C Ketoprofen 2.00


Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add Part C and mix. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.


310

14. Analgesic Gel (American Distilling & Manufacturing, Inc.) Formulation


B Sodium Magnesium Silicate 2.50 Ethyl Alcohol (SD39C) 25.00 Isopropyl Myristate 5.00

C Menthol 6.00 Camphor 3.25 Distilled Witch Hazel Extract (14% Alcohol) 24.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with high shear. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix until smooth and uniform.


311

15. Antiseptic Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Povidone-Iodine 2.00


Mixing Procedure Add Part C to Part A and mix for 30-45 minutes. Slowly sift in Part B and mix for 30-45 minutes. Neutralize with Part D.


312

16. Keratolytic Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Ethanol 44.00 Salicylic Acid 2.00

D Ethomeen q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients together until the acid dissolves. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.


313

17. Antipruritic Gel I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride Disodium EDTA 0.05

D NaOH (18% Solution) 1.25 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in order to Parts A + B and mix. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.


314

18. Antipruritic Gel II (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride 1.00 Disodium EDTA 0.05 Ethanol 30.00

D Camphor 0.50 Methylparaben 0.10 Propylparaben 0.01

E Trolamine 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, to Parts A + B and mix. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until the solids dissolve. Add Part D to the batch and mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes until the batch is smooth and uniform.


315

19. Icy Blue Camphorated Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A Disodium EDTA 0.10 CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 0.90 Isopropyl Alcohol 10.00 Camphor 0.20

B Polysorbate 20 1.00 Methylparaben 0.20 FD&C Blue No. 1 (5% Solution) 0.04 Triethanolamine (99%) 1.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dissolve the Disodium EDTA in the Part A water heated to 25-450C. Slowly sift in the CARBOPOL resin. After the resin is thoroughly wetted, mix at slow speed. Separately combine the Part B ingredients and add the mixture to Part A with a moderate sweeping agitation until a clear gel is formed.


316

20. Conductive Skin Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A CARBOPOL ETD 2001 0.75 Potassium Hydroxide (20% Solution) 0.05 Propylene Glycol 10.00 Purified Water 10.00

B Disodium EDTA 0.05 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium

(2.00% Solution of CMC 9M31F PH) 10.00

Potassium Hydroxide (20% Solution) 0.75

C Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and)Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Sift the CARBOPOL resin into the Part A water while mixing at about 500-800 rpm. Add the remaining Part A ingredients and mix until uniform. Prepare a 2.00% aqueous solution of CMC and add it to the Part B water. Add to this the remaining Part B ingredients. Add Part B to Part A and mix until a smooth, clear gel is formed. Add Part C and mix until uniform.


317

21. Vaginal Moisturizer (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A CARBOPOL 971P NF 0.50 NOVEON AA-1 USP 0.50

B Glycerin 50.00 Sorbic Acid 0.50

C Trolamine 0.65 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part B ingredients. Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part C and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm. until the batch is smooth and uniform.


318

22. Vegetable Slimming Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 76.95 CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 1.00 Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and)Ethyl

paraben(and)Propylparaben(and)Butylparaben 0.50

B Nettle Extract 2.00 Calendula Extract 3.00 Witch Hazel Extract 2.00 Ethanol 5.00

C PEG-4- Hydrogenated Castor Oil 0.40 Fragrance 0.05

D Propylene Glycol 6.10 Dimethicone Copolyol Wax 1.0

E Sodium Hydroxide (18% Solution) 2.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the CARBOPOL resin in the Part A water heated to 25-450C. After the resin is wetted, mix slowly at low speed. Add the Part B ingredients with slow mixing. Separately mix the Part C and the Part D ingredients and add them, in order, to the batch. Neutralize with Part E and mix until a uniform gel forms.


319

C. Therapeutic Lotions 23. Calamine Lotion (Southern Clay Products, Inc.) Formulation


B GELWHITE H NF 2.00

C Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7LF)

0.20

D Glycerin 2.50

E Calamine 8.00 Zinc Oxide 8.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B slowly to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Add Part C and mix at moderate speed until well mixed. Add Part D and mix at medium speed. Slowly add the Part E ingredients with moderate agitation and mix until smooth and uniform.


320

24. Poison Ivy Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM 1.50 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (Medium

Viscosity) 0.30

C Zirconium Oxide 4.00 Propylene Glycol 5.00 Isopropyl Alcohol 8.00

D Benzocaine 1.50 Menthol 0.05 Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B with rapid mixing. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B + C with rapid mixing.


321

25. 5% Benzoyl Peroxide Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM 0.90 Xanthan Gum 0.40

C Propylene Glycol 6.00 Benzoyl Peroxide (70% Paste) 7.15

D Laureth-4 5.00 Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear until smooth and uniform. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and pass the mixture through a mill until smooth and uniform. Combine Part C with the Part D ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Continue mixing until the batch is smooth and uniform.


322

26. Tea Tree Oil Acne Lotion (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A Disodium EDTA 0.05 Glycerin 1.00 Propylene Glycol 2.00 PEMULEN TR-1 NF 0.25 CARBOPOL 974P NF 0.30

B Tea Tree Oil (Pharmaceutical Grade) 4.00 Mineral Oil 3.50 PPG-20 Methyl Glucose Ether 1.50

C Triethanolamine (99%) 0.50

D Fragrance 0.80 Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl

Urea(and)Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben 0.80

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while agitating @ 1000 rpm. Mix for 10-15 minutes. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until homogeneous.


323

D. Therapeutic Suspensions 27. Ibuprofen Suspension (BASF Aktiengesellshaft) Formulation

Ingredient Grams A Ibuprofen 4.00 Crosspovidone (KOLLIDON CL-M) 8.00 Purified Water 40.00

B KOLLIDON 90F 2.00 Sucrose 25.00 Sodium Citrate 2.00

C Purified Water to 100 ml Mixing Procedure Mix the Part B ingredients until the solids are dissolved. Disperse the Part A ingredients in Part B in the order shown. Add Part C and mix until uniform.


324

28. Magaldrate Suspension (BASF Aktiengesellshaft) Formulation

Ingredient Grams A Purified Water to 100 ml Magaldrate USP 10.00 Crosspovidone (KOLLIDON CL-M) 8.00 KOLLIDON 90F 2.00

B Orange Flavor 1.00 Coconut Flavor 0.05 Banana Flavor 0.08 Saccharin Sodium 0.02 Preservative q.s.

Mixing Procedure Dissolve or disperse all of the Part B ingredients in Part A under aseptic conditions.


325

29. Antibiotic Suspension (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Ampicillin Trihydrate 5.77 AVICEL CL-611 2.25

B Xanthan Gum 0.20 Sucrose 17.50 Potassium Sorbate 0.10

C Sodium Citrate 0.91 Citric Acid 0.09

D Sucrose 17.50 FD&C Red #40 0.01

E Purified Water 55.67 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Screen Part A through a #50 U.S. Standard sieve. Place Parts A in a V-shaped blender. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and blend 3 minutes after each addition. Blend the Part C ingredients and then mill using a Wiley mill. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and Part C and add them to the V blender. Mix 9 minutes. Mix the Blend of Parts A, B, C & D with Part E to produce a uniform suspension.


326

30. Antacid Suspension I (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 934P NF 0.20 Glycerin 30.00

C Sorbitol 30.00 Magaldrate 10.80 Simethicone 0.80 Sorbitan Oleate 0.50

D Sodium Citrate 1.00 Peppermint Oil 0.03 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm) Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix together the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch and mix for 15-20 minutes or until the batch is smooth and uniform. Author’s note; The supplier of this formula appears to have omitted the Neutralizing Agent that is normally required for CARBOPOL Resins.


327

31. Antacid Suspension II (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Deionized Water 56.49

A Methylparaben 0.10 Propylparaben 0.01

B AVICEL RC-591 NF 0.90

C Xanthan Gum 0.10 Sorbitol (70%) 5.00

D Aluminum Hydroxide Compressed Gel 24.46 Magnesium Hydroxide Paste 12.94 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until the solids dissolve. Slowly add Part B while mixing. Mix until Part B is fully dispersed. Add Part C while mixing. Mix until fully dissolved. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one.


328

32. Alumina + Magnesia Antacid (Monsanto-Kelco Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 48.40 Sorbitol (70%) 15.00

B KELTROL 0.15 Saccharin Sodium 0.20

C Potassium Citrate 0.10 Methylparaben 0.15

D Aluminum Hydroxide Gel 25.00 Magnesium Hydroxide 11.00

E Flavor q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 2 minutes and add Part B. Mix for 5 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B and mix for 5 minutes. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each for 2 minutes before adding the next one. Add Part E and mix 10 minutes.


329

33. Antacid Suspension III (R. T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM HS 0.50 Xanthan Gum 0.20 Sorbitol (70%) 20.00

C Aluminum Hydroxide Gel 36.00 Magnesium Hydroxide 3.20

D Preservative q.s. Flavor q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part D ingredients. Mix until smooth and uniform.


330

34. Kaolin- Pectin Suspension I (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B GELWHITE GP 1.00 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium

(CMC 7MF) 0.20

C Kaolin USP 20.12 Pectin 1.00

D Saccharin Sodium 0.08 Glycerin 2.00

E Flavor q.s. Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend Part B and slowly add it to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part C and mix until smooth and uniform. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part E ingredients and mix until smooth and uniform.


331

35. Kaolin- Pectin Suspension II (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation


B AVICEL RC-591 NF 0.90

C Xanthan Gum 0.10

D Kaolin USP 0.40 Pectin USP 0.40

E Kaolin USP 18.60

F Glycerin 2.00

G Purified Water 4.65 Sodium Benzoate 0.05 Potassium Sorbate 0.05 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A and mix until Part B is fully dispersed. Slowly add Part C and mix until Part C is fully dissolved. Heat the batch to 70-80 0C. Dry blend the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until the pectin is fully dissolved. Remove the heat and add Part E and F in that order, mixing each until uniform. Separately mix the Part G ingredients until the solids dissolve and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform.


332

36. Antidiarrheal Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 934P NF 0.30 Sorbitol 20.00

C Kaolin 20.00 Pectin 0.50 Ethanol 3.80

D Atrophine Sulfate <0.01 Citric Acid 1.00 Methylparaben 0.20

E Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 3.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix together the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm and the batch is smooth and uniform.


333

37. Antidiarrheal Oral Suspension R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. Formulation


B VEEGUM K 1.20 Xanthan Gum 0.40 Bismuth Subsalicylate, Powder 1.75 Methylparaben 0.20

C Propylparaben 0.10 Saccharin Sodium 0.10 Salicylic Acid 1.75 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and slowly add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniformly dispersed or dissolved.


334

38. Antiflatulent Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 971 NF 0.20 Glycerin 20.00

C Propylene Glycol 20.00 Simethicone 0.80

D Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.06 Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix together the Part C ingredients. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.


335

39. Calamine and Zinc Oxide Astringent Suspension (FMC Corp., Pharmaceutical Division) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 80.99

B AVICEL RC-591 0.80

C Methylparaben NF 0.10 Propylparaben NF 0.01

D Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MF)

0.10

E Glycerin USP 2.00

F Calamine USP 8.00

G Zinc Oxide USP 8.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A and mix until Part B is fully dispersed. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until dissolved. Add Part D and mix until dissolved. Slowly add Parts E, F and G in the order shown, mixing each until fully dispersed before adding the next one. Pass the batch through a colloid mill with 0.01 inch clearance for 5 minutes.


336

40. Anesthetic Tooth Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Benzocaine 20.00

D Trolamine 4.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Slowly add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.


337

41. Analgesic Oral Suspension (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 974P NF 0.30 Sorbitol 15.00 Glycerin 0.20

C Acetaminophen 3.00 Ethanol 5.00 Polysorbate 80 0.05 Saccharin Sodium 0.01

D FD&C Blue #2 q.s. Peppermint Oil q.s.

E Sodium Hydroxide (18%) q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the color in Part D to a small amount of water and add it to the batch followed by the flavor. Mix until uniform. Neutralize with Part E and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.


338

E. Other Pharmaceutical Formulations

42. Antipruritic Spray (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water

B CARBOPOL 941 NF 0.50 Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride 2.00

C Ethanol 60.00 Glycerin 10.00

D Aminomethyl Propanol 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800-1500rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B, in the order shown, with good mixing. Neutralize with Part D and continue mixing for 15-20 minutes @ 1000 rpm until the batch is smooth and uniform.


339

43. Antimicrobial Liquid Hand Soap (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL ETD 2020 0.15 Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (30%) 20.00

C Cocamidopropyl Betaine (Incronam 30) 3.50 Cocamide DEA (Standamid KD) 2.00 Sodium Lauroyl Sarcosinate

(Hamposyl L-30) 5.00

D 1,2 Propanediol 0.50 Triclosan 0.50

E Perfume 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 50-600C. Slowly sift Part B into Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer that produces a good vortex (800 rpm). Increase the speed as the viscosity increases to maintain the vortex. Slow the speed to 400-600 rpm and continue mixing for 30 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B, in the order shown, with moderate agitation. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Cool to 30-400C and mix for 2 hours. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous.


3. Personal Care Formulations

A. Antiperspirants

1. Suspension Roll-On (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % BENTONE GEL VS-5 15.00

A Cyclomethicone (DC 344) 44.95 Cyclomethicone (DC 245) 17.50 Dimethicone (DC 200, 50 cstk.) 2.50

B Aluminum Zirconium Tetrachlorohydrex GLY (Reach AZP 908)

20.00

C Fragrance 0.05 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly mix the Part A ingredients using high shear mixing, i.e., a homogenizer. Transfer the batch to a paddle stirrer and slowly add Part B. Mix until uniform. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous.

Personal Care Formulations 341

2. Roll-On Antiperspirant (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 26.00 GELWHITE GP 2.00 Isopropyl Myristate 15.00 PPG-15 Stearyl Ether (ArlamolE) 5.00

B Sorbitan Oleate 2.00 Polysorbate 80 2.00 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 3.00 Mineral Oil(and)Lanolin Alcohol 5.00

C Aluminum Chlorohydrate (50%) 40.00

D Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth. Heat Part A to 65-700C. Combine the Part B ingredients and heat them to 65-700C. Add Part B to Part A slowly and mix until uniform. Add Part C to Parts A + B with slow speed mixing. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add Part D and mix until uniform.


3. Roll-On Antiperspirant Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 49.60 VEEGUM HV 1.00

B Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose 0.40 Ethanol SD40 8.00

C PPG-15 Stearyl Ether (ArlamolE) 1.00 Cyclomethicone 3.00 Oleth-10 1.00

D Aluminum Chlorohydrate (50%) 36.00

E Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part B slowly and mix until dissolved. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Add Parts D and E in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.


B. Color Cosmetics 4. Creamy Blusher (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Stearic Acid 3.00 Propylene Glycol Stearate SE (Lexemul P) 2.00 Glyceryl Stearate (Lexemul 515) 1.50 Candellia Wax 1.00

A Ozakorite 1.00 Beeswax 1.00 Dimethicone (DC 200) 0.50 Mineral Oil 6.00 Myristyl Myristate 2.00 Propylparaben 0.10 Deionized Water 63.35

B Titanium Dioxide 5.00 Yellow Iron Oxide 2.00 Red Iron Oxide 1.50 Deionized Water 2.00

C Triethanolamine 1.50 Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene100) 0.10 Simethicone (Antifoam AF) 0.05

(Formulation continued on the following page)


4. Creamy Blusher, continued

Ingredient Wt. % Propylene Glycol 5.00 METHOCEL40-202 0.20

D Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum) 0.50 Phenoxyethanol 0.50 Methylparaben 0.20 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Weigh the Part A ingredients into a suitable vessel equipped with a mixer. Heat the mixture to 820C and mix until uniform. Separately add the Part B powders to the water and grind until uniformly dispersed. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until smooth and uniform. Add Part D to Part B and mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients to the batch and mix while heating the water phase to 800C. Add the heated Part A to heated Parts B + C + D and mix until a homogeneous emulsion is formed.


5. Water-Resistant Sport Tint (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM Ultra 1.60 Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel) 0.40

C Propylene Glycol 5.00 Iron Oxides 0.67

D Manganese Violet 0.10 Talc 4.27 Titanium Dioxide 6.96 Isocetyl Alcohol 3.00

E Octyl Methoxycinnamate 3.00 Mineral Oil(and)Lanolin Alcohol (Ritacol) 2.00 Oleth-3-Phosphate (Crodafos N-3 Neutral) 2.20

F Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-90) 1.40 Preservative, Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with a propeller stirrer at 1700 rpm. Mix for 25 minutes. Slow the mixer to 850 rpm and add Part C. Dry blend the Part D ingredients until uniform and grind, if necessary. Slowly add Part D to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Separately mix the Part E ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.


6. Non-streaking Makeup with Sunscreen (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation


B LAPONITE XLG 0.20 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F) 0.30 Tetrasodium EDTA 0.10

C Triethanolamine (99%) 0.50 Propylene Glycol 3.00 Polyglycerylmethacrylate(and)Propylene Glycol 5.00 Titanium Dioxide 6.50 Kaolin 2.70

D Brown Iron Oxide 0.03 Yellow Iron Oxide 0.55 Red Iron Oxide 0.25 Talc 3.57 Octyl Methoxycinnamate 7.50 Menthyl Anthranilate 3.50

E Trioctanoin 10.00 Glycol Stearate 2.00 Stearic Acid XXX 2.50 PEG-40 Stearate 0.50

F Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A. Add the Part C ingredients with mixing and slowly heat to 750C. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch. Mix and heat the Part E ingredients to 750C. Add Part E to the batch. Cool to 450C and add Part F. Homogenize until smooth and uniform.


7. Water-Resistant Mascara (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 15.70 Simethicone (Antifoam AF) 0.05

B Black Iron Oxide 10.00 Propylene Glycol 4.00

C METHOCEL 40-202 0.20 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum) 0.50

D Deionized Water 30.00 Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone 4.00

E Deionized Water 2.00 Triethanolamine 1.50

F Silicone Fluid 6.00 Propylene Glycol 1.00

G Phenoxyethanol 0.50 Ethylparaben 0.10 Methylparaben 0.20 Carnuba Wax 5.50 Beeswax 9.00 Stearic Acid 2.00

H Oleic Acid 1.00 Propylene Glycol Stearate SE (Lexemul P) 2.30 Glyceryl Stearate (Lexemul 515) 2.30 Propylparaben 0.10 Indapol 1.00 I Deionized Water 1.00 Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.05 Total 100.00



7. Water-Resistant Mascara, continued Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients, add Part B and pass the mixture through a colloid mill until the powder is completely and uniformly dispersed. In a separate vessel, mix the Part C ingredients until uniform and add them to Parts A + B. Separately mix the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix for 5 minutes. Mix the Part E ingredients, add them to the batch and begin heating the batch to 800C. When the batch reaches temperature, add Part F and mix 5 minutes. Mix and heat the Part G to 60-800C and then add them to the batch. Separately mix the Part H ingredients and heat to 820C. Slowly add Part H to the batch and mix for 10 minutes. Cool the batch to 40-450C and add the Part I ingredients. Mix until uniform.


8. Cream Eye Shadow (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation


A Ultramarine Blue 6.00 Titanium Dioxide 1.50 Propylene Glycol 5.00

B METHOCEL 40-202 0.20 Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum) 0.50 Deionized Water 2.00 Triethanolamine 1.20

C Phenoxyethanol 0.50 Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) 0.10 Dimethicone Emulsion (Antifoam AF) 0.05

D Deionized Water 30.00 Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone 4.00 Stearic Acid 3.00 Glyceryl Stearate (Lexemul 515) 2.00

E Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 (PromulgenD)

1.00

Candellia Wax 1.00 Myristyl Myristate (Ceraphyl424) 1.00 Dimethicone (DC 200) 0.50 Propylparaben 0.10

F Mica(and)Titanium Dioxide (TimcaPearlwhite) 5.00

G Deionized Water 1.00 Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.05 Total 100.00



8. Cream Eye Shadow, continued Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and pass the mixture through a colloid mill until the powders are completely and uniformly dispersed. In a separate vessel, mix the Part B ingredients until uniform and add them to Part A. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch in the order shown. Mix for 5 minutes and begin heating the batch to 800C. Mix the Part E ingredients and heat to 820C. Slowly add Part E to the batch and mix for 10 minutes. Cool the batch to 600C and slowly add Part F. Continue mixing and cooling. Separately mix the Part G ingredients and add them to the batch at 450C. Mix until uniform.


C. Dental Care 9. Clear Gel Toothpaste (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Deionized Water 3.70 Sorbitol (70%) 60.00 LAPONITE D 0.30 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MXF) 0.45 Silica 4.00

A Polyethylene Glycol (1500 Mol. Wt.) 3.00 Glycerin 10.00 Sodium Fluoride (25%) 1.00 Sodium Saccharin (10%) 1.50 Flavor 1.00 Preservative 0.05 Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (30%) 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended procedure.


10. Calcium Carbonate Abrasive Toothpaste (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Deionized Water 19.45 Sorbitol (70%) 20.00 LAPONITE D 0.40 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MXF) 0.60 Calcium Carbonate (Precipitated) 40.00

A Titanium Dioxide 1.00 Glycerin 10.00 Sodium Fluoride (25%) 1.00 Sodium Saccharin (10%) 1.50 Flavor 1.00 Preservative 0.05 Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (30%) 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Please contact the supplier for the recommended procedure


11. Toothpaste (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM D 1.30

C Sorbitol (70%) 25.00

D Glycerin 10.00 Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel) 0.70 Dicalciumphosphate Dihydrate 50.00 Flavor 1.00

E Saccharin Sodium 0.20 Sodium Benzoate 0.20 Sodium Lauryl Sulfate 1.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B + C. Mix until the gum is completely dissolved. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Avoid incorporating air during mixing.


12. Fluoride Gel Toothpaste (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM D 1.20

C Sorbitol (70%) 55.26

D Glycerin 10.00 Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel) 0.40 Hydrated Silica (HSG 751) 10.00 Hydrated Silica (Sylox 15) 10.00

E Flavor 1.00 Sodium Fluoride 0.24 Saccharin Sodium 0.20 Sodium Benzoate 0.20 Sodium Lauryl Sulfate 1.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B + C. Mix until the gum is completely dissolved. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Avoid incorporating air during mixing.


D. Hair Care 13. Low Cost Clear Shampoo (Cold Process) (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation


B Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.10

C METHOCEL 40-202 1.30

D Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) 0.11 Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (28%) 28.40

E Cocamide DEA 4.00 Citric Acid 0.20 Ammonium Chloride 0.40 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix Parts A and B and add Part C. Add Part D and continue mixing until the solution thickens and becomes clear. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


14. Antidandruff Shampoo with Zinc Pyrithione (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL ETD 2020 1.00

C Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.10 Propylene Glycol 5.00

D Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (29%) 16.00 Sodium Laureth Sulfate (3 mole, 30%) 16.00 Cocamidopropyl Betaine 4.00 Deionized Water 12.00

E Polyquaternium-10 (Ucare Polymer JR-400) 0.25 DMDM Hydantoin 0.30 Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 1.30 Polyquaternium-39 (Merquat 3330) 1.00 Dimethicone Copolyol (DC 5324) 0.20

F Zinc Pyrithione (48%) 2.50 Fragrance 0.40 FD&C Blue #1 (0.1%) 1.05 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A using rapid agitation. Reduce the mixing speed and add Part C. Mix for 20 minutes. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each at slow speed until homogeneous. Mix the Part E ingredients in a separate vessel until homogeneous. Add Part E to the batch and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


15. Antidandruff Shampoo (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation


B LAPONITE XLG 0.32 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC

9H4F) 0.48

TEA Lauryl Sulfate 15.00

C Sodium Laureth Sulfate 20.00 Glycol Stearate 3.00 Cocamidopropyl Betaine 10.00

D Zinc Pyrithione (Dispersion) 4.00 Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and)

Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A and mix until homogeneous. Slowly heat Parts A + B to 750C. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each at slow speed until homogeneous. Cool the batch to 450C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix each at slow speed until homogeneous.


16. Conditioning Antidandruff Shampoo (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation


B JAGUARC-17 0.50

C RHODIGEL EZ 0.05

D Citric Acid to pH 5-7 q.s. Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (RhodaponSB8208S) 45.00

E Cocamide MEA (Alkamide C-212) 1.80 Glycol Stearate (AlkamulsEGMS) 0.90

F Zinc Pyrithione (48% Dispersion) 2.00 Deionized Water 5.00

G Citric Acid to pH 5.5-6.5 q.s. Fragrance, Color, Preservative q.s.

H Cocamidopropyl Betaine (MirataineCBC) 6.00-14.00 Total Note 1

Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as shown in the supplier’s literature. Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with rapid agitation. Heat the mixture to 40-450C. Add Part C and continue heating to 600C. Add Part D while heating to 70-750C. Slow the mixer and add the Part E ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until homogeneous. Mix the Part F ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Cool the batch to 40-450C. Add the Part G ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous. Add Part H incrementally until the viscosity is between 7,000 and 11,000 mPas (Brookfield Model RV at 10rpm).


17. Mild Shampoo (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Decyl Polyglucoside (Plantaren 2000) 12.00

A Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (StandapolEA-21) 24.00 Cocamide DEA 3.00

B ACULYN 22 3.30 Deionized Water 57.70

C Citric Acid to pH 7 q.s. Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients slowly to avoid foaming. Separately mix the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A with slow mixing. Mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


18. Antidandruff Shampoo (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B GELWHITE H NF 1.00

C Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (Methocel F4M)

0.80

D Zinc Pyrithione (48%) 4.20

E Cocamide MEA 5.00

F TEA Lauryl Sulfate 40.00 Triethanolamine 3.20

G Color, Fragrance, Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while agitating with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Heat to 500C and slowly add Part C. Mix until smooth. Maintain temperature at 500C and slowly add Part D. Mix until smooth and uniform. Separately melt Part E and add it to the batch. Remove the heat and add the Part F ingredients with slow mixing to avoid foaming. Mix until uniform. Continue mixing until the batch cools and add the Part G ingredients. Mix until uniform.


19. Basic Shampoo (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation


B CELLOSIZE QP-4400H 1.5

C TEA Lauryl Sulfate(40%) 50.00 Lauramide DEA 2.00

D Citric Acid to pH 7.0-7.4 q.s.

E Preservative, Color, Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A with rapid mixing. When well dispersed, heat to 700C until a clear solution is obtained. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown while mixing slowly to avoid foaming. Mix until the batch is clear and uniform. Adjust the pH with Part D and cool to room temperature. Add the Part A ingredients and mix until uniform.


20. Ultra Pearlescent Conditioning Shampoo (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM Ultra 2.00

C Mica(and) Titanium Dioxide (Timiron MP-1001) 0.50 Sodium Laureth Sulfate 25.00

D Lauramide DEA (Monamide716) 7.50 Cocoyl Sarcosine (VansealCS) 3.75 Preservative, Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 700 rpm. Increase speed to 1500-1700 rpm and mix for 30 minutes. Add Part C and mix for 5 minutes. Slow the mixer to 200-500 rpm and add the Part D ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until smooth and uniform.


21. Curling Gel with Conditioner (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 65.40 Ammonium Thioglycolate (60%) 15.00 Ammonium Hydroxide (28%) 2.00

B Triethanolamine (99%) 12.00 Pentasodium Pentatate 0.10 Preservative q.s. Propylene Glycol 4.00

C CELLOSIZE PCG-10 1.00 Polyquaternium-10 (UCARE Polymer JR-

30M) 0.50

D Fragrance, Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add the Part B ingredients in the order listed to Part A and mix each until completely dissolved. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until a uniform, clear gel forms. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until uniform.


22. Cream Relaxer (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation



9H4F) 0.36

C Propylene Glycol 2.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 3.50 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG 100 Stearate 7.50

D Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth 20 9.00 Hydrogenated Polyisobutene 8.00 Petrolatum 20.00

E Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A. Mix until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and slowly heat the batch to 750C. Separately mix the Part D ingredients and heat to 750C. Add Part D to Parts A + B + C and homogenize until smooth and uniform. Cool to below 400C and add Part E. Mix until uniform.


23. Polymeric, No-Lye Relaxer (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation Part 1: Cream Base

Ingredient Wt. % Cetearyl Alcohol (Crodafos CES) 3.75 Cetyl Alcohol NF (Crodacol C-95NF) 0.50

A Steareth 2 (Brij72) 0.25 Mineral Oil 15.00 Petrolatum 2.75 Steareth 10 (Brij 76) 1.25

B Distilled Water 56.78 Propylene Glycol 3.00

C STRUCTURE 2001 1.72

D Calcium Hydroxide 5.00 Distilled Water 10.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure With suitable agitation, combine the Part A ingredients. Combine the Part B ingredients. Heat Parts A + B to 75-800C. Add Part B to Part A with good mixing. Add Part C to the batch and mix well. Add the Part D ingredients, mix thoroughly and cool the batch to 400C. Homogenize for 5 minutes.

(continued on the following page)


23. Polymeric, No-Lye Relaxer, continued Formulation Part 2: Activator

Ingredient Wt. % A Distilled Water 74.80 Xanthan Gum 0.20

B Guanidine Carbonate 25.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients with good mixing. Heat to 75-800C. Cool to 450C.Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform.


24. Clear Curl Activator Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 0.50

C Glycerin 10.00 Propylene Glycol 10.00

D Methylpapaben 0.20 Propylparaben 0.03

E Triethanolamine (99%) 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle Part B onto the surface of Part A until Part B is completely wetted. Begin mixing. Add Part C with moderate agitation. Separately blend the Part D ingredients and heat until clear. Cool Part D to 450C and add it to the batch with moderate agitation. Add Part E and mix with sweeping agitation until a clear, uniform gel is obtained.


25. Clarifying and Volumizing Hair Mask (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM F 7.00 Glycerin 5.00

C Kaolin (Vanclay) 30.00 Talc 5.00 Cocoyl Sarcosine (VansealCS) 5.00

D Preservative, Fragrance q.s.

E Triethanolamine 0.20 Citric Acid to pH 5.5-6.5 q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B into Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add the Part D ingredients and mix each until uniform. Adjust the pH to the indicated range with the Part E ingredients.


26. Semi-permanent Hair Dye Gel (Dark Brown) (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % HC Blue No. 2 0.36 Disperse Violet No. 1 0.56 HC Yellow No. 4 0.24 HC Red No. 3 0.11

A Disperse Blue No. 3 0.20 Disperse Blue No. 7 0.17 HC Yellow No. 5 0.02 Propylene Glycol 4.00 Distilled Water 18.34

B Oleic Acid 0.82 Ethanolamine 0.18 Linoleamide DEA (Incromide LA) 2.00

C STRUCTURE 2001 3.39 Distilled Water 62.11

D Ethanolamine 2.50

E Citric Acid (10%) 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure With moderate agitation, mix and heat the Part A ingredients to 50-600C until the dyes are fully dispersed. Cool to 400C or less and add the Part B ingredients to Part A in the order shown. Mix each until uniform. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until uniform. Add Parts D and E to the batch in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


27. Hydrophilic Oxidative Hair Dye with Lotion Developer (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation Part 1: Dye Base

Ingredient Wt. % Deionized Water 81.90 Dyes q.s. Sodium Sulfite 0.10

A Ammonium Lauryl Sulfate (StepanolAM-V) 2.00 Propylene Glycol 3.00 Isopropanol 3.00 Ammonium Hydroxide (28%) 10.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat the Part A water to 800C. Add the remaining Part A ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform. Cool while mixing. Formulation Part 2: Lotion Developer

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 60.95 Disodium EDTA (Versene NA2) 0.05 Nonoxynol-4 (Igepal CO-430) 10.00 Nonoxynol-9 (Igepal CO-630) 10.00

B Hydrogen Peroxide (50%) 12.00 STRUCTURE 2001 6.90 Phosphoric Acid 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.


28. Clear, Oil-Free Hair Conditioner Gel (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 86.60 Babassamidopropyl Dimethylbenzyl Ammonium

Chloride (IncroquatBA-85) 1.50

B Cocodimonium Hydrolyzed Protein (Croquat M) 3.00 Acetamide MEA(and)Lactamide MEA

(IncromectantLAMEA) 2.50

Glycerin 2.00 Quaternium-15 (Dowicil200) 0.10

C METHOCEL 40-202 2.00

D Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) 0.10 Dimethicone Copolyol 2.00

E Citric Acid to pH 4-5 0.20 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse and dissolve the Part B ingredients in Part A. Add Part C and mix until Part C is wetted. Add a few drops of 20% Sodium Hydroxide solution to promote thickening. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add Part E and mix until uniform.


29. Hair Conditioner/Rinse (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation


B JAGUAR C-13S 0.30

C Citric Acid to pH 4-5 q.s. Glycol Stearate (Alkamuls EGMS) 2.5

D Stearamphoacetate (MiranolDM) 15.00 Cetyl Alcohol NF 2.00

E Fragrance, Dye, Preservative q.s. Total Note 1

Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as presented in the supplier’s literature. Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with good mixing. Add Part C and heat batch to 70-750C. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Cool the batch to 40-450C and add the Part E ingredients. Mix each until uniform.


30. Creme Rinse (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation


B CELOSIZE QP-52000H 1.00

C Stearalkonium Chloride 1.50 Polysorbate 80 0.50

D Cetyl Alcohol 3.00 Glyceryl Monostearate 0.50

E Preservative, Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A with good mixing. When hydration of Part B is complete, heat to 70-750C. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Separately mix the Part D ingredients and heat them to 70-750C. Add Part D to Parts A+ B+C with vigorous stirring. Remove from the heat and continue stirring until the temperature reaches 30-350C. Add the Part E ingredients and mix until uniform.


31. Super Hold Hair Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Triethanolamine (99%) 0.35 Ethanol SDA-40 20.00

D PVP/VA Copolymer (Luviskol VA64) 8.50 Panthenol 0.10 Oleth-20 (Brij 98) 0.40

E Fragrance 0.10 Dimethicone Copolyol 0.05 PEG-45 Palm Kernel Glycerides (Crovol PK-70) 0.02 Benzophenone-4 (Uvinul MS-40) 0.01

F D&C Green No. 5 1.77 Propylene Glycol(and)Methylparaben(and)

Propylparaben 0.80

Triethanolamine (99%) 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B onto the surface of Part A. After Part B is completely wetted, mix at low speed. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until uniform. Add Part D to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Separately mix and heat the Part E ingredients until clear and uniform. Add Part E to the batch with moderate mixing. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


32. Crystal Clear Hair Fixative Gel (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-90) 3.00

A Sodium Hydroxide (10%) 2.00 Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.10 Distilled Water 90.90

B STRUCTURE 2001 4.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until uniform. Add Part B with moderate mixing and continue mixing until the batch is clear and uniform.


33. Antistat Hair Pump Gel (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation


B LAPONITE XLG 2.00

C Propylene Glycol 2.00 Tetrasodium EDTA 0.10 Ethanol SD39C 10.00

D FD&C Blue No. 1 (0.1%) 0.25 DMDM Hydantoin 0.20 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with good mixing. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Heat slowly to 750C and mix for 30 minutes. Cool to 250C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix until uniform.


34. Hair Defining Complex (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A BENTONE GEL MIO 1.00 Behenyltrimonium Methosulftate(and)

Cetearyl Alcohol (Incroquat Behenyl TMS) 4.00

Deionized Water 78.80

B Glycerin 4.00 Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone Vinyl Acetate

Copolymer (PVP/VA W-735) 2.00

C Cyclomethicone(and)Dimethiconol 10.00

D Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol (Merguard1190)

0.20

Sodium Hydroxide to pH 5.5 q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat to 75-800C. Mix the Part B ingredients separately and heat to 75-800C. Mix Part A with Part B using high shear stirring. Add Part C to the batch and mix until uniform. Begin cooling and transfer to a propeller stirrer at 500C. Continue cooling while stirring. At 300C, add the Part D ingredients and mix until uniform.


35. Hair Setting Gel (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation


B ACRITAMER 505E 0.70 Deionized Water 29.00 Glycerin 2.00 Propylene Glycol 2.50

C PEG-75 Lanolin (Laneto-50) 0.50 dl-Panthenol (RitapanDL) 0.70 Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-90) 2.00 DMDM Hydantoin 0.20 Triethanolamine (50%) 1.40 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly disperse Part B in Part A. Agitate until Part B is fully hydrated. Separately mix the Part C ingredients until uniform. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until uniform.


E. Skin Care 36. Night Cream (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 66.20 Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) 0.10

B Carbomer 941 0.20

C Glycerin 3.00 Propylene Glycol 4.00

D Methylparaben 0.20 Ethylparaben 0.15 Squalane 2.00 Isopropyl Palmitate 4.00 Isopropyl Myristate 3.00 Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 1.50 Stearic Acid 3.50 Glyceryl Stearate 3.50

E Cetyl Alcohol 1.00 Sesame Oil 2.00 Mineral Oil 1.00 Mineral Oil(and)Lanolin Alcohol 1.00 Laureth-23 0.50 Dimethicone 0.50 BHA 0.05 METHOCEL 40-100 0.10

(formulation continued on following page)


36. Night Cream, continued

Ingredient Wt. % F Deionized Water 1.00 Triethanolamine 0.25

G Color q.s. Deionized Water 1.00

H Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.10 Fragrance 0.15 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until the powder is fully dissolved. Add Part B to Part A and mix until Part B is fully wetted and dispersed. Begin heating Parts A + B to 800C and add Part C while heating. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until the powders are dissolved. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Separately mix the Part E ingredients and heat to 800C. When the main batch reaches 800C, add Part E and mix for 5 minutes. Separately mix the Part F ingredients and then add them to the batch. Begin cooling and add Part G before the temperature reaches 600C. Separately mix the first two ingredients in Part H and add them to the batch when it reaches 450C. Add the remaining Part H ingredient and mix until uniform.


37. Sunflower Facial Revitalizing Cream (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A PEMULENTR-1 0.30 CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 0.50 Deionized Water 22.55 Panthenol (Pro-Vitamin B5) 0.50

B Allantoin 0.20 Glycerin 2.50 Disodium EDTA 0.05 Sunflower Oil 3.50 Mineral Oil 3.50

C Isostearyl Benzoate (FinsolvSB) 3.00 Cetyl Phosphate (Crodafos MCA) 0.30 Methyl Gluceth-20 (GlucamE-20) 1.00

D Triethanolamine (99%) 0.80

E Fragrance 0.50 Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and)

Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben 0.80

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Disperse the second ingredient in Part A in the Part A water. Mix until a clear solution is obtained. Sprinkle the third Part A ingredient on the surface of the solution. After it is wetted, mix at slow speed. Mix the Part B ingredients until homogeneous and add them to Part A. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and add them to the batch while mixing at 1,000rpm. Add Parts D and E in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.


38. Cream for Oily Skin (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation



9H4F) 0.30

Tetrasodium EDTA 0.10 Cyclomethicone 10.00 Dimethicone 3.00

C Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG 100 Stearate 4.00 Emulsifying Wax NF 3.00 Vitamin E Acetate 0.25 Cetyl Octanoate 7.50


1.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Disperse the first two Part B ingredients in Part A. Mix until homogeneous. Add the remaining Part B ingredient and begin heating to 750C. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and heat to 750C. When both parts reach temperature, add Part C to Parts A + B with rapid mixing. Cool to 450C and add Part D. Mix until uniform.


39. Hand and Nail Cream (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Silk Protein Hydrolyzate 1.00 Sodium Chloride 2.00

A Glycerin 5.00 Disodium EDTA 0.10 Deionized Water 68.65

B BENTONE GEL VS-5 4.00 Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 344 Fluid) 7.00 Laurylmethicone Copolyol (Dow Corning Q2-5200) 2.00

C Isopropyl Palmitate 2.00 Caprylic/Capryl Triglyceride (Crodamol GTCC) 6.00 Sweet Almond Oil 2.00

D Fragrance 0.15 Preservative 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Separately mix the Part B ingredients. Separately mix the Part C ingredients. Add Part B to Part C and blend thoroughly. Using high shear mixing, slowly add approximately 1% of Part A to Parts B + C and homogenize for several minutes. Very slowly add the remainder of Part A, a little at a time, while continuing to homogenize the batch. After all of Part A has been added, continue to homogenize for several minutes more.


40. Anti-Aging Cream (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % BENTONE GEL TN 3.00

A Jojoba Oil 4.00 Sunflower Seed Oil 3.00 C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate (Finsolv TN) 5.00 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG 100 Stearate 6.00

B Cetearyl Alcohol 2.00 Tocopheryl Acetate (Copherol1250) 2.00 Deionized Water 50.70 Glycerin 4.00

C BENTONE LT (3% Dispersion) 13.40 Hydrolyzed Sweet Almond Protein

(Gluadin Almond) 2.50

MultifruitBSC 4.00

D Fragrance 0.20 Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol

(Merguard1190) 0.20

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Thoroughly mix the Part A ingredients while warming to 400C. Stir until uniform. Add the Part B ingredients and heat the batch to 75-800C. Mix and heat the Part C ingredients to 75-800C. Using a homogenizer, mix Part A + B with Part C. Continue homogenization while cooling to 450C. Transfer the batch to a propeller mixer and continue cooling. At 300C, add the Part D ingredients and mix until uniform.


41. Night Cream Moisturizer (R.I.T.A Corp.) Formulation


B ACRITAMER 940 0.40 Disodiumoleamido PEG-2 Sulfosuccinate 2.00

C Propylene Glycol 2.00 Aloe Vera Gel (Ritaloe1X) 0.20 Hydrogenated Polyisobutene 5.00 Dimethicone 2.00 Glyceryl Stearate)and)PEG 100 Stearate 5.00 Mineral Oil 4.00

D Isopropyl Palmitate (RITA IPP) 6.00 Tocopheryl Acetate 0.25 Tocopheryl Linoleate 0.10 Isopropyl Myristate (RITA IPM) 0.50 Cetearyl Alcohol (RITA Cetearyl Alcohol 70/30) 1.50

E Triethanolamine (99%) 0.40 Corn Starch 1.00 Hydrolyzed Soy Flour (Raffermine) 3.00

F Oat Protein (Reductine) 4.00 Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and)


Total 100.00

(formulation continued on the following page)


41. Night Cream Moisturizer, continued Mixing Procedure Slowly disperse Part B in Part A. Mix until fully wetted and dispersed. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Heat the batch to 750C. Combine the Part D ingredients separately, heat to 750C and add them to the batch with good mixing. Add Part E and mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 400C and add the Part F ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until uniform.

42. Hand Cream (Rohm and Haas Company)) Formulation


A ACULYN 22 1.00 Glycerin 12.00 Triethanolamine 0.50 Mineral Oil 2.00

B Cetyl Alcohol 10.00 PEG-15 Cocamine (Ethomeen C/25) 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients with moderate subsurface agitation. Combine the Part B ingredients with moderate subsurface agitation. Heat Part A and Part B separately to 700C. Add Part B to Part A with high shear agitation. Mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 300C quickly.


43. Moisturizing Cream (Water-in-Silicone) (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 345) 18.00

A Dimethicone (DC 200, 100 cstk.) 5.00 TIXOGEL FTN 10.00 Cetyl Dimethicone Copolyol (Abil EM-90) 1.20

B Deionized Water 65.30 Sodium Chloride 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 780C. Mix the Part B ingredients separately and heat them to 780C. Add Part B to Part A and homogenize until uniform. Transfer to a sweep action mixer while cooling to room temperature.


44. Ultra Moisturizing Skin Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM Ultra 0.50 Carbomer 934 (Carbopol 934) 0.50

C Glycerin 3.00 Butylene Glycol 2.00 Cetyl Alcohol 1.00 Glyceryl Stearate SE 3.00

D Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Neobee M-5) 5.00 C12-15 Octanoate (Finester EH-25) 1.00 Dimethicone (DC 200, 350 cstk.) 1.00 Steareth-2 (Brij 72) 0.83 Steareth-21 (Brij 721) 0.83

E Fragrance, Preservative q.s.

F Triethanolamine 0.24 Citric Acid to pH 5.3-5.9 q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and sift the mixture into Part A while mixing with a propeller mixer at 1000 rpm. Mix for 45 minutes and begin heating to 70-750C. Add the Part C ingredients to the batch. Mix the Part D ingredients and heat them to 70-750C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Begin cooling with continuous mixing. At 450C, add the Part E ingredients to the batch. At 350C, add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.


45. Luxuriant Lotion (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 71.00 B METHOCEL 40-202 0.20 Triethanolamine 0.50 C Carbomer 934 (2% Aqueous Solution) 10.00 Propylene Glycol 2.00

D Methylparaben 0.20 Propylparaben 0.10 Mineral Oil 7.0

E Glyceryl Stearate SE 3.00 Stearic Acid 3.50 Dimethicone 0.50 F Deionized Water 1.00 Triethanolamine 0.75 G Color q.s. Fragrance 0.10 H Deionized Water 0.50 Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle the first Part B ingredient into Part A and mix for 5 minutes. Add the remaining Part B ingredient and mix until a clear solution is obtained. Begin heating to 800C. Add the previously prepared Part C. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them when the batch temperature is above 600C. Separately combine the Part E ingredients, heat them to 800C. and add them to the batch. Mix for 10 minutes. Mix the Part F ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Begin cooling and add Parts G and H when temperature is below 500C. Mix until homogeneous.


46. Cleansing Lotion (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation


B METHOCEL 40-202 0.20

C Deionized Water 1.00 Triethanolamine 0.75

D Propylene Glycol 3.00 Methylparaben 0.20 Mineral Oil 8.00 Petrolatum 3.00

E Stearic Acid 2.00 Glyceryl Stearate SE 3.00 Dimethicone 0.50

F Color q.s. Fragrance 0.10

G Deionized Water 1.00 Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.20 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle Part B into Part A and mix for 5 minutes. Add the previously prepared Part C solution. Begin heating to 800C. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them when the batch temperature is above 600C. Separately combine the Part E ingredients, heat them to 800C. and add them to the batch. Mix for 10 minutes. Begin cooling and add Parts F and G in the order shown when the temperature is below 45-500C. Mix until homogeneous.


47. Sparkling Skin Moisturizing Fluid with Microcapsules (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL ETD 2050 0.25 Glycerin 2.50

C Sorbitol (70%) 2.50 Methylparaben 0.10 Deionized Water 10.00 Sodium Hydroxymethylglycinate (SuttocideA) 0.30

D Polyvinyl Pyrrolidone (PVP K-30) 0.10 Disodium EDTA 0.05 Benzophenone-4 0.05

E Mineral Oil in Gelatin Capsules (LipoPearls) 0.80 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A with rapid agitation. Slow the mixer and mix until homogeneous. Combine the Part C ingredients using shear and add them to Parts A + B. Separately mix the Part D ingredients until homogeneous. Add part D to the batch with paddle -type agitation until a clear solution is obtained. Add Part E with paddle-type agitation until the microcapsules are well dispersed.


48. Liposome Emulsion (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Mineral Oil 10.00

A PEMULEN TR-1 0.25 CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 0.20 Octyl Stearate 8.00

B Deionized Water 75.55 Glycerin 2.00

C Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.50

D Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and) Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben

0.50

Lecithin(and)Evening Primrose Oil (BrooksomeEPO)

3.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix well to disperse the polymers. Mix the Part B ingredients until uniform. Slowly add 3/4 of Part B to Part A with vigorous mixing. Mix about 15 minutes. When the emulsion is smooth and white, add a portion of Part C and mix until uniform. Slowly add the remainder of Part B and Part C with moderate mixing. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.


49. After-Sport Massage Lotion (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A BENTONE GEL EUG 3.00 Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Crodamol CTCC) 5.00

B Octyldodecanol (Eutanol G) 4.00 Isopropyl Myristate(and)Soy Bean Oil(and)

Arnica Extract 2.00

C Acrylic Acid/Vinyl Acetate Copolymer 0.30 Demineralized Water 82.15

D Propylene Glycol 3.00 Triethanolamine (99%) 0.15

E Fragrance 0.20 Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene

Glycol (Merguard 1190) 0.20

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Combine the Part B ingredients and thoroughly disperse Part A in Part B. Add Part C and heat the mixture to 450C. Combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 450C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Continue to stir the batch while cooling. When the temperature is below 300C, add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


50. Alpha Hydroxy Acid Lotion (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Stearic Acid 3.00 Hydrogenated Soy Glyceride (Myverol18-06) 3.00

A Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Polysorbate 60 1.00 Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride 2.50 C12-15 Alkylbenzoate (Finsolv TN) 1.50 Propylparaben 0.05 Deionized Water 61.55 ACRITAMER 940 0.15

B Methylparaben 0.15 Methyl Gluceth-20 3.00 Propylene Glycol 3.00 Triethanolamine (50%) 0.50 Deionized Water 10.00

C Lactic Acid 5.60 Sodium Hydroxide (20%) 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients thoroughly and heat them to 70-750C. Separately mix the Part B ingredients and heat them to 70-750C. Add Part A to Part B with good mixing. Mix until uniform. Continue stirring while cooling. When the batch temperature reaches 450C, add the previously mixed Part C ingredients. Continue mixing until uniform.


51. Lanolin Hand Lotion (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A Propylene Glycol 3.00 ACULYN 22 1.00 Triethanolamine (99%) 0.50 Lanolin 2.00

B Cetyl Alcohol 2.00 PEG-15 Cocoate (Ethomeen C/25) 0.50

C Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients using high shear agitation. Heat Part A to 700C. Combine the Part B ingredients using high shear agitation. Heat Part B to 700C. Mix Part A and Part B using shear agitation. Cool quickly to 300C and add Part C. Mix until uniform.


52. Alpha Hydroxy Acid Lotion (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation


A OPTIGEL GWX-1285 15.00 Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and)

Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben 0.60

Lecinol S-10 1.00 Stearic Acid 1.50

B Dimethicone (DC200, 200 cstk.) 5.00 Octyldodecanol (EutanolG) 5.00 Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 (Lipowax D) 1.50 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 1.25

C Mixed Fruit Acids BA Complex 5.00 Triethanolamine (99%) to pH 4.0-4.2 q.s. Total Note 1

Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as presented in the supplier’s literature. Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 760C. Separately mix the Part B ingredients and heat them to 780C. Add Part B to Part A using a homogenizer to mix the batch until uniform. Transfer to a propeller mixer and cool the batch to below 300C. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


53. Ultra-AHA Moisturizing Skin Lotion (R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM Ultra 1.00 Xanthan Gum (Rhodigel) 0.50

C Glycerin 3.00 Butylene Glycol 2.00 Cetyl Alcohol 1.00 Glyceryl Stearate SE 3.00 Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Neobee M-5) 5.00

D C12-15 Octanoate (Finester EH-25) 1.00 Dimethicone (DC 200, 350 cstk.) 1.00 Steareth-2 (Brij 72) 0.83 Steareth-21 (Brij 721) 0.83

E Glycolic Acid 7.00

F Fragrance, Preservative q.s.

G Triethanolamine 3.20 Citric Acid to pH 3.6-4.0 q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with a propeller mixer at 1000rpm. Continue mixing for 45 minutes. Begin heating Parts A + B to 750C. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 750C. Add Part D to the batch with good mixing. Begin cooling. At 450C, add Parts E and F in the order shown. Mix each until uniform. At 350C add Part G and mix until uniform.


54. Clear Aloe Vera Gel (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Aloe Barbadensis Gel (Activera 1-1FS) 90.00 Glycereth-26 (Liponic EG-1) 0.50

A Allantoin 0.40 STRUCTURE 2001 3.45 Distilled Water 4.39 Tetrasodium EDTA 0.26

D Triethanolamine (99%) 1.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform. Add Part B and continue mixing until the batch thickens and becomes clear.


55. Anti-Wrinkle Gel (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation


B ACRITAMER 940 0.50

C Xanthan Gum 0.10 1,3 Butylene Glycol 5.00

D Dimethicone Copolyol (Ritasil 190) 0.10 Shea Butter 1.00

E Triethanolamine (99%) 0.40 Collagen (Promois ECP) 0.20

F DMDM Hydantoin 0.20 Fragrance 0.10 Wheat Protein 5.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C and mix until dissolved. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform. Add Part E and mix until the batch thickens. Add the Part F ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.


56. Mineral Oil Gel (R.I.T.A. Corp.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Mineral Oil 61.55

A Cetyl Alcohol 18.00 Oleth-3 (Ritoleth-3) 4.5

B ACRITAMER 940 1.75

C Cocamine 5.30 Color, Fragrance, Preservative q.s.

D Ethanol SD40 8.90 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients. Disperse Part B in Part A and mix until the solution is clear. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add Part D and mix slowly until uniform.


57. Aloe Gel (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Deionized Water 44.95 Methylparaben 0.25

A Aloe Barbadensis Gel 10.00 Glyceryl Polymethacrylate(and)Propylene Glycol 35.00 Butylene Glycol 2.50 PEG-8 (Carbowax PEG 400) 2.00

B PURE-GEL HH 3.50

C Deionized Water 1.00 Imidazolidinyl Urea 0.30

D Water(and)Hyaluronic Acid (Hylucare1%) 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 780C. Add Part B to Part A and homogenize until uniform. Transfer to a propeller mixer and cool the batch to 350C. Mix the Part C ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Add Part D and mix until uniform.


58. Vitamin A Eye Gel (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 63.65 Aloe Vera 1.00

B METHOCEL 40-101 0.10 Triethanolamine 0.01

C Glycerin 2.00 Dimethicone Copolyol (Dow Corning 193) 2.00

D Polysorbate 20 0.50 Retinol 0.05

E Propylene Glycol 3.00 Methylparaben 0.18 Deionized Water 1.00

F Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.10 Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) 0.01

G Carbomer 940 (2% Solution) 25.00

H Deionized Water 1.00 Triethanolamine 0.40 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Sprinkle the first Part B ingredient into Part A and mix 5 minutes. Add the second Part B ingredient and mix until clear. Separately combine the Part C, Part D, Part E and Part F ingredients and add each Part to Parts A + B in the order shown. Mix each until uniform. Add the previously prepared Part G solution and mix 15 minutes. Separately mix the Part H ingredients and add them to the batch. Continue mixing until the batch gels and is crystal clear.


F. Shaving 59. Shaving Cream (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 78.20 Glycerin 5.00

B METHOCEL 40-100 0.10

C Triethanolamine 0.85 Stearic Acid 10.00 Stearyl Alcohol 0.50

D Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol 1.50 Petrolatum 1.50 Glyceryl Stearate SE 1.50

E Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.20 Deionized Water 0.50

F Fragrance 0.15 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and then add Part B to Part A with good mixing. Once Part B is fully dispersed add Part C and mix for about 15 minutes. Begin heating the batch to 75-800C. Combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 75-800C.Add Part D to the batch with rapid mixing. When the batch is homogeneous, begin cooling. When the temperature reaches less than 450C, add the previously mixed Part E. Mix until uniform. Add Part F and mix until uniform.


60. After-Shave Gel with Peppermint and Tea Tree Oil (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 0.20 Propylene Glycol 1.50

C Sorbitol (70%) 0.50 PEG 600 (Carbowax 600) 2.00

D Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.20

E Polyquaternium-39 (Merquat Plus 3330) 0.25 Oleth-10 (Brij 97) 0.80

F Peppermint Oil 0.08 Tea Tree Oil 0.12

G Ethanol SD40 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.12 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sprinkle Part B onto the surface of Part A and begin stirring when Part B is wetted. Add the Part C ingredients and mix for 20 minutes. Add Part D and continue mixing as the gel thickens. Mix until smooth. With slow mixing, add Part E. Mix until uniform. Combine the Part F ingredients (pre-melt the first ingredient) and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Add the Part G ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


61. Shaving Gel (Union Carbide Corp.) Formulation


B CELLOSIZE PCG-10 1.25

C POLYOX WSR-205NF 0.10 Deionized Water 3.23 Palmitic Acid 6.00

D Triethanolamine (99%) 5.00 Oleth-20 (Ameroxol OE-20) 2.00 Glycerin 2.00

E Preservative, Color, Fragrance q.s.

F Isopentane 6.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A with rapid stirring. When well dispersed heat the mixture to 750C. Separately mix the Part C ingredients with gentle stirring. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until uniform. When a clear gel has formed and the batch temperature is 750C, add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Cool the batch to room temperature and add Part E and mix until uniform. Separately cool the batch and add Part F at 150C or below. Mix them with gentle stirring until uniform. Package in sepro-type aerosol cans using A-40 propellant.


G. Soaps 62. Facial Wash (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A BENTONE LT (3.0% Aqueous Dispersion) 74.00 Cocoamphopolycarboxylate (Ampholak7CX/C) 15.00 Propylene Glycol 5.00 PEG-18 Glyceryl Glycol Dileococoate 1.50 Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol

(Merguard1190) 0.10

B Disodium EDTA 0.20 Fragrance 0.40 Citric Acid to pH 5.5 q.s. Color 0.30 Demineralized Water 3.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Prepare the Part A dispersion using a high shear mixer, i.e. homogenizer. Mix for 15-20 minutes. Let the dispersion stand until any entrapped air has escaped. Using a propeller mixer, add the Part B ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one.


63. Shower and Bath Gel (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation


B JAGUAR C-162 0.20

C Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (RhodapexES-2) 35.00

D Citric Acid to pH 5.0-5.5 q.s.

E Cocamidopropyl Betaine (MirataineBD-R) 12.00 Cocamide DEA (Alkamide DC-212/s) 2.00

F Preservative, Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Thoroughly disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C with slow agitation to avoid foaming. Mix until uniform. Adjust the pH with Part D and heat the batch to 40-550C while continuing to mix. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Cool the batch to 350C and add Part F. Readjust the pH to 5.0-5.5, if necessary.


64. Pearlescent Liquid Hand Soap (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Caprylyl/Capryl Glucoside (Triton CG-110) 20.00

A Sodium Isostearyl Lactylate (Pationic ISL) 1.00 Lauramide MEA (Monamide LM-MA) 4.00 Deionized Water 10.00

B Triethanolamine (99%) 1.70

C Deionized Water 59.94 ACULYN 22 3.30

D Methylchloroisothiazolinone(and) Methylisothiazolinone (KathonCG)

0.06

E Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 700C. Mix until clear and add Part B. Mix and heat the Part C ingredients to 500C. Slowly add Part A to Part B with good agitation. Avoid air entrapment. Add part D at 40-450C and mix until uniform. Add Part E and mix until uniform.

Personal Care Formulations 409 65. Economy Shower Gel (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 65.016 CARBOPOL ETD 2020 0.900

B Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.120 Deionized Water 8.000

C Guar Hydroxypropyltrimonium Chloride (Hi-Care1000)

0.100

Disodium EDTA 0.050

D Sodium Laureth Sulfate (Standapol ES-250) 18.000 Cocoamphoacetate (Miranol Ultra) 5.000 Dimethicone (DC200, 5000 cstk.) 0.700

E Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and) Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben

0.500

Fragrance 0.500 Colors 0.064

F Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 1.050 Total 100.000

Mixing Procedure Warm the Part A water slightly and disperse the polymer. Reduce the mixing speed and mix for 20 minutes. Add Part B and mix for 30 minutes. Separately mix the Part C ingredients. When the polymer swells, add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until uniform. Slow the mixer and add the Part D ingredients in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Add the Part E ingredients in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Adjust the pH to 6.1-6.5 using Part F. Mix until uniform.


66. Liquid Hand Soap. (R•I•T•A. Corp.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Sodium C14-16Olefin Sulfonate 20.00 Cocamide DEA (RitamideC) 3.50 Sodium Lauroyl Lactylate 2.00

A Sodium Isostearyl Lactylate 2.00 Glycol Distearate 0.35 PEG-100 Distearate 0.25 PEG-75 Lanolin 2.00

B R•I•T•A PEO-2 0.25 Deionized Water 69.35

C Fragrance 0.10 DMDM Hydantoin 0.20

D Sodium Chloride (25%) q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part B ingredients with low shear stirring. When the solution is complete, heat Part B to 750C. Mix the Part A ingredients and heat them to 750C. Add Part B to Part A with good mixing. Mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 500C and add the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Mix until uniform. Adjust to the desired viscosity with Part D.


H. Sunscreens 67. Waterproof Sunscreen Cream, SPF 30 (FMC Corp.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A AVICEL CL611 (3% Aqueous Dispersion) 40.00 VISCARIN GP309 (2% Aqueous Solution) 10.00

B Deionized Water 4.50 Propylene Glycol 1.00 Glyceryl Stearate (CerasyntSD) 2.50 Octylmethoxy Cinnamate 7.50 Octocrylene 8.00 Benzophenone-3 6.00

C Myreth-3 Octanoate 5.00 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 2.50 Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 3.00 Zinc Oxide (Z-Cote) 3.00 Titanium Dioxide 2.00 Tricontanyl PVP 4.00


1.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Separately prepare the two components of Part A following the manufactures recommended procedures. Combine the Part A ingredients, add the Part B ingredients and heat the mixture to 750C while stirring slowly. In a separate vessel, combine the Part C ingredients and heat them to 900C while stirring slowly. Add Part C to Parts A+B with moderate stirring. Cool the batch to 450C and add Part D with moderate stirring. Mix until uniform.


68. Waterproof Sunscreen Lotion (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Deionized Water 20.00 Hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (Methocel E4M)

D Polymethoxy Bicyclicoxazolidine (NuoseptC) 0.20 Disodium EDTA 0.05 Octyl Methoxycinnamate (Neo HeliopanType AV) 7.00

E Octyl Salicylate (Neo HeliopanType OS) 3.00 Benzophenone-3 (Uvinul M-40) 2.00 C12-15 Alkylbenzoate 4.00

F PEMULEN TR-1 0.25 Aminomethyl Propanol 0.25

G PEG-20 Almond Glycerides 0.20 Fragrance 0.15 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A water at 40-500C. Mix the Part C ingredients separately. When uniform, add the Part D to Part C ingredients and mix until uniform. Add Parts C + D to Parts A + B and mix well. Combine the Part E ingredients separately and heat until the solids are dissolved. Cool Part E to 450C and add Part F to it. Mix until the polymer is well dispersed. With Vigorous agitation, add Parts E + F to the batch. Mix for 20 minutes. Add the Part G ingredients in the order shown and mix until uniform.


69. Sunscreen Cream (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A BENTONE GEL TN 5.00

B Titanium Dioxide(and)C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate (TioveilFIN)

12.50

Sorbitan Stearate 2.20

C Cetearyl Alcohol 3.00 C12-15 Alkyl Benzoate 8.00 Polysorbate 60 3.30

D Propylene Glycol 8.00 Disodium EDTA 0.15 Demineralized Water 57.45

E Fragrance 0.20 Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol

(Merguard1190) 0.20

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Thoroughly disperse Part B in Part A. Add the Part C ingredients, mix and begin heating to 75-800C. Combine the Part D ingredients separately and heat them 75-800C.Using a high shear mixer combine Parts A + B +C and Part D. Homogenize until uniform. Transfer the batch to a propeller stirrer and begin cooling. At 300C or below, add the Part E ingredients and mix until uniform.


70. Sun Block Lotion (Rhodia, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 70.40 Glycerin 4.65

B Magnesium Aluminum Silicate (Veegum F) 1.50 RHODIGEL EZ 0.15 Cetyl Alcohol NF 3.10

C Isopropyl Myristate 3.25 Dimethicone 2.95 Glyceryl Stearate SE (DermalcareGMS/SE) 3.00

D Octyl Dimethyl PABA 7.00 Benzophenone-3 (Syntase62) 3.00

E Fragrance, Color, Preservative q.s. Total Note 1

Note 1: The ingredients do not total 100% but are as presented in the supplier’s literature. Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Dry blend the Part B ingredients, slowly add them to Part A and mix with good agitation until the batch is smooth and uniform. Begin heating Parts A + B to 700C. Combine the Part C ingredients separately and heat them to 70-750C. Mix until all the ingredients have melted. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Mix 15 minutes. Begin cooling with moderate agitation. Combine the Part D ingredients separately, heating gently, if necessary, to obtain a clear solution. When the batch temperature cools to 550C, add Part D with good mixing. When the batch cools to 400C, add the Part E ingredient and mix until uniform.


71. Waterproof Sunscreen (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACULYN 33 2.00 ACULYN 22 2.00 Propylene Glycol 1.00 Isopropyl Myristate 5.00 Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 344) 1.00 Cetearyl Alcohol 1.00

B DEA Cetyl Phosphate (Amphisol) 4.00 Benzophenone-3 6.00 Octyl Methoxycinnamate 7.50 Macadamia Nut Oil 5.00 Tocopheryl Acetate 0.05

C Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and heat them to 750C. Combine the Part B ingredients in a separate vessel and heat them to 750C. Add Part B to Part A with good agitation. Cool the batch and add Part C. Mix until uniform


72. Waterproof Sunscreen (Süd-Chemie Rheologicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 51.07 PURE GEL HH 2.50

B Sodium Chloride 0.50 Phenoxyethanol(and)Methylparaben(and)

Butylparaben(and)Ethylparaben(and)Propylparaben 0.60

Polyglyceryl-4-Isostearte(and)Cetyl

Dimethicone(and) Hexyl Laurate

5.00

Isononyl Isononanoate 6.00 C Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 344) 7.50 Cetyl Dimethicone 3.00 Methyl Glucose Sesquistearate 0.50 Dioctyl Malate 2.00

D

Micronized Titanium Dioxide(and)Isononyl Isononanoate(and)Stearic Acid(and) Aluminum Hydroxide

21.33

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients using a propeller mixer and mix until uniform. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A. Combine the Part C ingredients in a separate vessel, heat them to 750C, then cool to 650C. Using an homogenizer, add Part D to Part C and homogenize until uniform. Transfer Parts C + D to a propeller mixer and add Parts A + B. Mix until uniform


73. Sunscreen Cream (Southern Clay Products) Formulation


B GELWHITE GP 2.00

C Propylene Glycol 3.00 Triethanolamine 1.00 Mineral Oil 5.00 Isopropyl Myristate 5.00

D Acetylated Lanolin Alcohol 5.00 Stearic Acid 3.00 Cetyl Alcohol 2.00 Octyl Methoxycinnamate (ParsolMCX) 7.00


Mixing Procedure Slowly add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Heat the batch to 750C. In a separate vessel, combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 750C. Add Part D to the batch and mix until smooth and uniform. Continue mixing and begin cooling the batch. At 500C or below, add Part E and mix until uniform.


I. Other Personal Care Formulations 74. Non-Alcoholic Splash Toner (The Dow Chemical Company) Formulation


B Propylene Glycol 2.00 Methylparaben 0.15 Ginseng Extract 2.00 Horse Chestnut Extract 2.00

C METHOCEL 40-202 0.20 Sodium PCA 1.00 PPG-5-Ceteth-20 (ProcetylAWS) 0.10 Quaternium-15 (Dowicil 200) 0.10

D Polysorbate 20 1.00 Perfume Oil 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part B ingredients, warming if necessary, until the solid dissolves. Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown, mixing each well between additions. Combine the Part D ingredients in a separate vessel and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform.


75. Alcohol-Free Cologne (B. F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A DMDM Hydantoin 0.30 Oleth-10 (Brij 97) 0.30 Cyclomethicone (Dow Corning 245) 4.00

B Fragrance 2.00 Isostearyl Benzoate 0.50 PEMULEN TR-2 0.15

C Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and) Methylparaben(and)Propylparaben

1.00

D Triethanolamine 0.12

E Disodium EDTA 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix until uniform. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients. Mix until the fourth ingredient is completely dispersed. With moderate agitation, add Part B to Part A. Mix for 10-20 minutes. Add Part C and mix until uniform. Add Part D and mix vigorously to produce a smooth emulsion. Add Part E and mix until uniform.


76. Self-Tanning Emulsion, SPF10 (Laporte Absorbents) Formulation


B LAPONITE XLG 0.40 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F) 0.60

C Propylene Glycol 2.00 Disodium EDTA 0.10 Octyl Methoxycinnamate 7.50 Benzophenone-3 6.00 Hydrogenated Polyisobutene 2.00

D Octyl Palmitate 5.00 Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 3.00 Dimethicone 1.00 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 2.00 Deionized Water 8.00 Copper Acetyl Tyrosanate Methylsilanol 2.00

E Sodium Metabisulfite 0.30 Dihydroxyacetone 5.00 Propylene Glycol(and)Diazolidinyl Urea(and)


F Lactic Acid (8.8%) to pH 4.5-5.0 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse the Part B ingredients in Part A. Heat the mixture slowly to 750C. In a separate vessel, combine the Part C ingredients and heat to 750C. Add Part C to Part A + B and mix until uniform. Combine the Part D ingredients in a separate vessel and heat them to 750C. Add Part D to the batch and mix until uniform. Cool the batch to 450C and add the Part E and Part F ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until uniform.


(Laporte Absorbents) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 4.50 Cetyl Alcohol 11.00

A PEG-40 Stearate 1.50 Mineral Oil 2.00 Kukui Nut Oil 0.25 Octyldodecanol 3.00

B Deionized Water 45.08

C LAPONITE XLG 0.36 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 9H4F) 0.56

D Quaternium-15 0.10 Tetrasodium EDTA 0.25 Deionized Water 18.20

E Thioglycolic Acid (80%) 4.50 Calcium Hydroxide 5.40 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 3.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix while heating to 750C. Disperse the Part C ingredients in Part B, mix until uniform and heat the mixture to 750C. Add Parts B + C to Part A and mix until homogeneous. Combine the Part D ingredients and add them to the batch. Mix until uniform. Begin cooling the batch. In a separate vessel, combine the Part E ingredients. When the batch cools to 450C, add Part E to the batch and mix until uniform.

77. Depilatory


78. Gel Depilatory (National Starch and Chemical Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Distilled Water 37.60

A STRUCTURE 2001 6.90 Tetrasodium EDTA (Versene 100) 0.13 Distilled Water 40.00

B Sodium Hydroxide 3.63 Calcium Hydroxide 0.27 Potassium Hydroxide 0.70

C Thioglycolic Acid 4.37 Glycerin 6.40 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients with good agitation. In a separate vessel, combine the Part B ingredients and mix until dispersion is complete. Add Part B to Part A and mix until uniform. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B and mix until uniform.


79. Peppermint Foot Balm (RHEOX, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Cetearyl Alcohol(and)Ceteareth-20 5.00

A Cetyl Alcohol 3.00 Caprylic/Capric Triglyceride (Crodamol GTCC) 8.00

B BENTONE GEL LIO 2.00

C Methyl Pyrrolidone Carboxylate (Questice) 0.80 Demineralized Water 73.20

D Aloe Vera Gel (10:1) 1.50 Glycerin 5.00 Methyl Gluceth-10 0.20

E Propylene Glycol(and)Lichen Extract (Deo-Usnate)

0.20

Methyldibromoglutaronitrile(and)Dipropylene Glycol

(Merguard1190) 0.20

F Color 0.60 Fragrance 0.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients. Thoroughly disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous. Heat Parts A + B +C to 75-800C. Combine the Part D ingredients and heat them to 75-800C. Using high shear mixing, mix Part D with Parts A + B + C. Homogenize until uniform. Transfer the batch to a propeller mixer and begin cooling it. At 400C, add Part E and mix until uniform. At 300C, add the Part F ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


80. AHA Clarifying Face Mask (R. T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM HS 7.00 Glycerin 4.00 Butylene Glycol 3.00

C Kaolin (Vanclay) 30.00 Talc 5.00 Cocoyl Sarcosine (VansealCS) 5.00

D Preservative q.s.

E Glycolic Acid 7.00

F Fragrance q.s.

G Triethanolamine 3.25 Citric Acid to pH 3.5-3.9 q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Sift Part B into Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Mix for approximately 30 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Add Parts D, E and F in the order shown and mix each until uniform. Adjust the pH of the batch with the Part G ingredients.

Household/Institutional Formulations 425

4. Household/Institutional Formulations

A. Air Fresheners

1. Air Freshener Gel (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B LAPONITE RD 1.40 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC

9H4) 0.60

C Polyethylene Glycol 1.00 DMDM Hydantoin 0.20 Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A with good agitation. Mix for 30 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until uniform.


2. Water-Based Air Freshener (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B PEMULEN 1622 0.40 CARBOPOL EZ-2 2.00

C Fragrance 40.00

D Triethanolamine (99%) q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B ingredients into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous. Add Part D and mix until homogeneous.


3. Air Deodorant (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B PEMULEN 1622 0.20

C Meelium (Prentiss) 4.00 Mineral Spirits 6.00

D Polysorbate 80 0.25

E Triethanolamine (99%) 0.20

F Polyacrylic Acid (Good-Rite K-752) 0.13 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Premix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B with good mixing. With slow agitation, add Part D to the batch. Neutralize with Part E and mix until homogeneous. With slow agitation, add Part F to the batch and mix until homogeneous.


B. Dish, Cutlery and Utensil Detergents

4. Non-Chlorinated Warewash Detergent (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % ACUSOL 810 (18%) 11.00 ACUSOL 445N 4.00

A Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 43.00 Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate 10.00 Potassium Silicate (29%) 29.00 Alkyl Amine Ethoxylate (Triton CF-32) 3.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown.


5. Hand Dishwashing Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Polyacrylic Acid (Good-Rite K-7058)) 4.00

D Alphasulfomethylester (Alphastep® ML-40) 27.03 Triethanolamine (99%) 5.50

E Sodium Laureth Sulfate (28%) 17.86 Cocamide DEA (Ninol® 11-CM) 2.00 Total Note 1

Note 1: These amounts do not total 100% but are presented as published in the technical literature of the supplier. Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 40-50 0C. Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. With slow agitation to avoid foam generation, add Part D to the batch. Neutralize with Part E and mix until homogeneous. Add the remaining Part E ingredients to the batch and continue mixing until homogeneous.


6. Hand Dishwashing Paste (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 672 1.00

C Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft® S-100) 17.00

D Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 5.00 Sodium Silicate (52%) 7.50

E Sodium Tripolyphosphate 15.00

F Sodium Carbonate 5.00 Sodium Olefinsulfonate (Bioterge® AS-40) 8.00

G Fragrance q.s. Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix until completely dissolved. Heating will speed the process. Add the Part F and ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Cool the batch and add the Part G ingredients. Mix until uniform.


7. Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent - Gel Type (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 39.40 Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate 15.00

B LAPONITE RDS 2.00 Potassium Carbonate 2.00 Sodium Silicate 30.00

C Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 2.60 Sodium N-Decyl Diphenoxidedisulfonate

(Dowfax® 3B2) 0.50

Sodium Hypochlorite (15%) 8.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for one hour. Add Part B and mix for 20 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.


8. Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent - Gel Type II (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 40.20 LAPONITE RDS 1.00

B Stearic Acid 0.40 Aluminum Stearate 0.40


D Sodium Silicate 7.50 Sodium Hypochlorite (5.25%) 22.00

E Sodium Carbonate 7.60 Sodium Tripolyphosphate 17.50

F Sodium N-Decyl Diphenoxidedisulfonate (Dowfax 3B2)

0.80

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients and mix while heating to 650 C. Add Part C and mix for 15 minutes. Cool to 300 C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix for 10 minutes and add the Part E ingredients. Mix for 40 minutes and add Part F. Mix until homogeneous.


9. Automatic Dishwashing Gel With Chlorine Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 672 1.25

C Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 5.00 Potassium Silicate (39%) 15.00

D Potassium Carbonate 5.00 Sodium Tripolyphosphate 20.00

E Sodium Hypochlorite (12.5%) 8.00 Sodium N-Decyl Diphenoxidedisulfonate

(Dowfax 3B2) 1.00

F Fragrance q.s. Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good mixing. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until completely dissolved. Heating will speed the process. Add the Part E ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part F ingredients and mix until homogeneous.


10. Liquid Automatic Dishwasher Detergent (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VAN GEL ES 4.00

C Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate 10.00 Sodium Tripolyphosphate 20.00

D Sodium Metasilicate, Anhydrous 2.00 Sodium Hypochlorite (12.5%) 8.00

E Sodium Xylenesulfonate 2.25 Deceth-4-Phosphate 0.75 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Heat Part A to 55-600C. Slowly add Part B while mixing with an homogenizer at high speed. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until the solids are dissolved. Add the Part D ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Slow the homogenizer to avoid foaming and add the Part E ingredients. Mix until homogeneous. Avoid air entrapment.


C. Fabric Detergents 11. Alkaline Laundry Detergent - Emulsion Type (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 42.00 ACUSOL 820 2.00

A ACUSOL 810 4.00 ACUSOL 445 2.00 Nonylphenol Ethoxylate9-10 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 40.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown using subsurface agitation. Avoid high speed mixing to avoid air entrapment.


12. Alkaline Laundry Detergent - Slurry Type (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 810 4.00 Sodium Tripolyphosphate (STPP) 10.00 ACUSOL 445 2.00 Nonylphenol Ethoxylate9-10 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 40.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown using subsurface agitation. Allow sufficient time for dissolution of STPP before adding Sodium Hydroxide.

Household/Institutional Formulations 437 13. Industrial and Institutional Laundry Detergent - I (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 82.50 ACUSOL 820 2.5

B Nonylphenol Ethoxylate10 5.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 10.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous 14. Industrial and Institutional Laundry Detergent - II (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation



Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous


15. Industrial and Institutional Laundry Detergent - III (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation



Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous


16. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A Nonylphenol Ethoxylate9 5.00 ACUSOL 810 5.00 ACUSOL 445N 3.00

B Sodium Silicate (38%) 8.40 Sodium Hydroxide 55.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous. Add the Part B ingredients and mix until homogeneous.


17. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent - Emulsion I (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 810 4.00 ACUSOL 445N 2.00 Nonylphenol Ethoxylate9 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 40.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous. 18. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent – Emulsion II (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 810 4.00 ACUSOL 445N 2.00 Nonylphenol Ethoxylate9 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 40.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous.


19. High Alkaline Commercial Laundry Detergent - Slurry (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 810 4.00 ACUSOL 445N 2.00 Nonylphenol Ethoxylate9 10.00

B Sodium Tripolyphosphate 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 40.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using subsurface agitation, in the order shown, until homogeneous. Heat the mixture to 300C, add the Part B ingredients and mix until they are dispersed/dissolved and the batch is homogeneous.


20. Industrial Heavy Duty Laundry Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol® 25-7) 18.00 Sodium Alkylbenzenesulfonate (Biosoft D-62) 5.50

D Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 2.00 Sodium Metasilicate (Anhydrous) 5.00

E Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate 20.00


Mixing Procedure Slowly sift the Part B into Part A with agitation of sufficient speed to create a good vortex. Continue mixing until the dispersion is lump-free and homogeneous. With slow mixing, add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. With slow mixing, add the Part D, E and F ingredients, in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.

Household/Institutional Formulations 443 21. Thickened Heavy Duty Laundry Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL ETD 2691 0.20 Deionized Water 11.58 Monoethanolamine 2.50

C 1,2-Propanediol 5.00 C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 23-6.5) Citric Acid (50%) 18.61 Alkylbenzenesulfonate (Biosoft S-100) 24.11

D Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 2.50

E Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 15.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Separately combine the Part C ingredients. With slow mixing, add Part D to Part C and mix until homogeneous. Add Parts A + B to Parts C + D and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix for 5 minutes until homogeneous.


22. Laundry Pre-spotter Sprayable Liquid (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 25-3) 10.00 C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 25-6.5) 5.00 Tetrasodium EDTA 0.50

D Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.15 Fragrance q.s. Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.


23. Carpet Shampoo (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 78.00 LAPONITE RD 2.00

B Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate 5.00 Tetrasodium EDTA (40%) 5.00

C Sodium Carbonate 5.00 Disodium Caproamphodipropionate(and)

Capryloamphodipropionate 5.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add Part B and mix for 10 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown. Mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.


24. Rug Shampoo Concentrate (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A VEEGUM T 0.70 Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23) 0.30

B Purified Water 58.00 Purified Water 4.85

C SMA 2625 Resin 0.90 Ammonium Hydroxide (28%) 0.25

D Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (29%) 20.00 Sodium Lauroyl Sarcosinate

(Vanseal® NALS-30) 15.00


Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part A ingredients and add them to Part B while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Separately mix the Part C ingredients until clear and uniform. Check the pH and adjust to 9.7, if necessary. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, with slow mixing to avoid foaming. Avoid incorporating air. Mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous. Directions for use: Dilute one parts of the concentrate with nine parts water and apply to carpet. Vacuum up foam when dry.


D. Hard Surface Cleaners and Polishes

Basin, Tub and Tile Cleaners

25. Acid Bowl Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM 0.90 Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23) 0.45 Tetrasodium EDTA (40%) 1.00

C Oleyl Hydroxyethyl Imidazoline (MonazolineO)

1.00

Hydrochloric Acid (37%) 20.00 Benzalkonium Chloride (BarquatMB-80) 1.25 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


26. Toilet Bowl Cleaner with Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 676 1.25

C Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 5.00 Potassium Silicate (39%) 5.00

D Potassium Carbonate 5.00 Sodium Hypochlorite (12.5%) 8.00

E Amine Oxide (Barlox12) 10.00


Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D, E and F ingredients, in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous before adding the next one.


27. Acidic Toilet Bowl Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 43.00 Citric Acid (50%) 50.00

B CARBOPOL 674 2.00

C Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft S-100) 2.00 Sodium Dodecyldiphenyloxide Disulfonate

(45%) 3.00

D Fragrance q.s. Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients and mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous before adding the next one.


28. Hard Surface Liquid Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VAN GEL ES 1.20 Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23) 0.40

C Calcium Carbonate (-100 Mesh) 50.00

D Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonate (CalsoftL-40)

5.00


Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C, D and E in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


29. Bathroom Cleaner with Disinfectant (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VAN GEL B 1.00 Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23) 0.35 Diatomaceous Earth (Superfloss) 5.00

C Tetrasodium EDTA (40%) 2.75 Sodium o-phenylphenate 0.25

D Sodium Dodecylbenzenesulfonate (CalsoftL-40)

3.00

Butyl Cellosolve 1.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.


30. Liquid Cleanser with Bleach (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VAN GEL B 2.25 Dicalite 10.00

C Sodium Carbonate 4.50 Sodium Hypochlorite (5.25%) 20.00 (SiponLSB) 1.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one.


31. Liquid Tile Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VAN GEL B 1.50 Sodium Polymethacrylate (Darvan No.7) 2.00

C Octoxynol 13 (Triton X-102) 5.00 (Sulfamin 85) 5.00 Pine Oil 5.00

D Kaolin (Kaopolite) 5.00


Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients, in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous before adding the next one. Slowly add Part D to the batch and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous.


32. Abrasive Cleaner Without Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 52.10 Ethanol 2.00

B CARBOPOL 674 0.60 Deionized Water 10.00

C Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 1.00 Sodium Bicarbonate 1.20 Calcium Carbonate (Georgia Marble White

#8) 30.00

D C12-15 Linear Alcohol (3 moles EO) 2.50 Cocamide DEA (Ninol11-CM) 0.60

E Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and add them to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.


33. Calcium Carbonate Abrasive Cleaner Without Bleach (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation




D C12-15 Linear Alcohol (3 moles EO) 1.50 Sodium Alkylbenzenesulfonate (Nacconol

90G) 0.50

E Calcium Carbonate (Georgia Marble White

#8) 30.00

F Fragrance q.s. Total Note 1

Note 1: These amounts do not total 100%. but are presented as published in the technical literature of the supplier. Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D and E ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous. Add Part F, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.


34. Phosphate-Free Soft Scrub (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 28.25 LAPONITE RD 2.00

B Sodium Carbonate (25% Solution) 1.30

C Sodium Hydroxide (50% Solution) 1.50 Sodium Hypochlorite (15% Solution) 8.00

D Calcium Carbonate 25.00

E Carbomer 695 (1.5% Solution) 32.75

F Sodium N-Decyldiphenoxide Disulfonate (Dowfax 3B2)

1.20

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Separately prepare Part E solution according to the manufacturers instructions. Mix the Part A ingredients for 15 minutes and add Part B. Mix for 5 minutes and add the Part C ingredients. Mix for 5 minutes and add Part D. Mix for 5 minutes and add Part E. Stir slowly for 5 minutes and add Part F. Mix for 3 minutes.


35. Tub and Tile Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B Sodium Silicate 5.00

C Sodium Hydroxide (50% Solution) 2.60 Sodium Hypochlorite (5.25% Solution) 22.00

D Sodium Carbonate 7.60

E Sodium Tripolyphosphate 17.50

F Sodium N-Decyldiphenoxide Disulfonate (Dowfax 3B2)

0.80

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes and add Part B. Mix for 5 minutes and add the Part C ingredients. Mix for 5 minutes and add Part D. Mix for 10 minutes and add Part E. Stir for 10 minutes and add Part F. Mix for 3 minutes.


36. Liquid Abrasive Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 44.40 Silica (U.S. Silica Co. Sil-Co Sil 53) 50.00

A ACUSOL 820 1.50 Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate 3.00 Nonoxynol 9 0.25 Sodium Hydroxide (10%) 0.85 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown. 37. Abrasive Calcium Carbonate Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 51.50 Calcium Carbonate (Ducal40) 42.00

A C12-14 Alcohol Ethoxylate (7 moles EO) 5.00 ACUSOL 820 1.00 Bentonite (Laviothix P1) 0.50 Diethanolamine to pH 9.7 q.s. Total 100.00



Flooring Cleaners

38. Floor Tile Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 505N 5.70 Nonoxynol 9 3.40 Sodium Silicate (Starso) 23.60 Total 100.00



39. Low-Foam, Machine Floor Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 53.27 ACUSOL 810 8.33 Potassium Hydroxide 3.40

A Tetrapotassium Pyrophosphate 22.00 Trisodium Phosphate (anhydrous) 5.00 Potassium Silicate (Kasil #6) 5.00 TritonDF-12 3.00 Total

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown. Use Instructions: Dilute to 0.2 - 0.5% in water


Glass Cleaners 41. Clear, Thickened Glass/Multi-Surface Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Purified Water 87.50 LAPONITE RD 1.00 Isopropyl Alcohol 5.00

B Butyl Cellosolve 5.00 Ammonium Hydroxide (27%) 1.00 Ammonium Laureth Sulfate (SterolCS330) 0.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


41a. Glass/Window Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Isopropyl Alcohol 5.00 Ammonium Hydroxide 0.20

D Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft S-100) 0.25 Propylene Glycol Methyl Ether (Dowanol

PM) 2.00

E Fragrance q.s. Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B. Mix each until homogeneous. With minimal agitation, add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.


Metal Cleaners and Polishes

42. Liquid Silver Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM 2.00 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC

7MT) 0.30

C Diatomaceous Earth (Snowfloss) 15.00

D Octoxynol 13 (Triton X-102) 5.00

E (Vanchem NATD) 0.50

F Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part C slowly and mix until homogeneous. With slow agitation, add Part D to the batch and mix until homogeneous. Add Parts E and F in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


43. Silver and Metal Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Dimethicone (SF96, 350cstk.) 1.00

A DC “20” Release Coating 2.00 Stoddard Solvent 20.00 Lauric Acid 2.00

B Deionized Water 43.48 Morpholine 0.86

C Deionized Water 16.00 CARBOPOL EZ-2 0.35

D Ammonium Hydroxide 0.31

E Kaolin (Kaopolite) 14.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients using a high shear mixer. Add the Part B ingredients while continuing to mix. Separately mix the Part C ingredients. When the resin is completely wetted out add Part C to Parts A + B with good agitation. Add Parts D and E in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.


44. Stainless Steel Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B Calcium Carbonate (ECC Micro-White 100) 20.00 Cyclomethicone (SF 1202) 2.00

C Octoxynol 13 5.00

D Ammonium Hydroxide (28%) 2.00 Preservative 0.10 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Heat Part A to 650C and add the Part B ingredients. Mix for 10 minutes and add Part C with slow mixing. Cool the batch to 250C and add the Part D ingredients in the order shown, mixing each until homogeneous.


45. Copper and Brass Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VAN GEL B 1.50

C Diatomaceous Earth (Superfloss) 15.00 Ammonium Hydroxide 1.00 Mineral Spirits 30.00

D Oleic Acid 8.00 Oleamide DEA (Witcamide511C) 1.50


Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add the Part C ingredients slowly and mix until homogeneous. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and mix until clear and homogeneous. Add Part D to the batch and mix until a homogeneous emulsion is formed. Add Part E and mix until homogeneous.


47. Chrome Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized Water 39.25 Morpholine 1.39

B Pumice 14.00 Diatomaceous Earth (Snow Floss) 9.25 Dimethicone (SF96, 350 cstk.) 1.85

C Pine Oil 0.46 Oleic Acid 1.85 Mineral Spirits 24.50

D TEA Lauryl Sulfate 2.30 Cocamide DEA (StandamidPD) 0.50

E Deionized Water 4.46 CARBOPOL EZ-2 0.19 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. Add the Part B Ingredients with rapid agitation. Mix the Part C ingredients in a separate vessel and slowly add the mixture to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. Add the Part D ingredients to the batch and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, mix the Part E ingredients until the resin is completely wetted out. Add this dispersion to the batch and mix thoroughly.


Other Hard-Surface Cleaners and Polishes 47. Porcelain Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B Octoxynol 9 (Triton X-100) 4.50 Octoxynol 13 (Triton X-102) 4.50

C Carnauba Wax 1.90 Mineral Oil 2.70

D Deodorized Mineral Spirits 9.00 Preservative 0.20 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients and mix for 10 minutes. Heat the batch to 850C. Separately mix the Part C ingredients and heat them to 850C. Mix Part C with Parts A + B for 10 minutes. Cool to 250C and add the Part D ingredients. Mix until uniform.


48. Marble Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL EZ-2 0.20

C Nonoxynol 9 (Igepal CO-630) 3.70 Mineral Spirits 15.00

D Diatomaceous Earth 6.00 Triethanolamine 0.30 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A by simply dumping the resin in the water and mixing until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C and mix with moderate agitation. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


49. Detergent Resistant Auto Polish (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM 1.00

C Kaolin (Kaopolite SF) 10.00 Mineral Spirits 35.60

D Dow Corning 536 Fluid 0.70 Dow Corning 531 Fluid 4.20 Oleamide DEA (Witcamide 511) 4.00

E Carnauba Wax Emulsion (C-340) 10.00

F Preservative q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Add Part B to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Part C slowly and mix until homogeneous. Separately combine the Part D ingredients and mix until clear and homogeneous. Add Part E to Part D and mix until homogeneous. Add Parts A + B +C to Parts D + E and mix until homogeneous. Add Part F and mix until homogeneous.

Household/Institutional Formulations 471 50. Liquid Car Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


A Triethanolamine 0.20 Wax Emulsion 2.50 Morpholine 2.00 Dimethicone (SF96, 350 cstk.) 1.50

B Oleic Acid 2.50 Kerosene 10.00 Mineral Spirits 6.00

C Deionized Water 19.70 CARBOPOL EZ-2 0.30 Isopropyl Alcohol 0.40

D Mineral Spirits 5.00 Silicone Polymer (SF 1706) 1.50 Silicone Polymer (SF 1705) 2.10

E Kaolin (Kaopolite) 8.50 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients. In a separate vessel, mix the Part B ingredients. Add Part B to Part A with vigorous agitation. In a separate vessel, mix the Part C ingredients until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C to Parts A + B and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, mix the Part D ingredients until homogeneous and add them to the batch. Slowly add Part E and mix until homogeneous.


51. Boat Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % A Deionized water 37.80


C Morpholine 2.50 Dimethicone (SF96, 350 cstk.) 2.00 Silicone Fluid (Viscasil, 10,000 cstk.) 1.50

D Oleic Acid 2.50 Mineral Spirits 10.00 Glycol/Butylene Glycol Montanate

(Hoechst Wax E) 6.00

E Mineral Spirits 5.00 Silicone Polymer (SF 1706) 1.50

F Kaolin (Kaopolite) 8.50 Total Note 1

Note 1: These amounts do not total 100% but are presented as published in the technical literature of the supplier. Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A by simply dumping the resin in the water and mixing until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C to Parts A + B with good agitation and heat to 80-850C. In a separate vessel, mix the Part D ingredients and heat them to 90-950C and mix until the wax melts and the mixture is homogeneous Add Part D to the batch with good mixing Cool to 60-650C. Combine the Part E ingredients in a separate vessel and add them to the batch with high shear mixing. Slowly add Part F and mix until homogeneous.


52. Furniture Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C Triethanolamine 0.20 Oxidized Polyethylene(and)Oxidized

Microcrystalline Wax ( Cardis 36) 0.25

Montan Acid Wax (Hoechst Wax S) 0.25 D Oleic Acid 0.08 Morpholine 0.10 Deionized Water

E Silicone Emulsion (SM2133) 4.00 Silicone Emulsion (SM2135) 2.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A by simply dumping the resin in the water and mixing until the resin is completely wetted out. Add Part C and mix until homogeneous. In a separate vessel, mix the first three ingredients of Part D. With mild stirring heat these ingredients to 96-1000C. When melted add the remaining Part D ingredients in the order shown (the water should be added at 950C). Continue mixing while cooling to 450C. Add Part D to Parts A + B + C with good mixing. Add the Part E ingredients with slow agitation and mix until homogeneous.


53. Solvent Degreaser (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C d-Limonene 10.00 Propylene Glycol Methyl Ether (Dowanol PM) 2.00

D Alkylbenzenesulfonic Acid (Biosoft S-100) 2.00 C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol 25-6.5) 1.50

E Isopropyl Alcohol 2.50

F Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 0.50

G Color q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B. Mix until homogeneous. With minimal agitation, add the Part D ingredients and mix each until homogeneous. Add Parts E, F and G (if desired) in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


54. Emulsion Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 820 1.70 Deodorized Kerosene 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 0.20 Total 100.00



Mildew Cleaners

55. Mold and Mildew Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 672 1.00

C Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 2.00 Sodium Metasilicate, Pentahydrate 0.50

D Sodium Caprylyl Sulfonate (BioTerge® PAS-8S)

5.00

E Sodium Hypochlorite (15%) 7.00

F Color q.s. Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add the Part C ingredients to Parts A + B. Mix each until homogeneous. With minimal agitation, add Part D and mix until homogeneous. Add Part E with slow agitation and mix until homogeneous. Add Part F, if desired, and mix until homogeneous.


56. Mildew Remover with Bleach (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B Sodium Silicate 2.00

C Sodium Hypochlorite (15%) 10.00 Sodium N-Decyl Diphenyloxide Disulfonate

(Dowfax 3B2) 1.00

Total 100.00 Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add Part B and mix for 5 minutes. Add the Part C ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.


E. Oven and Grill Cleaners

57. Alkaline Grill Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A Caprylyl/Capryl Glucoside (Oramix CG-110)

2.00

ACUSOL 820 1.20 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 16.00 Total 100.00


58. Oven, Grill and Drain Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 820 4.20 Nonoxynol 9 0.50 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 20.00 Total 100.00



59. High Caustic Oven Cleaner (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation


B CARBOPOL 674 2.00

C Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 22.22

D Propylene Glycol Methyl Ether (Dowanol PM)

3.00

E C8-16 Alkyl Polyglucoside (Glucopon 425CS) 3.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Part C to Parts A + B. Mix continuously until homogeneous. Add Part D and E in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


60. Gelled Oven Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 3.36 Sodium Silicate 2.40 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Add the Part B ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.

61. Thixotropic Oven Cleaner (Southern Clay Products Company) Formulation


B Potassium Hydroxide (45%) 16.00

C Butyl Diglycol 6.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients for 20 minutes. Slowly add Part B and mix for 10 minutes. Add Part C and mix for 5 minutes.


62. Caustic/Amine Grill Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Purified Water 66.50 ACUSOL 820 5.00 Jorphox KCAO 3.00

A Jorquest 100 2.00 Monoethanolamine 3.00 Sodium Metasilicate Pentahydrate 0.50 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 20.00 Total 100.00



63. Heavy Duty Oven and Grill Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM T 0.75 Xanthan Gum (Rhodopol 23) 0.25

C Sodium Cocoamphoacetate (Monateric CM-36S)

2.00

D Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 20.00

E Propellant q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Add Parts C and D in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous. If aerosol packaging is to be used, add Part E during packaging.


F. Waterless Hand Cleaners 64. Waterless Hand Cleaner (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VAN GEL B 1.70 Carboxymethylcellulose Sodium (CMC 7MT) 0.30

C Potassium Hydroxide 1.00 Purified Water 3.00 Oleic Acid 10.00

D Mineral Oil 10.00 Deodorized Kerosene 30.00


Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while mixing with maximum available shear. Continue mixing until smooth and uniform. Mix the Parts C ingredients separately and them to Parts A + B. Mix until uniform Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix each until homogeneous.


65. Ringing Gel Waterless Hand Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A Sodium Lauryl Sulfate (28%) 10.70 Deodorized Kerosene 38.00 Mineral Oil 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 0.20 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order listed.


66. Waterless Hand Cleaner - Thick Gel (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation



C d-Limonene 25.00 Propylene Glycol 2.00

D Glycerin 3.00 C12-15 Linear Alcohol (Neodol® 25-7) 0.50 Diazolidinyl Urea (Germaben II-E) 1.00

E Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.50

F Pumice 10.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Slowly sift Part B into Part A while mixing at 800 rpm. Mix for approximately 15 minutes or until the slurry is homogeneous. Add Parts A + B to Part C with moderate agitation and continue mixing for 10 minutes. Mix the Part D ingredients separately and add them to the batch. Add Part E and check to make sure the pH reaches 5-6. Add Part F and mix until homogeneous.


G. Other Household/Institutional Formulations 67. Liquid Drain Cleaner (Rohm and Haas Company) Formulation


A ACUSOL 820 2.50 Octoxynol 9 0.10 Sodium Hydroxide (50%) 10.00 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Mix the Part A ingredients in the order shown. 68. Rust Removing Polish (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation




D Gluconic Acid (50%) 17.86 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Disperse Part B in Part A. Add Part C with good agitation. Add Part D and mix until homogeneous.


69. Mosquito Repellant Cream (R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.) Formulation


B VEEGUM Ultra 0.40 Carbomer 940 (Carbopol 940) 0.40

C N,N-Diethyl-m-Toluamide 15.00 Glyceryl Stearate(and)PEG-100 Stearate 5.00

D Sodium Hydroxide Solution to pH 5.5 q.s. Preservative Dye, Fragrance q.s. Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Dry blend the Part B ingredients and add them to Part A while stirring with a propeller mixer at 1800 rpm. Mix for 30 minutes. Mix the Part C ingredients separately and heat to 500 C. Heat Parts A + B to 500 C. Add Part C to Parts A + B slowly while mixing at 800 rpm. Continue mixing while cooling to 350 C. Add the Part D ingredients in the order shown and mix until homogeneous.


70. Clear Gel Insect Repellant (B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals) Formulation

Ingredient Wt. % Deionized Water 47.00 Ethyl Alcohol (SD-40) 31.60

A PEG-400 10.00 N,N-Diethyl-m-Toluamide 10.00 Sodium Hydroxide (18%) 0.40

B CARBOPOL Ultrez 10 1.79 Total 100.00

Mixing Procedure Combine the Part A ingredients and mix until uniform. Disperse Part B in Part A with vigorous agitation. Heat to 500 C and mix at 1000-1500 rpm until a clear gel forms.

489

Appendix A Suppliers of Viscometers

and Other Rheological Instruments

Included below is a partial listing of the many worldwide suppliers of viscometers and rheological instruments. Where available, some of the types of viscometric equipment they manufacture or distribute are included as well as the brand names employed and contact information supplied. ACA Systems Tietotie 4 83700 Polvijarvi, Finland 358-(0)208 33 2 151, FAX: 358-(0)208 33 2 151 E-mail: [email protected] www.aca.fi ACAV Ultra High Shear Rate Viscometer for optimizing coating performance in paper plants and suppliers of coating chemicals. The ACAV A2 uses a piston driven mechanical principle to provide a complete and precise shear rate analysis for coating rheology. Argonne National Laboratory www.et.anl.gov/sinde/labs/UTlab/UTVvsco.html Non-intrusive real time, on-line viscometer. Ultrasonic type. Applications for food industry, plastic and polymer industries, petroleum industry and laboratory benchtop.


Appendix A, continued Automation Products Inc. 3030 Max Roy Street Houston, Texas 77008-9981, USA (800) 231-2062 or (713) 869-0361 FAX: (713) 869-7332 Dynatrol, on-line, continuous viscometer for coatings, adhesives paints, glues, inks, crude oil, fuel oils, emulsions, polymers, resins, gravies, puddings, gelatins, etc. Berkeley MicroInstruments, Inc. 1305 South 46th Street, Building 164 Richmond, CA 94804, USA (510) 231-5710 or (510) 231-5711 FAX 510-231-5711 www.berkeleymicro.com Microviscometer model BMV105 (Ultrasonic Type). Solid state, continuous real-time measurement. Bohlin Instruments UK Bohlin USA 44(0)12 85 64 44 07 (609) 655-4447 FAX: 44(0)12 85 64 43 14 FAX: (609) 655-1475 www.bohlin.co.uk Bohlin Germany 49(0) 70 41 96 490 FAX: 49(0)70 41 96 49 29 Rheogoniometer VOR/VORM for rotational and dynamic testing on fluids, semi-solids and solids. Asphalt/Bitumen testing-DSR/BDR- a complete rheometer system for evaluation of asphalt over a wide range of temperatures and frequencies. Visco-88 viscometer uses standard cup and bob (coaxial cylinder) or cone/plate measuring systems.

Appendix A 491

Appendix A, continued Brinkman Instruments, Inc. www.brinkmann.com/visc_capviscometers.html Capillary viscometers. Ubbelohde and Cannon-Fenske type. Also micro-Ubbelohde, micro-Ostwald or Ubbelohde dilution type viscometers. Brookfield Engineering Laboratories, Inc. 11 Commerce Street Middleboro, MA 02346-1031, USA (508) 946-6200 FAX: (508) 946-6262 www.brookfieldengineering.com A very wide and complete product line including standard rotational instruments supplied with “disc-type” or “ASTM” spindles and cylindrical spindles. Special purpose instruments include cone and plate viscometers, high-pressure rheometers, high shear rate (CAP) digital viscometers and the KU-1 (Krebs Unit) Viscometer for paint. Viscometers are supplied as either dial reading or digital. Brookfield offers programmable (DV) type viscometers and the DV-III Series Rheometers with optional Rheocalc Software for PC control. Cannon Instrument Company P.O. Box 16 2139 High Tech Road State College, PA 16804-0016, USA (814) 353-8000 FAX: (814)353-8007 Email: [email protected] Products include BBR bending beam rheometer, CACV automatic kinematic viscosity capillary viscometer, CAV automatic viscometer for kinematic viscosity, CMRV-2 mini-rotary viscometer and CMRV-3 thermoelectric mini-rotary viscometer.


Appendix A, continued

CCSi Rebuilt Viscometers Corporate Consulting, Service & Instruments, Inc. 1145 Highbrook Avenue, Suite 500 Akron, Ohio 44301-1356, USA (330) 376-3600 or (800) 742-8535 FAX: (330) 376-8500 www.ccsi-inc.com Rebuilds many of the most popular rheological instruments such as the Mooney Viscometer STI 90. DM Scientific www.dmscientific.com/doehler_accessories.html Glass capillary viscometers including Cannon-Fenske, Cannon-Manning semi-micro, Ubbelohde, Cannon-Ubbelohde, Cannon-Ubbelohde semi-micro, Zeitfuchs cross-arm, Cannon-Manning Vacuum and modified Koppers types. Also available is the Fann Series 35 viscometer, a rotating cup type with both six and twelve speed models. Fann Instrument Company P.O. Box 4350 Houston, Texas 77210, USA (800) 347-0450 FAX: (281) 871-4358 www.fann.com Fann Series 35 rotational viscometer. Fisher Scientific 3970 Johns Creek Court, Suite. 500 Suwanee, Georgia 30024, USA (800) 766-7000 Products include: Portable Zahn cups, Ubbelohde tubes, Cannon-Fenske Type kinematic viscometers, Cannon-Manning type vacuum viscometer tubes and Kimble Varnish Viscometer tubes.

Appendix A 493

Appendix A, continued Gebr. HAAKE GmbH (Germany) Dieselstr. 4 D-76227 Karlsruhe, Germany 0721-4094-0 FAX: 0721-4094-300 Geneq www.geneq.com Rotational viscometer for asphalt plant field lab. ICI Cone and Plate digital viscometer. Gilmont Instruments www.barnant.com Falling ball viscometers HAAKE (USA) 53 W. Century Road Paramus, N.J. 07652, USA (201) 265-7865, FAX: (201) 265-1977 www.haake.de Falling ball or rotational viscometer types. Falling ball viscometer (Newtonian liquids), Viscotester VT01/02 (battery driven, rotational), Viscotester VT5 rotational type, following the Brookfield method, Viscotester VT550, for complete characterization of both Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids including the measurement of yield points or thixotropy. Rotovisco models, coaxial cylinder type, Hydramotion www.hydramotion.com [email protected] Portable Viscolite 700 viscometer.


Appendix A, continued ICL Labs www.icllabs.com Cannon-Fenske routine viscometers Kaltec Scientific, Inc. 22425 Heslip Drive Novi, Michigan 48375-4138, USA (248) 349-8100 FAX: (248) 349-8909 E-mail: [email protected] Hercules Hi-Shear Viscometer, Model DV-10 and TS-9. Malcom Instruments Corporation 26200 Industrial Boulevard Hayward, CA 94545, USA (510) 293-0580 FAX: (510) 293-0940 Malcom Company Limited 15-10, Honmachi 4-chone, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151, Japan 03 (3320) 5611 FAX: 03 (3320) 5866 www.malcom.co.jp Spiral viscometers for solder paste. Models PM-2 (hand-held), PC-1TL (tabletop spiral) and PCU-200 digital spiral. Prediction of how solder paste will perform on a screen printer. Utilizes a double cylinder spiral pump method.

Appendix A 495

Appendix A, continued Monumental Viscometers www.monumental.com Sharp Orifice Viscometer for the solid propellant industry. Also good for a wide variety of filled and unfilled polymer compounds at both low and high shear rates. Useful for coal slurries, intaglio inks, rubber, uncured solid propellants, cements and clay slurries. ParrPhysica (800) 688-3569 www.paarphysica.com DSR 4000 High Dynamic Rheometer, Rheolab MC1 rheometer, Rheolab MC100 rheometer, KF20 falling ball viscometer, LS100 low stress rheometer, HVA6 high shear capillary viscometer and MVM magnetoviscometer. P & R Laboratory Group Limited Brindley Road St. Helens, UK WA9 4HY 44 (0)1744 831 800, FAX: 44(0)1744 831 888 www.p-rgroup.co.uk U tube viscometer, suspended level viscometer, Cannon-Fenske Routine viscometer, ASTM Ubbelohde Viscometer and Zeitfuchs Cross Arm Viscometer. Porpoise Viscometers Ltd. Peel House Peel Road Skelmersdale WN8 9PT 01695 50002, FAX: 01695 50329 www.applegate.co.uk www.porpoise.co.uk Specializes in on-line rheology equipment.


Appendix A, continued Reologica Instruments AB www.infra.demon.co.uk/5viscoms.htm ViscoTech, rotational type, RheoCheck, programmable and rotational, and BrukCheck, rotational type. SUCK WISsenshaftliche Geräte ENTwicklung www.suck.de/viscometers.htm [email protected] Dip-in viscometer coaxial system, coaxial standard viscometer KSV and PKV plate-cone viscometer. Type S use fixed rotational speed. Type P is a computer-controlled viscometer. TA Instruments 109 Lukens Dr. New Castle, DE 19720 (302) 427-4000 FAX: (302) 427-4001 www.tainst.com Rheolyst AR1000 and CSL2 controlled stress/controlled rate viscometers. Thermal Technology Centre National Research Council Canada Building M-17, Montreal Road Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, K1A 0R6 www.ttc.nrc.ca/fbvisc_e.htm Falling ball viscometer for prediction of heat transfer and pressure drops in system components.

Appendix A 497

Appendix A, continued Theta Industries, Inc. 26 Valley Road Port Washington, N.Y. 11050, USA (516) 883-4088 FAX: (516) 883-4599 E-mail: [email protected] www.theta-us.com Rheotronic II, rotational type, Rheotronic III, parallel plate and Rheotronic IV, bending beam type. Viscotek Corporation 15600 W. Hardy Road Houston, Texas 77060, U.S.A. (281) 445-5966 FAX: (281) 931-4336 www.viscotek-usa.com Relative capillary viscometer, model Y501.

498

Appendix B

Trade Name Directory Below is a list of trade names that appear in this text along with the name of the supplier that owns it. Also included is a cross-reference to the tables in Part 2 where further information about the product is presented. The address, telephone and FAX number of the supplier can be found in Appendix C.

Trade Name Supplier See Table: A-C AlliedSignal, Inc. 2.15 ACRITAMER R•I•T•A Corp. 2.2b ACRYSOL Rohm and Haas Company 2.1d, 2.4b ACULYN Rohm and Haas Company 2.1d, 2.4b ACumist AlliedSignal, Inc. 2.15 ACUSOL Rohm and Haas Company 2.1d, 2.4b ADVITROL Süd-Chemie Rheologicals 2.14c AEROSIL Degussa AG 2.18b ASVITROL Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G. 2.14c Avicel FMC Corp. 2.6 BENECEL Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. 2.10a, 2.11a Bentolite Southern Clay Products, Inc. 2.19c BENTONE RHEOX, Inc. 2.14a, 2.19b CAB-O-SIL Cabot Corp., Cab-O-Sil Div. 2.18a Carbopol B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals 2.2a CELLOSIZE Union Carbide Corp. 2.8b Claytone Southern Clay Products, Inc. 2.14b CULMINAL Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. 2.10a DARILOID Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 DRICOID Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3, 2.20b

Appendix B 499

Appendix B, continued

Trade Name Supplier See Table:

Gelcarin FMC Corp. 2.5b Gelwhite Southern Clay Products, Inc. 2.19c GENUGEL Copenhagen Pectin A/S 2.5a GENULACTA Copenhagen Pectin A/S 2.5a GENUVISCO Copenhagen Pectin A/S 2.5a GFS Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.20b Hi-Care Rhodia, Inc. 2.12b Hypan LIPO Chemicals, Inc. 2.1a Jaguar Rhodia, Inc. 2.12b KELACID Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELCOLOID Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELCOSOL Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELFLO Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.20b KELGIN Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELGUM Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3, 2.20c KELMAR Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELNOODLIZER

Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3

KELSET Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELTEX Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELTONE Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELTOSE Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELTROL Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.20b KELVIS Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 KELZAN Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.20b KLUCEL Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. 2.9 KOLLIDON BASF Aktiengesellschaft 2.17a LACTICOL Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 LAPONITE Laporte Absorbents 2.19a LUVISCOL BASF Aktiengesellschaft 2.17a



Trade Name Supplier See Table:

MANUCOL Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 MANUGEL Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 MANUTEX Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 MARLOID Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 MAYPRODYN Rhodia, Inc 2.13b METHOCEL The Dow Chemical Company 2.10b, 2.11b

MicroQuick FMC Corp. 2.6 Mineral Colloid Southern Clay Products, Inc. 2.19c N-HANCE Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. 2.12a Natrosol Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. 2.8a Novagel FMC Corp. 2.6 OPTIGEL Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G. 2.19d Pemulen B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals 2.2a PLASDONE International Specialty Products 2.17b POLYOX Union Carbide Corp. 2.16b POVIDERM International Specialty Products 2.17b RHEOLATE RHEOX, Inc. 2.1c, 2.4a

RHODICARE Rhodia, Inc. 2.20c RHODIGEL Rhodia, Inc. 2.20c RHODIGUM Rhodia, Inc. 2.20c RHODOPOL Rhodia, Inc. 2.20c SeaKem FMC Corp. 2.5b SeaSpen FMC Corp. 2.5b SHERBELIZER Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3 SIDENT Degussa AG 2.18c SIPERNAT Degussa AG 2.18c STRUCTURE National Starch & Chemical Co. 2.1b SUPERCOL Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. 2.12a SUPERLOID Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.3

Appendix B 501


Trade Name Supplier See Table: TIXOGEL Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G. 2.14c VAN GEL R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. 2.19e VEEGUM R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. 2.19e Viscarin FMC Corp. 2.5b

Also included in this text are a few product names that are not trade names. These are included in the table below:

Name Supplier See Table: Aqualon CMC Aqualon, A Div. of Hercules, Inc. 2.7 J.X.G. Jungbunzlauer International AG 2.20a KOB Monsanto-Kelco Company 2.20b Locust Bean Gum Ashland Chemical Company and

Rhodia, Inc. 2.13

Mineral Colloid Southern Clay Products Company 2.19c PEO R•I•T•A Corp. 2.16a PVP International Specialty Products 2.17b

502

Appendix C

Suppliers of Rheology Modifiers

Listed below are the names, addresses, telephone and FAX numbers for the 26 rheology modifier manufacturers represented in this handbook. Also included are their Internet web sites, if available. While most are based in the US, several are European based. The European company’s US office or representative is also listed. Most of the larger companies have offices and warehouse facilities around the world. Others may use local distributors or agents to handle their products. Handbook users can learn the location of the company office or distributor/agent closest to them by contacting the corporate headquarters office listed below. It is also probable that there are other manufacturers of rheology modifiers that the authors were not able to locate. It would therefore be prudent for handbook users outside the US, particularly in Asia and South America, to search in local directories for other manufacturers not listed. 1. AlliedSignal, Inc. P.O. Box 1039, 100 Colombia Rd. Morristown, NJ 07692, USA (800) 222-0094 FAX (201) 455-6154

3. Ashland Chemical Company Fine Ingredients Div. P.O. Box 2219 Columbus, OH, USA (614) 790-3083 FAX (614) 790-6126 www.ashchem.com

2. Aqualon, 1313 North Market St. Wilmington, DE 19894, USA (800) 345-0447 FAX (302) 946-2296 www.herc.com/aqualon

4. BASF Aktiengesellschaft Feinchemie D-67056 Ludwigshafen Germany or 3000 Continental Dr.-North Mount Olive, NJ 07828-1234, (800) 533-8964 FAX (973) 456-5355 www.basf.com

Appendix C 503

Appendix C, continued

5. Cabot Corp., Cab-O-Sil Div. P.O.Box 188 Tuscola, IL 61953-0188, USA (800) 222-6745 FAX (217) 253-4334 www.cabot-corp.com/cabosil

9. FMC Corp. 1735 Market St. Philadelphia, PA 19103, USA (800) 526-3649 FAX (215)299-6821 www.avicel.com

6. Copenhagen Pectin A/S Div. of Hercules, Inc. Ved Banen 16 DK-4623 Lille Skensved Denmark +45-56 16 56 16 FAX +45-56 16 94 46 www.herc.com/foodgums

10. B.F. Goodrich Specialty Chemicals 9911 Brecksville Rd. Cleveland, OH 44141, USA (800) 331-1144 FAX (216) 447-5740 www.bfgoodrich.com

7. Degussa AG D-60287 Frankfurt am Main Germany (069) 2 18-01 FAX (069) 2 18-32 18 or 65 Challenger Rd. Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660, USA (201) 641-6100 FAX (201) 641-0297 www.degussa.com

11. Hercules Food Ingredients P.O. Box 8740, 1313 N. Market St. Wilmington, DE 19899, USA (800) 654-6529 www.herc.com/foodgums 12. International Specialty Products 1361 Alps Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470, USA (800) 622-4423 www.ispcorp.com

8. The Dow Chemical Company Midland, MI 48674, USA (800) 447-4369 www.dow.com


Appendix C, continued

13. Jungbunzlauer International AG Schwarzenbergplatz 16 1011 Vienna Austria (0222) 50 200-0 FAX (0222) 50 200-8 or 75 Wells Ave Newton Centre, MA 02159, USA (617) 969-0900 FAX (617) 964-2921 www.jungbunzlauer.com

17. National Starch & Chemical 10 Finderne Ave. Bridgewater, NJ 08807, USA (800) 797-4992 FAX (723) 417-5696 www.nationalstarch.com 18. RHEOX, Inc. P.O. Box 700 Hightstown, NJ 08520, USA (800) 866-6800 FAX (609) 443-2422 www.rheox.com

14. Laporte Absorbents P.O. Box 2, Moorfield Rd. Widnes, Cheshire WA8 0JU United Kingdom 0151-495 2222 FAX 0151-420 4088 (also see Southern Clay Products)

19. Rhodia, Inc. 25, quai Paul Doumer F-92404 Courbevoie Cedex France (33-1) 47 68 12 34 FAX (33-1) 47 68 19 11 or

15. LIPO Chemicals, Inc. 207 19th Ave. Paterson, NJ 07504, USA (973) 345-8600 FAX (973) 345-8365 www.lipochemicals.com

CN 7500, Prospect Plains Rd. Cranbury, NJ 08512, USA (800) 750-1660 FAX (609) 860-0075 www.food.us.rhodia.com

16. Monsanto-Kelco Company 8355 Aero Dr. San Diego, CA 92123, USA (800) 535-2656

20. R.I.T.A. Corp. P.O. Box 1487 Woodstock, IL 60098, USA (800) 426-7759

FAX (619) 467-6520 www.nutrasweetkelco.com

FAX (815) 337-2522 www.ritacorp.com

Appendix C 505

Appendix C, continued 21. Rohm and Haas Company 100 Independence Mall West Philadelphia, PA 19106, USA (215) 592-3392 www.rohmhaas.com

24. Union Carbide Corp. 39 Old Ridgebury Rd. Danbury, CT 06817-0001 (800) 336-7384 FAX (713) 749-7192 www.unioncarbide.com

22. Southern Clay Products, Inc. 1212 Church St. Gonzales, TX 78629, USA (210) 672-2891 FAX (210) 672-3081 www.scprod.com (also see Laporte Absorbents)

25. United Catalysts, Inc. P.O. Box 32370 Louisville, KY 40232, USA (800) 468-7210 FAX (502) 634-7727 (also see Süd-Chemie Rheologicals)

23. Süd-Chemie Rheologicals A.G. Lensbachplatz 6 D-80333, München Germany +49 89 5110-0 FAX +49 89 5110-375 www.sud-chemie.de (also see United Catalysts, Inc.)

26. R.T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc. 30 Winfield St. Norwalk, CT 06856 (203) 853-1400 FAX (203) 853-1452 www.rtvanderbilt.com


99

5. Carrageenan

Carrageenan is extracted from several species of red seaweed. It is a high molecular weight polysaccharide made up of sulfated and non-sulfated 3,6 anhydrogalactose and galactose units linked by alternating α 1-3 and β 1- 4 glycoside groups. The number and position of the pendant sulfate groups differentiates the three types of Carrageenan as shown in the structural formulas below:

Kappa

Iota

Lambda

Figure 2.2 (From FMC Corp. Technical Bulletin, Ref. 2 below)


1. Food 2. Pharmaceutical

C. Ionic Charge

Anionic


1 . K+ and Ca++ essential for effective gelation of Kappa and Iota types, Lambda is non-gelling 2. Elevated temperature and low pH reduces gel strength

C. Recommended Solvent Systems

Water

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton

Joe Sulton


100

Useful References 1 “GENU Carrageenan General Description”, Technical Bulletin B1, Copenhagen Pectin A/S, Lille Skensved, Denmark, 1998 2 “Marine Colloids Carrageenan General Technology” FMC Corp. Food Ingredients Division Technical Bulletin, Philadelphia, PA, USA, 1997

Com

mercially A


101

5. Carrageenan

Table 2.5a. Copenhagen Pectin A/S Division of Hercules, Inc. Lille Skensved, Denmark

Food Grades

Trade Name

Carrageenan Type

Viscosity, mPas1

pH, 5% Soln.

Appearance

Moisture, %

GENULACTA CP-100 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA CSM-2 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA K-100 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA KM-5 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA L-100 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA LK-60 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA LRA-50 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA LRC-21 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA SGI-3F n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENULACTA USD-1 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max.

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

102


Copenhagen Pectin A/S Carrageenan 1. Food Grades

Trade Name

Carrageenan Type

Viscosity, mPas1

pH, 0.5% Soln.

Appearance

Moisture, %

GENUGEL CHP-2 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUGEL CHP-200 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUGEL CJ n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUGEL FB-91 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUGEL MB-61F n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUGEL MB-73 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUGEL ME-83 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUGEL ME-83F n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUVISCO CSW-2 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUVISCO J n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUVISCO J-DS n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max. GENUVISCO MP-11 n/a 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 White-Cream Powder 12 max.

Notes for Copenhagen Pectin Carrageenan data: 1 Measured at 750C with Brookfield Viscometer using appropriate speed and spindle.

Com

mercially A


103

5. Carrageenan

Table 2.5b. FMC Corporation Philadelphia, PA, USA

1. Food Grades

Trade Name Milk Viscosity1, ppm pH

(1.5% Soln.) Appearance Moisture, % Particle Size, µm

SeaKem CM-514 240-270 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem CM-518 215-245 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem CM-611 240-280 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem CM-614 240-280 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem CM-615 240-270 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem GP-317 300-330 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem GP-359 220-260 8.0-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem GP-418 250-280 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem IC-611 n/a 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem IC614 260-290 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <250 SeaKem IC912 n/a 7.5-10.5 Tan Powder <12.0 95%min. <150 Viscarin SD-389 30-60 @ 1.5%

2 7.5-10.5 n/a <12.0 95% min. <180

Rheology M

odifier Handbook

104


FMC Carrageenan 2. Pharmaceutical Grades

Trade Name Type Viscosity , mPas2

pH, 1.5% Soln.

Moisture,%

Features

Gelcarin GP-379NF Iota 20 min. @ 1.5% 7.5-10.5 12.0 max. Hot water soluble Gelcarin GP-812NF Kappa 15-25 @ 1.5% 7.0-10.0 12.0 max. Hot water soluble Gelcarin GP-911NF Kappa 5 min. @ 1.5% 7.5-10.5 12.0 max. Partially cold water soluble,

hot water soluble SeaSpen PF Iota 35-95 @ 1.5%

4 n/a 12.5 max. Cold water soluble

Viscarin GP-109NF Lambda 220-350 @ 1.5% 7.5-10.5 <12.5 Partially cold water soluble, hot water soluble

Viscarin GP-209NF Lambda 100-130 @ 0.5%3 7.5-10.5 <12.5 Partially cold water soluble,

hot water soluble Viscarin GP-328NF Kappa/Lambda 140-210 @ 1.5% 7.5-10.5 <12.0 Hot water soluble 3. Personal Care Grades Viscarin GP-109 Lambda 220-350 @ 1.5% 7.5-10.5 <12 Partially cold water soluble,

hot water soluble Viscarin GP-209 Lambda 100-130 @ 0.5% 7.5-10.5 <12 Partially cold water soluble,

hot water soluble Viscarin GP-309 Lambda 80-130 @ 0.5% 7.5-10.5 <12 Partially cold water soluble,

hot water soluble Viscarin GP-328 Kappa/Lambda 130-210 @ 1.5% 7.5-10.5 <12 Hot water soluble

Com

mercially A


105


FMC Carrageenan 4 Industrial Grades

Trade Name Type Water Gel, Gms. Breakforce5

pH, 1.5% Soln.

Moisture,%

Features

Gelcarin 359 Iota 175-350 8.0-10.5 <12 Hot water soluble Gelcarin 379 Iota 70-150 8.0-10.5 <12 Hot water soluble Gelcarin 812 Kappa 780-920 7.0-10.0 <12 Hot water soluble Gelcarin 911 Kappa 800-1000 7.0-10.0 <12 Partially cold water soluble, hot

water soluble SeaSpen

IN Iota 35-95@ 1.5%

4 n/a 12.0 max. Cold water soluble

Notes for FMC Carrageenan data: 1 Please contact the Supplier for this test method . 2 Brookfield Model LV measured at 75

0 C and 30 rpm using the appropriate spindle.

3 Brookfield Model LV measured at 25

0 C and 30 rpm using appropriate spindle.

4 Brookfield Model LV measured at 250 C using appropriate speed , Helipath stand an T-Bar spindle.

5 Please contact the Supplier for this test method .

Rheology Modifiers Handbook

Documents

ionic charge

tapered bearing

brookfield

ferranti shirley

haake rotovisco

tapered plug

colloid interface

hot melt adhesives